Professional Documents
Culture Documents
A.
Co
V
^
RECOMMENDATIONS.
The
FROM
J.
Work
FORMERLY OF THE THEOLOGICAL SCHOOL CONNECTED WITH HARVARD UNIVERSITY. " It is one of the best Grammars of any language with which I am acquainted. The S}Tiac is easily learned with the help of that proficiency in the Hebrew which is now generally carried away from our Theological
PALFREY,
1>.
D.,
institutions and the little labor necessary for its acquisition is richly repaid by the privilege of consulting a version of the New Testament, which ranks before all others as the oldest and best, and which, besides its importance in respect to evidence of the genuineness of the Sacred Text, has the peculiar interest of presenting the discourses of Our Saviour essentially in the same language in which they were originally pronounced."
;
"I
it
as
FROM PROF. SMITH, OF BANGOR THEOLOGICAL INSTITUTION. have been acquainted with the Grammar for many years, and I regard better adapted for translation in this country than any other grammar
know of. I shall be heartily glad to see an English translation of it, and I have no doubt that such a work would greatly tend to promote, what, by the way, is a most desirable object, the knowledge of the Syriac among our Clergymen and Theological students. There has not been hitherto so much interest taken in our Seminary in the study of the languages cognate
that I
to the
Hebrew
FROM
as I could wish."
C. E.
STOWE,
D. D.,
" It is highly desirable that all Theological students should make themselves acquainted with the Syi'iac tongue for it is not only (next to the
;
Chaldee, perhaps.) the eldest sister of the Hebrew, and the Sacred dialect of that interesting people, the Nestorians but it gives us the very best translation of the Bible, (especially of the New Testament) that has ever been made in any language."
;
FROM HIS PREDECESSOR, THE LATE B. B. EDWARDS, D. D. **Ihave been much pleased wdth Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar. the best for purposes of instruction with which I am acquainted."
"
It
is
FROM T. J, CONANT, D. D., OF ROCHESTER UNIVERSITY. Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar is an admirable work for its object, and is the best extant for school use. I should be glad to see it translated and furnished at a price which could be afforded by Theological students. If a Grammar could be obtained at a moderate price, I think the study would soon become pretty common among ministers. The privilege of reading the oldest version of the New Testament would richly reward all the trouble and expense of acquiring the language." " The Exercises and Chrestomathy have been very carefully prepared^ with good success. Both would be very serviceable to the learner."
"A
here."
FROM J. A. ALEXANDER, D. D., OF PRINCETON THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY. good translation of Uhlemann would command a constant
sale;
SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
WITH
$(l
UHLEMANN'S
SYRIA C GRAMMA E,
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN
BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON.
WITH
A
COURSE OF
NEW YORK:
D.
346
&
348
BROADWAY.
EDINBURGH:
&
J.
CLARK,
38
GEORGE STREET.
5 5.
18
\^^5e,
in the
year 1855,
By
E.
hutch in SOX,
of
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District
New
York,
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
The
increasing desire
to
become acquainted
New
Testament
is
is
by our Saviour.
all to
Uhlemann's Grammar
of rare excellence
will
;
is
is
acknowledged by
be a manual
it
and
it
hoped
that, in
an English dress,
ori-
Some
minous.
its,
to present, within
tion.
The
He
it
seemed
to
After
Grammar,
make
^-i
TrvAXSLATOR'S PREFACE.
The
translation
is
grammar, which,
if
is
believed, mate-
an accurate know-
commence upon
the Exercises,
may meet
in
The
translator
special attention to a
to
in-
Some
have devised
still
better methods.
This
is
submitted
Exercises.
The former
composed of selections
in
was executed
It
and com-
Cambridge.
is
we have discovered
in it
some typographical
first
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
yii
The
is
that inserted by
Uhlemann
in his
grammar,
M.
The Lexicon
in the
intended merely
Chrestomathy.
to
Some
and
numerous references
the Old
New
Testaments, have
There
The
indulgence
by the
literary public.
may
may
be improved.
The
publication of the
The
obligations to
Mr.
W. W. Turner,
T.
J.
late of the
Union Thelogical
Seminary of
sity,
this city,
of Rochester Univer-
and
J.
Mr. A. H. Guernsey,
New
54-2B
for
earlier sheets of this Text book, designed, principally, academical instruction, had been printed, and that part of the Manuscript which contains the elementary principles and paradigms had been for a considerable time out of my hands, when the more comprehensive work of Professor Hoffmann made its appearance. In the preparation of this work my plan had especially led me to present, with as much brevity as was consistent with clearness, what is most essential for understanding the language in its grammatical forms. 1 was of the opinion that the more extended treatment of separate phenomena of the language might be dispensed with, since the greater portion of the Syriac forms may be explained from those of the Hebrew language and in fact, a knowledge of the Hebrew implies an acquaintance with the principles of the Syriac. Upon a close examination of the above-mentioned work, I was convinced, that I had proceeded upon almost the same principles, had made a similar use of the older grammarians, such as Amira, Ludov. de Dieu, Buxtorf, Michaelis, and others, and had deviated only in the
;
The
collocation of separate rules. Although I might have approximated more nearly to the work of Hoffmann, by isolated alterations, yet I deemed it advisable, where deviations
existed, to follow
my own
views
bular arrangement of derivative nouns. Following the older grammarians, I have introduced a separate paradigm of the nouns placed under Declension HI.,"^ instead of classing them with the Segholate forms this w^as done because the vowel entering into the inflection of these nouns is not an original
;
one, as in the case of the Segholate forms, but is introduced on account of the difficulty of pronunciation. Real Segholate
* 48, DecL IIL
forms, inonosyllabic nouns, namely, those derived from verbs 3 rad. Olapli quiescent, belong rather, according to their principal inflection, to the substantive-stems of Declension V., and, in only a few instances, coincide with the Segholate forms. In preparing the Syntax, I have, like Professor Hoffmann, followed the Lehrgebdude of Gesenius and like him, also* I have made use only of those passages of the Old Testament collected by Gesenius, in which the translator, unfettered by the Hebrew text, seems to have wrought more in accordance with the genius of his own language. In addition to this, I have frequently consulted the translation of the JSTew Testament, as the oldest Syriac writing known to us ;*
;
Ephraemi Opera
Barhebraei Chronicon Syr., ed. Kirsch. Lips. 1789 and Assemani Bibliotheca Orient. Clementino-Yuticana, Romse, 1719, tom. III., fob; so that a close and impartial examination will easily determine what has been added from my own not inconsiderSyr.,
174:3,
III., fol.
; ;
Romae,
tom.
able collections.!
******
* In point of time the Feshito version of the Old Testament is the most ancient in the Syriac language, though the New Testament was transMichaelis suplated into Syriac from the original Greek about the same time. poses, that the Syriac verfcion of both Testaments was made near the close of the first, or in the early part of the second century. Tr. t The remainder of the Author's Preface relates mainly to his Reading Lessons, which we have not inserted, they being, in our opinion, too difficult for beg'nners Tr.
document extant
11
CONTENTS.
PAGS
Introduction.
Brief Historical
Yiew
and Literature
17
PART FIRST.
BliCJ^IBNTS
OF THE LANGUAGE
CHAPTER L
WKITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR
1.
2.
USE.
28
Consonants
Yowels
in general
30
3.
Yowel Signs
Points which supply the place of Yowels
.
30
,
4. Diacritical
5.
6. 7.
31
32
^ g
......
XL
33
34
35
35
8. 9.
Tone
1 10.
Marks
of Punctuation
35
CHAPTER
PECULIARITIES
^ 11.
General
Yiew
g 12.
XII
CONTENTS.
PAGB
14.
g
Yowel
...
39
40
41
15.
PART SECOND.
ETYMOL.OOY, OR PARTS OP SPEECH.
CHAPTER L
PRONOUNS.
16.
44
45
48
Sufifixes
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
18.
XL
General
I.
View
Regular Verbs.
Regular Yerbs in General
.49
19.
I.
The
Inflection of
...
.
.
50
52 53
II.
A. Personal
54
55
.
its
56
B. Derivative Conjugations.
g 21.
Ethpeel
58
59
60
61 62
26.
63
Irregvdar Verbs.
I 27.
General
Yiew
...
...
63 65
CONTENTS.
A. Quiescent
1 28. 2 29. 2 30. 31. 32.
ZIII
PAGB
Verbs,
. .
67
68 70
Yau
and
Yud
Quiescent
.
70
72
Yerbs
1 Rad.
Nun
....
.
75 75
76
80
97
36.
102
^ 37.
Suffixes to
103
108
.
110
CHAPTER
THE NOUN.
^39. Derivation of Nouns
40. Nouns derived from Yerbs
in.
Ill
112
Yerbs
113
122
HI-
Denominative Nouns
Composite and Exotic Nouna
H244. 45.
123
124
Number
of
Nouns
Noun
....
.
126
129
132
....
136
139
XIV
CONTENTS,
PAGB
48. I 49.
Exhibition of
Nouns according
to Declension
139
145
Anomalous Xouns
Paradigms of Xouns with
SufiBxes
50. Adjectives
and Numerals
....
IV.
148
150
CHAPTER
PARTICLES.
^ 51.
Adverbs
52. Prepositions
....
PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.
152
153
155
156
CHAPTER
I.
THE PHONOUN.
^ 54.
Suffixes
157
157 159
g 55.
160
160
....
Pronoun
161 163
Use
Use
of the Relative
164
166 166 166
Pronouns
A. Reflexive Pronouns
B. Other Pronouns
167
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
g
XV
PAGE
II.
59. General
Yiew
172 172
60.
Use
^ 61. 62.
Use
175
178 179
Use
A.
Infinitive
Absolute
179
180
182
all
B. Infinitive with
g 64.
Use
of the Participle
....
65. General
Yiew
of the
Manner
of Designating
the different
Moods and
fect,
66.
and Optative
of the
188 190
The Persons
Yerb
Prepositions
I.
193
193
196
201
II.
III. Passive
Mode
^ 68.
of expressing
Greek Composites
other peculiarities chiefly
203
Yerbs
Zu^
....
.
in General
204 204
205
206
69. 70.
Use
of the
Noun
in General
207
Gender of Nouns
210
212.
71.
Number
of the
Noun
XVI
CONTENTS
PAGE
212
214
the Genitive
215
75. Designation and Use of the other Cases 76. The Case Absolute
.
218
220
.
A. The Comparative
B. The Superlative
^8.
221 224
B. Ordinal Numbers
224
C. Other Eelations of
Numbers
226
227
229
Noun
to
A. In Respect
Number
229
232
B. In respect to Gender
C. In respect to both Gender and
Number
is
234
a Compound
234 237
237
A.
B.
Ellipsis of the
Noun
Nouns
lY.
238 238
The
CHAPTER
PARTICLES.
82. 83.
240
Use of the
and negation
242
84. Prepositions
244
246
I 85.
Conjunctions
I 86. Interjections
249
.
.
250
IN
11
ODUCT
O N.
BRIEF'
HISTORICAL VIEW
OF
TIIE
SYKtAC LANGUAGE
A:^rD
LITERATURE.
1. The Sjriac language (sometimes called the Western Aramgean, to distinguish it from the Chald^ean or Eastern Aramgean, with which it constitutes the Aramgean dialect of the Semitic family of languages), formerly extended over the whole northern part of Aram, from the borders of Palestine to J^atolia, and from the Mediterranean to and beyond the Euphrates." It degenerated at an early period, and, during the continual changes of government, 23articularly by the reception of Persian and Greek words, lost much of its original purit}^ Of its pure state, no written monuments have come down to our times. But at the beginning of the fourth century after Christ, the language enjoyed a flourishing period, and kept its place for a long time at Edessa as a written language. As from the earliest period the Palmyrene dialect was recognized as the principal one, so this period has been designated by the name of the Edessene Period. Moreover, at various times, mention is made of the Damascene, the Chalnic or Ctesiphontic, the Acharic or IS^esibene, and the Maronite dialects. The essential difference between these consisted very likely in the pronunciation this may be asserted with still more confidence in respect to the J^abatgean dialect. The ancient written language of Antioch or Com;
magene
is still
sects, in particular
* E. Rodiger says of the Aramasan language: "It was called Syriac in the form in which it appeared in the Christian Aramcean literature, and Chaldee when it appeared in the Jewish Aramaean writings." See Gesenius' Heb. Graram., 15th edit, by Rodiger, Leipz. 1848 Einleitung, 1.2. b. Tr.
;
18
IXTRODUCTIOX.
I^estorians, and Thomas-Christians of India, as their ecclesiastical language. So also the Zabians, or socalled St. John's Disciples, are said to make use of it, in their religious ceremonies. But as the language, as early as the eighth and ninth centuries, was greatly corrupted by the
bj the Maronites,
frequent use of the Arabic, and was driven by the Arabs cities in the tenth and eleventh, and from the villages in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, it may be safely assumed that it is no longer in use as a vernacular Ian guage. Although several modern travelers of note, as
from the
Niebuhr and Brown, maintain that it is still spoken in some parts of Mesopotamia, about Baka, Edessa, and Damascus, as well as upon Lebanon, they are opposed by Ferrieres
and Yolney, while Chateaubriand, Seetzen, Clarke, Joliffe, and Buckingham pass the matter over in silence; and Burckliardt only remarks, that the Maronites in the convent of Kashia use the Syriac, at the ])resent day, as we do the Latin.SauveboBuf
Rem.
The
II.
ii.
LXX,
wider sense,
in
for the
Old Testament
la^i^
(^'1
comp. the
"Apijuioi
Horn. 783; Hesiod Theog. 304; Strabo Geog. i. 2. xi. 14; Stephanus Byzant. under "Api.aa, and Bochart Geogr. S. ii 5, 6); and the Greek and Roman Authors often confound Syria with Assyria (comp. Xenoph. Cyrop. Diod. Sic. ii. 13; Herodot. vii. 63; Strabo xvi. 2 Lucian de Dea Syr. 1 Oppian, Kovriy III. 402 Horat vii. 5, 31 Od. II. 11, 16; III. 4, 32. Justin, i. 2; Animian Marcell. xxiii. 6.
; ; ;
;
f^-^J, as it la}^ at the left, when their faces were turned towards the east (comp. Abulfeda Tab. Syr. p. 5 Assemani In the earliest times this country Bibl. Orient. T. III. P, ii. p. 782.) was divided into several small nations, ruled by kings (comp. Jahn Bibl. Archaol. Thl. i. Bd. i. p. 51 seq.; Mannert Geogr. Bd. vi. p. 1 seq.; Vater Comraentar iiber den Pentat. Bd. I. p. 152 Winer Bibl. Realworterbuch, Bd. i. p. 51 seq.); of these, subsequently to the time of David, Zobah and Damascus are mentioned in the Scriptures, as the most powerful David conquered them both (2 Sam. viii. 3 sq.; x. 6 1 Chron. xix [xviii ] 3, 4. sq), and Solomon kept po.ssession of them
The Arabs
call
it
his
grammar,
it
Mr. Layard, in his admirable torians use the Syriac language at the present day. work on the ruins of Nineveh, says of the Nestorians (or ChaldiEans as he incor" Most of their church books are written in Syriac, them) which, like the Latin in the West, became the sacred language in the greater part Missionaries who are laboring See Layard's Nineveh, chap. viii. of the East," among the Nestorians, bear testimony to the same fact. Tr.
rectly denominates
:
INTRODUCTION.
until
19
(1 Kings
Reson Ben-Eliada, who had been general of the king of Zoba xi. 23 sq.), re-established at Damascus a government inde-
pendent of that of the Hebrews. Subsequently the Syrians were incorporated with the monarchies of the Assyrians (t38 b. c), tlie Persians (539 B. c), and the Macedonians (331 b. c). Though after the death of Alexander the Great, tliey arose again for a time under tlie Seleucidae (301 B. c), yet they again lost their independence by means of Pompey (64 b. c), and their kings reigned only at Edessa, till the third century after Christ, when this kingdom came also under the Roman sway. At the division of the Empire, under Theodosius (395), Syria fell to the Byzantine Empire, after Jovianus had (a. d. 363) already surrendered Nesibis* to Sapores II, king of Persia. Afterwards it was taken
possession of
Ommiades and
were, in Crusades, the Christians could maintain themselves there against the and in 1171, SakSeljooks but a short time (1091 and subsequently) In 1369, Syria became a prey to country from them. din wrested the the marauding inroads of the Mongols under Timur ; and it has now, for three centuries, sighed under the Turkish yoke (cf. Gatterer, Hand;
by the Arabs (636), and was subjected (660) to the several other Arabic royal famihes, whose dynasties brought to a close by the Seljooks.j* At the time of the 1086,
buch der Universalhist, Bd. I. p. 248 sq. Beck, Weltgeschichte, Bd, Heeren, Ideen iiber die Politik, u. s. w. Thl. I. p, I. p. 213 sq. 213 sq. Riihs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 152,
;
;
sq.).
transition into broadness of pronunciation (TrXarufrro^aov) seems not to have extended much beyond the time of the Babylonish and the Palmyrene Dialect, which is known to us by some captivity inscriptions found among the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and deciphered by Barthelemy and Swinton, may have grown up soon after SoloIn the Edessene Period, during which mon, the founder of that city. flourished Ephraem (died 378), Jacob Yon Sarug, Isaac the Syrian, and Xenaias of Mabug, all of whom Jacob of Edessa, at the middle of
;
The
the seventh century, recognizes as classical writers, theological learning was zealously cultivated (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 994). The Maronites
on the Orontes and upon Lebanon, originally disciples and followers Pfeiffer, in his Auszuge, p. 166 sq. of St. Maro (cf. Assem. I. 496 sq. Gieseler, Lehrbuch der Kirchengeschichte, Bd. I. p. 675 Riihs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 37) approximate to the ancient Syriac dialect still more closely do the Nestorians (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 379), and the Thomas-Christians of India, who differ from the Xestorians only in name and place of residence (cf Assem. a. a. 0. pp. Pfeiffer, pp. 285, 484 Gieseler, Bd. I. pp. 417, 638), 413, 435. sq, all of whom make use of it only as an ecclesiastical language the two former si>eaking Arabic in common life, and the latter, the language
; ; ;
* A celebrated cit3'and military post inMesopotamia, generally written Nisibis.TR. t Called, also, Seljuks, Seljouks, or Seljoukian Turks. Tr,
20
of Malabar.
IXTRODUCTIOX.
Different from this
is
(who
;
sect of the same name, in Maraccii Coran. Sur. II. p. 33 Asscm. T. III. P. II. pp. 509-515 Pfeiffer, p.510 sq.; cf. Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 66 Xeander, Allgemeine Geschichte der christlichen. Religion und Kirche, Bd. I. Abth. II. p. 421), whose religious books are written in a corrupted Syriac, and which appears, from the numerous Ghebric expressions which occur in them, to have been drawn up in the Persian Irak. By the Xabataean, according to Barhebraeus (in Assem. T. I. p. 476) is to be understood the former language of the Syrian countrypeople. On the question, whether the Syrian is still a vernacular language, compare Niebuhr, Reisebeschr von Arabien, Bd. II. p. 352 Brown, Biblioth. der neuesten Reisebeschr. Thl. I. p. 489 Ferrieres Sauveboeuf, Memoires historiques, etc., T. II. p. 169 Yolney, Voyage en Syrie, etc., T. I. p. 331 and 13urckhardt, Travels in Syria, etc., pp.
Mohammedan
; ;
sq.
22, 186.
Syriac literature, which extends over almost all branches of knowledge, and in a special manner over the department of Theology, and possesses valuable works upon Oriental and Ecclesiastical History, flourished principally in the period between the fourth and tenth centuries of the Christian era. The language itself, which gave proof of its versatility of expression by the translations of Aristotle and other Greek authors, and by its accurate representation of mathematical subjects, had found, at an earlier period, in its own country, zealous cultivators in the departments of Grammar and Lexicography. As the most ancient grammarians, whose works have been lost, history records the names of Achudemen (died 575), Joseph Huzita (died 580), Jacob of Edessa (died G98), who labored to restore the purity of the ancient language, Jesudenah (at the beginning of the eighth century), John Stylita (about 830), John, son of Chamis, Bishop of Themanum (850), and Honain, the physician (died The first accurate grammar, however, was written by John 876). Bar Zugbi, a Nestorian monk, at the beginning of the thirteenth century about which time, also, Joseph Bar Malcon seems to have composed his Rete Pundorum^ and Barhebraeus (died 1286) At the beginning to have made known his grammatical works. of the sixteenth century, the study of the Syriac language was transplanted to Europe. Theseus Ambrosius learned the Syriac language from Syrians at Rome, in 1514, and became, in 1529, teacher to Albert Widmansiadt, who subsequently pursued^ the study under Simeon, Bishop of the Syrians upon Lebanon. Through the labors of these men, and of Moses von Merdin, whom
2.
;
INTRODUCTION.
21
Ignatius, Patriarch of Antioch, had sent, in 1552, to Julius III. at Rome, and whose instructions were enjoyed by Andreas Dumas (Masius), the publication of the New Testament was effected in
At the close of the sixteenth century, the grammatical 1555. study of the Syriac language was much promoted at Rome itself, by the Maronites Amira and Abraham Ecchellensis, whose copious grammatical works had already been preceded by the attempts of Theseus Ambrosius,Widmanstadt, Tremellius, Dumas, and Waser. They were followed, about the middle of the seventeenth century, by Isaac Sciadrensis and Joshua Accurensis. From this period onwards, the Syriac language has been grammatically pursued in Germany; partly independently of other languages, most copiously by the two Michaelises and Hoffmann ; partly in connection with the Chaldee, as by Ludov. de Dieu and Jahn ; or with the other Semitic languages, as by Buxtorf, Hottinger, Schaaf, Vater, and others. The earliest attempts at Syriac lexicography were also made
and tenth centuries, in Syria, by Honain Isa or Joshua of Maruz, and Gabriel, the son of Bochtiesu. More important, however, are the contemporary works of Isa Bar-Ali (about 885), of Ananiesu Bar-Saru (about 900), and the most serviceable work of this kind by Abulhasan, Isa Bar-Bahlul (about 963,) which is still extant. The lexicons of Dumas, de la Boderie,
in the ninth
Schindler, Crines, Buxtorf, Trost, Hettinger, Gutbier, Nicolai, Schaaf, and Zanolini, which have appeared since the sixteenth century, are confined to the New Testament, with which the FerSyriac literature in 1555 made its appearance in Europe. rarius, and Edm. Castell, on the other hand, availed themselves of the above-mentioned Syriac works relating to the same subject, and John David Michaelis enriched the labors of the latter by valuable remarks and additions. The valuable work of Lorsbach, Arho compared all the Syriac works which had then been printed, besides a number of manuscripts, and collected the words and
wanting in Syriac lexicons, still remains uncomrecently, copious works have been promised by Bernstein and Quatremere, philologists of great merit in the department of Oriental literature. Glossaries are contained in the Chrestomathies of Michaelis, Kirsch, Tychsen, Grimm, Hahn, and Sieffert.
significations
pleted.
More
Jesus,
Rem. Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. I. 13) cites the letter of Abgarus to aud the answer to it, as among the most ancient Syriac writings (cf. Assem. I. 554 III. P. II. p. 8 Gieseler, Bd. I. p. U) and,
; ; ;
22
in like
IXTRODUCTION.
manner, John
is
language.
city, is
But
work
of
nndoubted authenti-
perhaps the translation of the Xew Testament,* which must have existed as early as the second century (cf. Hug:, Einleitung in die Schriften des X. T., Thl. I. p. 348 Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 123). That the Syrians considered their language to be richer than the Ara;
bic is attested by Asseman (III. P. I. p. 326 sq.) and its capacity for rendering Greek authors may be judged from Barhebraeus (Chron. p. 231. ed. Bruns), compared with Aristotle (Top. I. cap. 4). Aluilpharagius, in his Historia Dynast., ed. Pocock, p. 147, mentions Theophihis of Edessa as the author of a successful translation of two books of the Iliad (cf. Assem. I. p. 521). In addition to the larger work of Asseman (Assemani Bibliotheca Orientalis Clementino-Yaticana, Romse, 1729,) 3 vols, fol., and the abridgment of it by Pfeiffer, Erlangen, 1776, we possess a brief history of Syriac literature by Hoffmann, Bertholdt's kritischem Journal der neuesten theologischen Literatur, Thl. XIY., pp. 225-291.
;
I.
GRAM MA IIS.
linguae Syriac^, Parisiis, 1554.
1539.
Widmanstadii, Syriacae linguae prima ekmenta, Yiennae, 1555, 4to. ed. II. Antwerp, 1572. loh. Mercer i, Tabulae in grammaticen linguae Chald., quae et Syriaca Eiusd. grammatica Chald. et Sp*. Yitedicitur, Paris, 1560. 4 to. bergae, 1579, 8vo. Irnman. Tremellii, Grammatica Chald. et Syr. Genevae, 1569, 4to. Appended also to his edition of the Xew Testament. Andr. Masii, Grammatica linguae Syriacae (im Tom. YI. der Antweip, Polygl.) 1573, fol. Casp. Waseri, Institutio linguae Syrae ex optimis quibusque apud Syi'os scriptoribus collecta. Lugd. Bat. 1594. 4to. Ed. II. Leidae, 1619,
4to.
Georg. Amirce,
Chrisfopk. Crinesii,
To. Buxlorfii,
Komae, 1596,
4to.
Syr. h.
e.
Yitebergae, 1611.
et Syr. libri III. Basil. 1615.
Grammaticae Chald.
Ed.
II.
1650, 8vo.
* Hng, in his Introduction to the New Testament, says that the Translation of the Testament was appended to that of the Old Testament, and that both were included under the same name, Pcshito. Tr.
Xew
INTRODUCTION.
To.
23
Genev. 1619, 4to, Aramagarum per comparationem etc, Idea liuguarr. Copenh. 162t, 8vo. Abrah. Ecchelknsis, Lingua? Syr. s. Chald. perbrevis institutio. Romae, 1628, 16100. Ludov. de Dieii, Grammatica linguarr. orientt. Hebrasorum, Chald. et Syr. inter se collaturum Lugd. Bat. 1628, ex recens. Clodii. Francof. ad M. 1683, 4to. Isaac Sciadrensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 1636, 8vo. Fok. Michad. Dilherri, Rudimenta grammaticae Syr. Halis, 163Y. Ed. II., 1646, 12mo. Tosephi Acurensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 1641, 8vo. [o. Ernst. Gerhardi, I,ma,y^a(pia, linguae SjTO-Chald. Hal. Sax. 1649. Andr. Scnnerti, Ebraimus, Clialdaismus, Syriasmus, Arabismus nee non Ra])))inismus, etc. Yiteb. 1666, 4to. Eiusd. Chaldaismus et SyriasTrhrni. Nicolai,
mus,
loh.
etc., 1666. Henr. Hottingeri, Grammatica Chald. Syr. et Rabbinica Turic. 1652, 8vo. Eiusd. Grammatica quatuor linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab, harmonica Turici, 1659, 4to (the Syriac also printed
separately).
Briani Waltoni, Introductio ad lectionem linguarr. orientt, Hebr. Chald. Samarit. Syr. Arab. Pers. Armen. Copt. Lond. 1653, 12mo, lo. Leusdeni, Scholae Syriacae lib. III. etc. Ultraiect. 1658, 8vo. Guil. Beveridgii, Grammatica Syr. tribus libris tradita. Loud. 1658,
8vo.
Brevis et harmonica quontura fieri potuit grammaticae Hebr. Chald. Syr. ^thiop. Arab, et Pers. delineatio. Lond. 1669 (preceding his Lex. Heptagl.) Dav. Grafunderi, Grammatica Syriaca cum Syntaxi, etc. Yiteb, 1665. lo. Nicolai, Grammatica linguarr. Ebr, Chald. Syr. Arab, JEthiop. Pers.orientalium secundum prima praeccpta delineata harmonica. lenae, 1670. 4to. Ed. II. Critica Sacra Francof. et Hamb. 1686, lo. Altingi, Synopsis institutiouum Chald. et Syr. Francof. ad M. 1676. Ed. Yl. a Georg. Othone adornata, 1701, 8vo. Christ. Cellarii, Porta Syriaca. Cizae, 1677, 8vo. Eiusd. Porta Syriae
Castelli,
Edm.
linguarr.
Syriasmus facilitati et integritati suae restitutus, etc. Lips. et Francof. 1678. 4to. in compendium redactus a Christ. Liidovici Yiteb. 1669, 4to. Car. Schafii, Opius Aramaeum complectens grammaticam Chaldaico Syriacam, Lugd. Bat. 1686, 8vo. Ed. III. lo. Aug. Danzii, Aditus Syriae reclusus, etc. Tenae, 1689. 1715, 8vo. lo. Em. Gerhardi, Harmonia luiguae Chald. Syr. et JEthiop. lenae, 1693, 4to.
Opitii,
Henr.
24
Uerm. von der Hardt
INTEODUCTION.
Syriacse linguae fimdamenta.
orientt.
Helmst. 1694.
(Only Paradigms.) 8vo. Ge. Othonis Palsestra linguarr. etc. Francof. 1702. 4to.
lo.
^th.
Pers.
Hebraicse, Chald. Svr. et Samarit. linfruarum Francof. ad M. 1707. 4to. harmonica. Sam. Frid. Bucheri Thesaurus orientalis s. compendiosa et facilis methodus hnguarr. orientt. etc. Francof. et Lips. 1725. 4to. Christ. Bened. Michaelis Syriasmus i. e. grammatica hnguae Syr. Halis, 1741. 4to. lo, David Michaelis Grammatica Syr. Halis, 1784. 4to. /. G. Kals Grammatica Hebraeo-harmonica cum Arab, et Aram.
Phil.
Hartmanni
institutio
etc.
Altona?,
1784.
W.
loh.
Gottfr.
Syrisch-Chaldaisch-Samaritanischen Sprache. lena, 1794. 8vo. Innoc. Fessleri Institutiones linguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et Arab. Vratisl. Halis et lense, 1787 et 1789. (Ap01. Gerh. Tychseni Elementale Syr. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo.
Chrestomathy.) lo. lahn. Aramaische oder Chaldaische und Syrische Sprachlehre Wien 1793. 8vo. neu herausgegeben von Oberleitflir Anfiinger. ner Elementa Aramaicte s. Chaldaeo-Syriacie Hnguae etc. Yiennae, 1820. 8vo. loh. Sev. Vater Handbuch der Hebr. Syr. Chald. und Arab. Grammatik. Leipzig, 1802 u. 1817. 8vo. Thomas Yeates^ Syriac Grammar, principally adapted to the New Testament in that Language. Lond. 1819. 8vo. Hampus Tullherg Elementale Syr. P. I. et II. Lond. 1824. 8vo. Paul Ewald Lehrbuch der syr. Sprache. Erlangen, 1826. 8vo. Andr. Theoph. Hoffmanni Grammaticie Syriacse hbri HI. Halae,
to his
pended
1827. 4to.
II.
LEXICONS.
Andr. Masii Syrorum peculium. Antwerp, 1521. folio. Fahr. Boderiani Dictionarium Syro-Chald. Antw. 1572. (Tom. VI.
Val.
pentagl.
fol.
Hanoviae,
1612.
1649.
Lond.
Viteb. 1612. 4to. Christoph. Crinesii Lexicon Syriacum. Romae, 1622. 4to. Bapt. Ferrarii Nomenclator Syriacus. loh. Basil. 1622. 4to. Buxtorjii iun. Lexicon Chald. et Syr. loh.
etc.
SYKIAC CHKESTOMATIIIES.
gg
Thomas a Novaria Nomenclator Syr. Romse, 1636. 8vo. Andr, Sennerti Lexici Cbald. et Syr. compendium. Viteb. 1666, 4to. loh. Henr. Hottingeri Etymologicum orientt. s. Lexicon liormonicum
heptagl. etc. Francof. 1661.
Turici,
1664.
4to.
Lexici, Syr.
(Appended
to his Syriac
Hamb. 1667. 8vo. (Appended to Lis Aegid. Guthirii Lexicon Syr. New Testament.) Edm. Castelli Lexicon heptagl. Lond. 1669. From this has been specially edited the Syriac, by J. G. Michaelis, under the title, Edmundi CastelH Lexicon Syr. Gotting. 1788. Tom. II. 4to. lo. Ft. Nicolai Hodogeticum orientale harmonicum etc. lense, 1670. 4to. Christoph. Cellarii Glossarium Syro-Latinum. Cizae, 1683. 4to. Car. Schafii Lexicon Syr. concordantiale. Lugd. Bat. 1708. (Appended to the New Testament Ant. Zanoiini Lexicon Syriacum. to the New Testament.)
Patav. 1742. 8vo.
(Appended
ni.
CHRESTOMATHIiS.
Dav. Michaelis Syrische Chrestomathie Thl. 1. Gottingen, Die II. Ausg. 1783. mit einem Glossar. u. Anm. 1768. 8vo. vervoUstandigt unter dem Titel loh. Dav. Michaelis Chrestomathia Syr. Ed. III. glossario adnotationibusque instructa a /. Ch. Dmplce. 1829. Hafn, 1784. /. C. G. Adleri Chrestomathia Syr. loh. Gottfr. Hasse Lectiones Syro-Arabico-Samaritano-^thiopicse Regiom. et Lipsise, 1788. 8vo. Hofye, 1789. 8^o. (Newly Georg. Guil. Kirschii Chrestomathia Syr.
loh.
:
edited by Bernstein.)
Rostochi, 1793. 8vo. Olai Gerh. Tychsen Elementale Syriacum etc. Henr. Ad. Grimm Neue Syrische Chrestomathie mit einem Glossarium Lemgo, 1795. 8vo. u. s. w. Gust. Knoes Chrestomathia Syr. maximam pai'tem e Codd. MSS. Gotting, 1807. 8vo. collecta. Aug. Hahn et Sleffert Chrestomathia Syr. s. S. Ephraemi carmina Lips, 1825. 8vo. (With a Lex. Syr.) selecta.
SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
ELEMENTS OF THE LANG- U A GE
TABLE OF CONSONANTS.
NAME.
PART FIRST.
SOUND
Olaph
Beth
1
..r:i
Sjnritus
B, Bh, V.
lenis.
2 3
o
Asr
m
a.
ui
Gomal
Dolath
r r
G.
4
5
6
D,
Dh
(i/tinthis).
4
5 6
7
He
Vau
Zaiii
01
01
01
01
H.
Q
1
Q
\
1
W or V.
Z,
?Gr,cFr.
Cheth
Teth
X
kA>
Ch, or Hh.
T.
10
11
Jud
Coph
Lomacl
Mirn
X
4 ^
4 4
%jk.
hA
Y.
10
>*-
K, Ch.
L.
20 30
12 13
1
Ld
J
i
Sd 1
Ul
^
V
^0
M.
N.
S.
40 50
60
70
14
15
Nun
Semcath
m
1
2i.
16 Ee 17
U
]
1
2)
^m M
^i
y Hebrew.
P, Ph, F.
Ts.
Phe
80 90
18 Tsode
19
Koph
a n
5
..a
^
>
K
R.
Sh.
gutturaljQ.
100
20 Rish
21 22
r
..I&
200 300
Greek.
Shin
A o2
Z
A
A
^S
Thau
Th. T.
400
28
CONSONANTS.
CHAPTER
I.
1.
Consonants.
The
Syriac, or
with the Arabic, it connects together the several letters of a word by horizontal lines at the bottom from which arises a fourfold form, thouo-h essentially the same, according as a letter is initial, medial, or final, or is connected or unconnected with the preceding letter, as exhibited in the table on the j^i'cceding pao-e.
;
two consonants.
common
Rem.
1.
The
and
is
character
said
exhibited
It
is
in
the
preceding alphabet,
is
called Feshito,
Jacobites,
i. e.
the simple.
employed by the Maronites and to have been invented by Jacob of Edessa in Besides this, Amira mentions the Estrangelo^
not from C-rpoy^uXo^, round^ (see Asseman Biblioth. Orient. T. III. P. 11. p. 378.) which, according to Michaelis Gram. Syr., p. 15, means the Go'ipel character (scriptura evangelii). It was the basis of the Nestorian smaller character, to which the so-called double alphabet, used for inscriptions and titles of books,, bears a strong There is also the Palmyrene alphabet, found in inscripresemblance. tions on the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and the Afandccan or Nabatoean alphabet. The latter, in consequence of the amalo-amation of the gutturals ( with 1 and Ol with >j consists of only twenty con,
,
with four different forms of each letter, viz., the simple consonant, and the consonant with the vowels a, , or u. Rem. 2. The lettere |, j, Ol, Q, \, ^, \, A, connect only After one of these letters, therefore, > with the preceding letter.
sonants.
It is w^ritten in a continuous line,
i,
also,
always
,
at the
f
The
^ ^
,
-^
Vi
before -^
written
-^
and
after
or
}. Double ^,
at the
end
of a
word
m.
The
letter
CONSONANTS.
other languages,
is
29
written
\^
e.g. %!D,
JD, *2),
etc.
Rem.
3.
The
Spiritus lenis and S'j)iritus as'per of the Greek language Deeper guttural sounds are *>*(== the German ch ) and ^ which the Greeks express, sometimes by the Spiritus asp)er^ and sometimes by y. The sound of *D is formed in the fore-part of the mouth that of %0 ffirther back towards the throat. ** == 'j2J sometimes stands for g at the end of Greek words, and is pronounced, according to Amira, p. 9, sc before e and i. The aspirated consonants Z^iSp.^.O are, in some MSS., marked as such with a red
( 12. 5. b).
;
the removal point placed over them by the same sign beneath them (5).
;
of the aspiration
is
indicated
Rem.
4.
The
division
is
of consonants,
with reference
to
the
organs of speech,
the
same
as
in
Hebrew.
MkiCT I occasion
less
difficulty
than in Hebrew,
Sheva and
Daghesh forte
with
ij.
Of the
that
h)
(
gutturals, in connection
and Q,
to
be remarked
ci)
the sound of y
e.g.
pO[^ ko-yem
that
O
e),
quiesces in
and
|
{== o and
?t),
and
c)
after
and
au and eu
that initial
pre-
500L( Ihudho
;
d) that initial
e.
g.
OH
ehadh.
Rem.
5.
The
far as
letters of the
Alphabet
suffice for
designating the
sq).
numerals as
In
e.
g. \:iDL
441.
From
letter
;
500
900, the
tens of
50
90
are denoted
e.g. *flD
600, *) 800.
Thousands are
numbers 20 and 50 are also expressed by double j^ and J, tli<j final letters falling away where units are added. Fractional numbers are designated by a small line drawn obliquely downward, from left to right, over the letter which expresses the denominator of the
fraction
;
e.g. .JD
==^,
&
80
2.
SIGNS.
Sigii^).
and Vowel
InSyriac, tlie vowel-letters |, o, and wt originally served to designate the vo^Ye]s, and, at the time of Mohammed, the Syrians were acquainted with only three vowel-signs, which sufficed for their language, and which the Arabs appear to have borrowed from them. Afterwards the Monophysites sought to express the Greek vowels, and increased their number to seven (v. Asseman T. I. pp. 477, 478 Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 34), and since the time of Theophilus of Edessa, in the eighth century,the Greek vowels appear to have been The Nestorians, on the other hand, make in common use. use of diacritical points (Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 378). The Monophj'sites or ^laronites commonly use them only in doubtful cases.
;
Rem.
Even
]
Heva
"V
era-
making
==
a,
1=0,
e,
wi
=^
^,
and
=u
(v.
Michaelis. p. 29).
Voivel
Signs.
the vowels by diacritical points, or by characters formed from and in imitation of the Greek vowels, the latter mode being that now generally used. In ancient
name.
Greek.
sound.
or
or
or
or
Pethocho
Revotzo
Chevotzo
Zekofo
I-mAs)
a.
^>
e.
U*^m)
-K
i.
or
(]ii01
0.
Q Q Q
Etzotzo
(|j^
"
Rem.
1.
The names are derived from the form of the organ used
The Greek forms fiom which they
in
are derived
also occurs
without
Q.
=u
^\o
and
(For |A-^10, Luke xvii. 29, stands more correctly f A^Ji^D ^^5^i. Psahn xi. G). The first three vowel-signs may also be written beneath
the consonanis.
Rem.
though
As was
2.
to pronunciation,
seems
o
to
ae,
Asseman
In
German
and
ic.
Rem.
that
As
to quantity
it
may
^,
with
and with Q
are
always long
;
according to others,
= ==
a,
;
o,
and the
Some grammarians also denote even with Q, are common. the quantity of the vowels by different signs, thus
LONG.
^
O
Rem.
with
SHORT.
Revotzo.
7-
Chevotzo.
Etzotzo.
'O
O
are formed with
4.
The dipthongs
with
.a
a)
g.
g.
preceding
;
at the beginning or
middle of a word, au
(
e.
fZoiiD
-
6)
preceding, oi
nearly
of
the
German eu)\
after
-x
,
e,
jiOICuAjiI;
I
7
;
c)
c?)
in
the
laiddle
word,
^
u,
iu\
e.
g.
wiGIQ^r^QJ
to
Vau
doubled, the
first
with
on (according
Amira
with
u).
With Yud
and
^
c above);
p
a)
a preceding
at the
^97
;
tii
e.
g.
e.
(1^1
g.
b)
with
in
the
middle and
end of a word,
oi
{AjklOpO.
4. Diacritical Points
which supply
the place
of Yowels.
32
vowels,
by the
cn
Rem.
According
;
Amira
.
p. 51,
001=001;
while
001=001;
-i01=wk01
-01=*j01
more
point
definitely in his
Grammar,
35
seq.
when above
a, o,
and
zi,
under
it e,
un-
The principal use of this point in der wi and I /, and under Q ?/. the verb, is to denote the different persons and tenses (v. Amira, Lud. de Dieu, p. 37). Throughout the preterite, with the p. 51 exception of the 1 sing., it stands under the radicals. In the parti;
ciple, it denotes,
over the
_f_.
first
in
In the imperative
The future takes it only under the omitted or written underneath. not under the preformatives, with the exception of the 1 sing., where it stands above it (comp. Isenbiehl, Beobachtungen von dem Gebrauche des Syrischen Puncti diacritici bei den Verbis, Gottingen, 1773).
radicals,
Kushoi and Rukoh {%jLQi j^OJ)* 5. According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians have in fact the Sheva, and pronounce a vowelless consonant
1.
pronounced n kum. and the Zabians, use JL* Some Grammarians,as Amira, p.42, So too, according to Asseman, the doubling of consonants in pronunciation (Daghesh forte) occurs among the Oriental Syrians, and, according to the analogy of the Hebrew, in Pael
with a short half-sound of
e
;
e.g.
^QOJ
and Ethpaalof Verbs^aandMi.* But as the doubly written consonant falls away where analogy would require it to be retained ( 8), this grammatical usage is still very doubtful. This duplication is retained only in foreign words. 2. Analogous withDaghesh lene is Kn.shoi,(^.e. hardenmg), red point inserted over the aspirates, in manuscripts, which a removes the aspiration. The retention of the aspiration is
indicated
wfienin<j!).
*
It
called
Rukoh
(i.
e.
Syriac, denoted
should be borne in mind that Sheva and Daghesh are not, in by any written characters, and appear only in pronunciation.
-Tr.
RIBUI.
33
Rem. Some consider Kusboi to be Daghesh forte, which is Lud. de Dieu, p. 25 sq., places denied by Ainira and Gabriel Sionita. it a) at the beginning of words, except where ^O^Q precede, or where O f in wliich case Rukok is the preceding word ends in .-*
;
retained;
e.g.
;
|, >
VJNZ, |rA^\A^;
;
b)
in
the
;
middle,
A^Jj^
;
after
quiescent letter
e.
g. CTfJ - ^V)
c) after
dipthongs
e. g.
iZoliO,
as. Rukok, on the contrary, occurs, besides with the exception of the cases noted under a above a) when one of the aspirates ends a syllable, but is in the same case hardened by a preceding vacant
;
^|
;
consonant
e. g.
^^Z|
Sheva
;
b)
when, according
(
to
follow a movable
1"
e. g.
Ao>QQ
c) after
e.
g.
Hl.
So
Pa
away
g. . qNoZ from ^\qj and in verbs with the middle radical doubled, Furthermore, here belong where, in Hebrew, Daghesh forte stands. the letters in which one having fallen away before them, is to be com-
pensated
for, in
where Daghesh
the future and infinitive of verbs wa.2), or in general These points do forte euphonic stands in Hebrew.
^
6.
1.
Bihui (^QOj).
distinguish the plural of nouns and verbs from the singular written with the same consonants, the Sjriac makes use of Eihui^ i. e. two points placed horizontally over This sign is still retained, like the vowels, in the word.
To
printed books.
\'\
is
read
\V>
the Icings^
is
This sign
also
Olaph
guish
in all
and distinguished from |n\V), the Icing. used in the 3 plur. fem. pret. of Verbs 3 rad. the conjugations except Peal ( 32), to distin
17
.1^
it
from 3
sing. masc.
e. g.
themselves ,from
i.\
..Zf
In like
pret. masc.
manner Ribui strengthens the distinction between the 3 plur. and fern., where the formatives Q and **. at the
fall
end sometimes
Qi4^>
V^Q*
The
which are
34
main without this designation, though it is not omitted in plural forms with suffixes. In numerals the usage is arbitrary.
SoToe
mark with
;
With suffixes
Rem.
e.
^LiU^^ .qOaj-Z.
omits Ribui,
Amira,
p. 48,
when
( 44)
has the signification tQJ| or tOQLkAal, i. e. they are, but adopts the above-mentioned use numerals, and uses it also with prepositions joined with plural suffixes ( 16. c).
2.
to
denote collectives
e. g.
\\iO^ a heeve^
l^n^D a herd ofbeems. Rem. When Ribui stands over i (with the exception of the 1 sing, pret. and fut., and the participles Act. Pe., according to 4. Rem.),
omitted.
When
three points
come
together, one of
them
represents
Kushoi.
7.
_ Woi-;Li)).
an accumulation of consonants without vowels, and .the Syrians wish to indicate that a monosyllabic word is to be pronounced as a dissyllable, or a dissyllabic word as a trisyllable, and so on, they place a line under the
occurs,
When
more rarely
-n
) is
to
be supplied
e. g.
IAXmj. This
line is called
Mehagyono^ and
accumulation in utterance denotes a removal of this If, on the contrary, the voice is to hurry over (Diaeresis). these same consonants, a line is drawn above them, which is
called
Rem.
place
Mebagyono
p. 41. sq.,
only
before
M<^\
and before
**.
in
|A*j^j.
Amira,
compares the
two with Dicsresis and Si/nceresis, which may have been transferred (Vd. Chrestom. Syr. ed. Hahn et Sieffert, from prosody into prose. 1825. p. 11). Lips. Rem. 2. Sometimes a line is found over consonants a) in numerals ;
e.
g. ^-i
12
6) in abbreviations
1,
to distinguish
.... gfrom
;
e.
pO
for
"j^
\MUfO
'
c)
it
Of.
LINEA OCCULTANS.
8.
35
Linea Occultans.
;
a) that the
;
under which
it
stands
at the
is
not pronounced
e.
g.
by 01
1.
is
to be
;
e.g.
jOll (vid.
Eem.4)
c)
e. g.
^^y^^^lj
pronounced
of the
two
;
radicals
is -4501
Rem. Some have extended this also to the imperatives Ethtaphal and Eshtaphal but in the latter especially, it appears to be merely
a be regarded as coming under b and
9.
diacritical designation of the imperat.
c
As such
it
may
in general
above.
Tone.
1.
ble,
stands regularly
sylla-
a movable
consonant
Rem.
e. g.
]a \V^ Mdlco.
,
In an accumulation
more
p.
of consonants,
where by Mehagyono
( 7) the penultimate syllable becomes the antepenultimate, the tone remains upon the stem-syllable.
It is
difficult to
to
Amira,
462, have
same
rule
e. g.
2.
The tone
;
is
it
ends in a movable
w^
final, *if
consonant
e. g.
t^A^
so too with
;
Q and
they
have arisen from Id and Ao. 469. vid. Amira, pp. 467
e.
g.
The
Hebrew system
Amira,
of
p. 475, into
36
protasis
GENERAL YIEW.
and apodosis, which again are subdivided into smaller parts, and include the more precise designation of In this respect they designate ; a) subject and predicate. tlie separate members of the protasis with (:) h) the close of the protasis with (), which is also the sign of interrogation separate members of the apodosis with (), c) the which also marks longer interrogations ; and d) the close of a period is marked by a point, which as it also occurs in the middle of a period, some consider to be the smallest mark of interpunction, and () or (::) the largest point. Rem. Amira, p. 479, mentions a point standing over a word which indicates a question, address, admiration, praise, command, and
; ;
the
like.
CHAPTER
U.
As
12.
Of
grammarians
those changes in the radical consonants which Hebrew classify as Assimilation, Transposition, Falling
; ;
37
away, Exchange, and Addition, the first only is wanting in And this want is only in form, for in point of fact Syriac. this feature exists in those cases where a letter is dropped in pronunciation by the occurrence of Linea occultans (| 8. comp. Gesenius, Lehrgebaude, p. 132). Here should be noticed the following 1. Consonants are
a) in
is
doubled
;
e. g.
\\\\>
mano ;
e.
|Zr*^
c) 01 in
suffixes of the 3
masc.smg.
of the
wiCJl
.jOIO
aC7U.,
%^0lQ-.
of
^G\a
noun phiral
(v.
Table to
16); or
;
arisen from
d)
in derivatives of verbs
/?^ p)0.'i'i'^cula7'
is
^^and ]a,
;
-x
as
)u)OQ from (^
I
B)
,
a)
with
initial
in
^-i-^l
^**l
**J|
>
^^d
m the pronoun
;
]j] ]\1a
b)
with
Ol,
a) in the
pronouns 001
and
*aOl
e. g.
001
AuA
or with the
;
away of
e.
g.
however, before
;
passes
38)
into
it
is
e. g.
OOl p( for p]
;
^)
jooi
vis^O
(v.
when
killed
;
an auxiliary verb
j^GLk
e. g.
jOOl
c)
he
had
7) in .rDOLi for
to
give
with
in ^l]
to
go away^
1
;
when
e. g.
it
falls
Allffor ASiT
28)
d)
with
J in
masc. and
fem.,
>
wiAj*) fern.,
and
their plurals
;
tOAj| masc.
^Aj|
;
and
in
e.g.
(Al
and
finally
e)
with
in
is
Z;s daughter ;
retained under
Rem.
Linea occultans
;
in
,
e.g.
jZ oi
>tj
|Z;~k|
|Zqaj]
and
many
88
others.
It
OGl and wiOl when they are used occurs in p| copula or substantive verb (comp. 16. 1., 54. A. 3. a and c). In these pronouns, even when they stand pleonastically ( bo. A), the logical copula is fundamentally involved, as is confor the logical
firmed by the pleonastic use of (001 ( 68. A), which verb loses Linea occultans only when it is used absolutely in the sense of to he, to become^ to come to jjass ; As to further inflection of
^CTLi
2.
compare 29.
is
1.
R^m.
Transposed
Es}iicx.\ e. g.
^L'Aco] from
^joA*1 from
1
^ufos.
;
Rem.
for
is
changed into t^
e. g.
.m..So^1
kA.!iDZ|,
is
^X\\
as
for
^lZ(
There
is
no transposition when
Z
(v.
Ql
from
e.
g.
^>Q.jSlLI\
;
31. 2).
middle radical
is
sometimes transposed
..^Ol) (v.
e.
g.
\ in the imperat.
.
8).
7
Dropped are
P%
i
;
a)
e. g.
>i;n
for
-ajI
and
as
first
the 1
;
intin.
and
;
part. Pa.
of
Yerbs l
^s]
;
(g 28. 1)
h)
^Q^l
for
\iQo11
and
in
^] for ^
in
;
wi
and
J as first radical,
and
as
middle radical
e.
Verbs
*^
( 29. 2),
( 33. 1),
and Ql
( 31. 1)
g.
%QaLo from^QSj.
nouns as
^onV>
for
^omV)
;
The same
true also in
c)
e. g.
Also when
fut.
pass.
e.
g.
\>J^LL
for
^'^alLL
ings
4.
Finally Z
Aa.
;
falls
away
the
_
at the
Zq and
T .7
e. g.
;
on\V)
a)
b)
for
ZoqLSd.
Exchanged are
T
7
gutturals
1 and
before OT;
into
e. g. ;-01|
for ^^Gll;
in transferring
Hebrew words
Syriac,
-)
^
)
sometimes
01
;
into
and
also
of verbs
n^?
into
e.
QUIESCENT LETTEKS.
39
laid
d)
"^^'y^.
^)
A when
witli
and ^, according to Eem. 2. above; L in the construct state fern., and before sufhxes
( 45, 46);
1
and
e. g.
in the Ethpe.
and
Eilijya.
of verbs
]^
( 28.
Kem.
Rem.
This
e.g.
last
|2)
Verbs
fill
;
\^*.lL
from vMjf^
In
many
is
doubt-
e.
g.
or ;..]
Hence
;..
found.
The
derivatives from
here;
5.
e.
g.
(AajoZ from
are
;
-*>0(
|
Added
a)
,
sometimes
.
^.
QS]
for
Zoo
;
wAs| for
e. g.
^Z^
also in
5-a(^ov
;
o.sper in
c);
=
;
e. g.
^i.Soooi>
'Pw/xajoj
A.
even in compound
dxjvo^og
;
words in the
cases
later Syriac
e. g.
.iDOjOlJacD
and in
;
where
01
e. g.
^ODO'^GiZi Usrpog
c) J is
added where
it
V2AjV= ^^^.
13.
Quiescent Letters.
, , ,
The
01
also,
=^
1.
Rem.
Here belongs
Hebrew.
final in
;
for
CFI
of the
The following
f
letters
;
quiesce
e. g.
;
and
And
so
IJ..
IJ.*.J
medial in
g.
and
falls
e.g.
xyl^tSD, 'rLopsD
and
if it
have a vowel,
;
this
e.
^|aJ
in
Hebrew;
^p
= ^5^l3*
40
Rem.
words
I
quiesces in
at are
in
]^i, H^,
(
and
represented by
;
sometimes by
e.g.
iZooliD
for
yi(3:,)rog
s.
jaD^jO
xajpo^.
stands
a and
2.
o quiesces in
e.g.
e.g.
]ljOQi
Rem.
fiOQ
for
-r>
(3. Eem.
4).
.
In
og
;
. ,
in the termination
=
;
e.
g.
J]00^>\>*=^
^ikiit'n'Qg.
tJQDQ
is
also
used
find
a<^
e. g.
JSOO^I
^
;
fX"'^-
''^
^^ later language
ccpx?-
we
also
8.
J2DQL*Z]
wi.,
'A^-/]vaij
JCDQOj|
medial and
..Zj^
final,
quiesces, in
and
a.
e.
g.
1^,
and
7
>\
1
initial
usually quiesces in
e. g.
\Jp,
e. g.
falls
QLlr->o for
Ql,^o
quiesces
e. g.
-, O,
|,
in the pronouns
^Aj")
toAj]
,^>\^ pronounced
is
Icotelitun^
in
^ of the
2.
participle
%u
not sounded.
o and
at the
end of words
sing.
a) in verbal endings
;
3 plur. and 2
fem.)
ti
e. g.
,
%jA^4^ q!^^^
where
OOI
.
h)
in the suffixes
fol-
^jSi.
^01 Q
e.
.j*.
is
lowed by Ooi
g.
i^n pronounced
and the
like,
c) in
Vi
\V) Z
yesterday^
%\\%
(
rest^
which form
in
46. 1).
'
41
15. Changes in the Vowels. Altliough to a less extent than in Hebrew, the vowels in Syriac, undergo various changes and modifications in respect to formation and derivation, still they are exchanged^ transposed^ dropped or added. 1. They are exchanged partly in accordance with the genius of the language, and partly in transferring Hebrew and Chaldee words. The genius of the language requires the following exchanges of vowels a) in the preformatives
;
of the
wfcjS
,
fut.
and
infin, Pe. in
simple syllables,
;
in
Verbs
\si
(f^>* 32),
e. g.
;SdH)
y'
Al^
;
e.g.
in the
femmine with
in the con-
mto
e.g.
f^4
construct state
Al6
( 45. 2).
may
be noted
5
a) for
;
the Syriac
T
= d1&^ exchanged in proper names mostly with TT .umASI* = H^S^ QQaA = 1^3? with 9 with ^]3yC10 = tlJlp Q P^^^ = (Chald.
prefers
;
e. g.
U..
V^
= nbt^ tt
^
^'
_
-:
b)
is
e. g.
e. g.
*"
T ^P
>>
"it
e. g.
^^ ^^^^^
'
^' S-
^)2V) dr2.
A)
in general; a)
is
in the im-
when
;
a suf&x
added
e. g.
ol^Q^D,
b)
vowel over
52.
1;
\
1, w, or Oil,
;
upon
compare
a) in xsi]
13.
,
].
3;
ever ALiI
is
vrhenit
;
back upon
e.g.
fc>^
^^ll (12.1);
syllable
( 45. 3
;
^) in
-o'^D,
state
when
U?a)
is
48.
;
A. Decl. IV)
c)
i^^
of the form
Xf^.
-1
emphatic
prefixed,
state
fir^
^c^on
In
is
placed before
O when a
,.1
and
j
it
retain their
e.
2:
_Loqq\
co-^itOaL*
when
enters into
4:2
^^-i^^l, ISOpl* dropped^ when an entire syllable is added at tlie end, especially when the last radical begins the new syllable e. g. in the verb
3.
;
composition,
^^4^ masc.
Kem.
letter,
AX^O
fem.; in the
nouns
;
>^i\V),
p^Lo*
formative
;
a)
when merely a
a syllable
without a vowel, is added e.g. Q^^D from ^\4^ 6) is added, if the stem-syllable remain a mixed one
;
when
e.
g.
tOA^^O
from
^^^^
and moreover
c)
;
where inHebrew
"^725^)
?
Daghesh
forte stands
e.
g.
^Ol
emphatic state
ISOl (t^,
In ^^jbl emphatic
^Q^
pDQj,
1,
4.
a) with
^, and
1,
at the begin;
ning of words
(imp.), jOll
:
and
;
e.g.
;
^QOf
of two
but
usually takes
e. g.
*^Aa
b)
first
takes
for
e. g.
[iV)n
for
(>Vn^"^
so also
e. g.
|Aj^'fi
or
when
in
Hebrew, the
fi'om
first
has Daghesh
f )rte
g.
ill^i^
ot finally
in the
when
middle
word
e. g.
Al^^ZJ
;
AS^dZI.
(pret. Pe.)
sometimes
before a,
(v.
AS^O
or
state of
pass,
of Verbs
]]
in
it
Pa.,
Aph., and
the.^active
where
is
added to distinguish
from
participle (comp. 48. B. Decl.IV. Eem.). sumed in the emphatic stato sing, of some
Finally
Q
;
is ase.
words
g.
VA^Qa^
c) a vowel is assumed from \li2k\D for lALsik) this vowel is JL with Q between two vacant consonants e. g. v/'hen it stands at the beginning of a mixed syllable
; :
43
;
^QDLOf^
.
but
when
it
e. g.
KOpM d) The assumption of a vowel is arbitrary, when there are two vacant consonants, of which the first can be attached to the preceding, and the second to the following
syllable
;
e.
g.
if
cannot stand
PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY,
OR,
PARTS OF SPEECH.
CHAPTER
I.
PRONOUNS.
16.
The Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes Separate Pronouns^ which stand as separate words, and and Suffixes^ consisting of mark the nominative case formed from the separate pronouns, which are syllables appended to other parts of speech appended to Yerbs, they appended to nouns, the jDossessive mark the accusative pronoun, or the relation of the genitive ; and, with prepositions, they form the remaining cases.
; ; ;
..
45
SEPARATE.
SUFFIXED TO VERBS.
a.
6. e.
SUFFIXED TO NOUNS.
In Sing.
1
In Plural.
Sing.
1.
2.
7
c.
m
AjV
^
,1
*Jk
P
m.
*
^^r^
>*7
2 f
OCT
3
ra.
t-iOl
01001
X
r
.
01^G1Qa.
^01Q
^01Q
%
.
*^oi
3
f.
OU
di
74
Ol
01
ou.
OLi-.
Plur.
7
7 7
p
c.
X
^
^ll]'
1\
2 m. 2 f
V
X
-n
VJERB.
>
^QJOl
3 m.
X
^-n
iOOLa.
T.
7\
T\ 1>
T>
^JOI
3
f.
i
^Ol.Ai
^1
Tlie
Personal Pronoun.
common
u.
two genders, while the gender. The fern, of the 2 appended to the masc. In the 3
fem.,
.-iOl
demon-
strative sense, while OOl masc. and wiOl fem., are used in connectionwith adjectives and participles rather to designate the present tense. And so in the plur., the first forms given above are used rather substantively as nominatives, and the second as accusatives (comp. 36). Concerning Linea occultans under 1 and Ol of the 1 and 3 sing., see 12.1.
II.
Suffix
Pronouns.
of the Verb.
A.
Suffixes
In the suffixes, or abbreviated forms of the separate pronouns, an ancient obsolete form whose characteristic was not L but D, lies at the basis of the 2 sing, and plur. (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. 203).
Of the
marked
of which are attached to consonants (with the exception of ^ ) in the forms of the regular
a, fall into
two
classes
the
first
verb
to the
|J,
and
in
imperat. and
fut.
The forms placed between 1 and 2, are common to both. The suffixes marked h are appended to forms with Q and
and _L. Where this form is j.^ which then quiesce in _1 wanting under h it is comprehended under a. Finally the suffixes under c are attached to the forms with ^, and also to The forms wanting the t* sing. masc. and 3 plur. fem. pret. under c are comprised under a. On their mode of union, 3omp. 36, and 37, and the accompanying Tables.
B.
The
.n
suffixes of the
noun
nouns masc.
sing.,
(possessive pronouns) are attached, to the emphatic state ( 45,) with the
SUFFIXES TO PARTICLES.
falling
47
state
away, of I-
e. g.
^^S^
emphatic
]^^k>
with
suff.
so that they
may
;
be considered
e.g.
noun
construct
>
nSV), with
suff.
y n\V)
i
Only in the 8
sing. masc.
does
A.
is
the union
is
vowel.
In the noun
fern,
|_,
e.
g.
IAXoAo*
e.
In
(v.
46. 2);
g.
*^A^oA^ from
from construct
Rem.
46
48,
A^oAo,
plur. ^^jdLj^oL^
A^oAo*
and
suffixes,
compare
in a
(from
= '^i^^
Plural,
COMM.
.
chald. n^
with a
suffix,
thus
Singular.
MASa
our.
FEM,
FEM.
1.
2.
3.
COMM.
MASC.
Ni)
>\a> mv.
^^I'^Ni)
^r>^\>% your.
nXji>
\
y^y
her.
thy.
his.
^aiAa>
^001^9
their.
Ol^>
CTL^)
Rem.
y^^} ^pa.Sb^Zo,
e. g.
Sometimes
it signifies
relating to;
^OoNo
C.
Suffixes to Particles.
The
Prepositions^
which were in part originally nouns, and plur. Singular suffixes are attached
48
to
.jQ
OTHER PRONOUNS.
w,
lo\
to,
^ nooS
from,
attached to
>Q\n
Lq^L
aside,
only
,
NN*^
^\i
over,
>1
or
pi.
towards,
^r^
i
before,
{Lk.j^l before
nouns) under.
The
e.
suffix plural
fern,
occurs with
VC^^
on account of;
*il 1*^
g.
^A^^^
and 6xJ^
between.
suffixes,
Rem.
For the
belonging to 52.
17.
1.
Other Pronouns.
is
declined as follows
Singular.
F.
CM.
^a^OT^
Plural.
M.
Uhese.
(V?ai) [
^^^'-
^^^'*-
IjOI [
Rem.
10
Sometimes,
^
is
I
X
m.0
>.
personal pronoun 3 sing. masc. 001 and fem. j01, forming QJGl and
-X
e.g.
this,
is
sons;
2.
e.
g.
^-j ^|>,
^iNoi ^|>
ic^.
The
is
j, ^^;Ac>,
which,
that,
M-
m. f^j / ^i\i]
pi. corn,
preceding,
becomes interrogative.
it, is
Rem. \Lk\ having a relative signification with > following an exception to the general rule.
3.
The
Interrogative
7
a) for persons of
It
numbers
is
^J^ who.
unites with
THE VERB
forms OllD and
^liD
i^^A^fi^?^,
GENERAL VIEW.
49
(la|
masc.
(
who?
jlLD,
|r*( fern,
who?
h) (lo
and
refer to tilings
iQ^
c)
^^^A
refers to
partly
The ReciproGal and Reflexive Pronouns are formed by passives ( 21. 2. g 22. 2. 24. 2), or by the nouns
soul^
\msn
and
suffixes
appended
CHAPTER
THE VERB.
18.
II.
General View,
1. The Yerb is, as in Hebrew, the most important of the parts of speech, since it lies at the basis of the formation of Yerbs may be divided into the three following the others. classes, in so far as new verbal forms are derived from them in accordance with definite laws, or as a noun is to be
considered as
write^
their stem:
;
a)
Primitwes\
e.
g. iIdAd to
;
VH^
to hill
h)
e. g. iDjl to justify^
from *D>1
;
c)
7
Denominatives^ subsequent"
7
e.
g. ;nil to tithe^
7^
M<^|
to celebrate
Easter^ from
pa.^
Easter.
2. The Stem-form in the 3 sing. masc. pret. consists usually of three radicals (verbum triliterum), and is j^ronoim-
middle radical in
transitive,
and
in intransitive verbs.
3. From this are formed the Derivatives or Conjugations, which agree closely with the ground-form in the inflection of persons, and the principal characteristics of mood and tense. Modern grammarians have added a third conjugation, Shaphel, to the two originally derived from the ground-form.
The passive
formed by prefixing 2^, and has not only a passive but also a reciprocal and reflexive signification.
is
50
The Conjugations
Active.
1.
follows
Passive.
to
to
Peal
Pael
^\^
^^^4^
kill;*
Ethpeel
; ;
^^^L'f*
^^Js^^Z]*
2.
murder
Ethpaal
Ethtaplial
3.
Aphel
Shaphel
%^L1^*
V^4^A1
;
(mre) Eshtaphal
Rem.
and
usually a difference
to be
g. ;^ji to honor,
r^Oj
burdensome.
like the other Semitic dialects, has a Preterit and Future. It has, moreover, an Imperative in the passive, and two Participles, an active and a passive, in the
4.
The
Syriac,
active.
The Hebrew
Infinitive absolute
one form
Rem, manner
The
;
(v. 19.B.?)).
other
relations of
is
the Present
;
time are supplied in the follo\ving expressed by the participle with the personal
pronoun followmg
by
(OOl
tT^n)
T T
the former joined with the participle, the latter with the preterite. The Optative and Subjunctive^ are contained in the future, to denote which more explicitly, f 001 is also frequently used (v.Syntax).
5. Verbs, finally, are divided into two principal classes, Regular and Irregular. In regular verbs the radical letters remain unchanged, while in irregular verbs, one of the rad-
icals
either falls
away
1.
REGULAK VERBS.
Regular Verbs in General.
19.
The
Inflection of
The mood
effected,
in general,
by uniform
laws.
The
irre-
REGULAR VERBS.
51
It will therefore cases only, according to their special laws. be most convenient to treat, under the regular verb, of whatever belongs to the universal analogy of the verb.
In the following Tables of the Inflection of Regular and irregular Yerbs, the following signs are used The radical The vowels which stand immeletters are denoted by *. diately over the *, belong to the inflection of transitive and those vowels which are separated from the verbs * by ... belong to intransitive or guttural verbs, or denote other forms in equal use. Radical letters which have fallen away, are denoted in the Table of Irregular Yerbs, 27 by . Those which take their place, stand over this sign.
:
52
Singular.
5f
a
CO
5f
*
CO
*
1
o
H ^ ^
^1
* *
1
:
^4
*
*
*
1
g^
O c
Ph
c3
^-4
.d
I*
I
r a
I.
o
CO
* *
d 1
<=
pq <^
CO
* *
1 *
't
^
^d
*
d
* *
'V
*
'1
'1
<
O
*
J^
5^ V.
IS
*o
<i
*&
.
OS
Act
1
f-
1^
*
:
Parti
Pas
n
* *
tK
""o
!>-
.51
: :
^
B
^
f
^
o,
B
,>
^'^
PP
* *
^a
#
<a
#
* * *
>
P^
# # *
# # #^^
<
^^
?^ -^^
f
>
'^
=
'^^
0.
t
'1
c.
'1
*
t^
* #
* * #
# # *
p^
^
p^
* #
1
#
9
>-
51
5J
f
5i
(
"^
o I H O
l-H
^d
* * c
* * ^
'-.i
*^^
-
'-3
tK >-
'^
.
1
'1
tK
'1
^
# * *
* * *
* *
:
^d
^51
f^ <1 P^
t>^
N n
-^
i^^a
!5j
* *
^5J
IK
^d
* *
#^^
g^^
'1
c
*
^
-?(
H-
H O H
i^i
->5-
^
>
O)
c>
* *
tK
'"'
X-
* *
^d
CO
3f
^
-5f
^^
X-
^^
"^
-5^
X-
* *
P.,
-x-
^ *
^d
*.
:i
-5f
:j
X-K'
'5
H|
X^
X-
^d
* ^
e.
<^""
54 A.
PERSONAL
INFLECTIOXS.
1).
The
inflection of persons is
found in
its
and imperative, where formative syllables In the future are appended only to the stem {Afformatives). the form is more complex, additions being received at the beginning (^Preformatives)^ and at the end. The inflection
in the preterit
is
as
follows
In the 3 sing. pret. the simple verbal stem suffices for the masc; but in the fem., Z, preceded by _!_ (= n~^)> is appended and considered as a sign of that gender. The 3 plur., which has a two-fold gender, is distinguished in the masc. by the addition of the plural-sign a, from which the fem. in its simple form is distinguished only by a silent ^ instead In the same person of the fut. the inquiry into the of Q^ origin of the preformative J in the sing. masc. and the plur. The opinion that the J masc. and fem., is a difficult one. had its origin in ji is opposed by the fact that among the Zabians this preformative exists, while there is no similarity between tliose two letters. More consideration is probably
due
to the derivation
irom
(JOT
17).
In
the plur., the masc, in addition to the preformative J, is distinguished as in the pret, by the plural-sign Q with ^ paragogic, which causes the vowel of the last radical syllable And thus the ^ in the fem. reminds one of to fall away. the paragogic final syllable HD i^^ Hebrew. The abbreviated
form of the personal pronoun evidently appears in the 2 Thus in the pret. sing., L masc. and %a2 sing, and plur.
fem. are related
r
>
^y'\
as
fOZ masc.
plur.
to tOAj| masc.
The same is true of the preformative Z in the same person of the fut. sing, and plur. where the fem. sing., in order to final and designate the gender, takes ^ paragogic, with a like influence upon the vowel of the preceding radical syllable. In the plur. the 2 pers. shares with the 3 pers., In the 1 sing. pret. the orithis same character at the end. preceding, has not been ginal form of the Z with _1 "171
shown.
Bat
in the plur.
^ and
^J,
as well as
before the
AND MOODS.
more
55
defi-
and
Here too it should be noticed nitely back to \A and ^j^ that the 1 plur. fut. is distinguished from the 3 sing. masc.
which has the same form, by Kibui.
except in The preformatives of the fut. uniformly take Pael and Shaphel, where (with the exception of the 1. sing.)
they are vacant, and in Aphel, where they take The imperative coincides with the future in respect to formatives at the end, except that the paragogic ^ in the 2 sing. fem. and 2 plur. masc. falls away, the former person ending in the feminine sign ^, and the latter in the plural
X
sign
is
of the radical syllable. Finally the fem. plur. ends with and the vowel of the final syllable is retained.
11).
(the
more
The imperat. Peal Verbs Med. A, between the second and third
quiescing in
All the remaining Gutt. the middle radical takes imperatives are like preterits, except that in Etlipe. and Ethpa., Linea occultans stands under the middle radical
with preceding. Rem. The same holds good in respect to the imperatives Ethta. and Eshta., if Linea occultans be admitted in them 2. The future is formed from the imperative by prefixing In Aphel the characteristic falls away, and in passives J
In Ethpe. and Etlipa. after of the formative syllable 2| the rejection of Linea occultans, the vowels of the preterite re-appear.
.
gerund
which the simple form denotes the do or the absolute state, but with L prefixed denotes the construct state) are formed from the preterites by prefixing !sD They end (excepting in the Peal, where they
3.
The
infinitives (of
in
in
Q and
,
in the apoco-
56
2q
last
into
The
;
participles are
peal,
_ZL
;
formed from the preterit as folactive form, the first radical takes -2-, and in the passive form a.^ is inserted between
the last two radicals. In the other conjugations Lo is prefixed, and _:l, in the second syllable of the active form, is changed, in passives, into _! But this distinction appears only in the absolute state of the masc, and even here is lost in verbs 3 Grutt., >, and CI, the active form of which likewise takes _!_
5. The preformatives of the fut., infin., and part., mostly take JL; but in Aphel they take _L, rejecting the 1 accorand in Fael and Shaphel they are without ding to No. 2 a vowel.
;
Rem. For the reciprocal use of these twoTables, which suffice for the complete formation of the regular verb, it is to be remarked ; The forms in that Table I. contains the personal inflection of Peal.
Table
II. in
teristic vowels,
the inflection according to Table L, retain their characand merely take from Table I. the aftbrmatives with
stem
this
the vowels thereto belonging. Where, in pret. Peal, the vowel of the also lose the vowel of the falls away, the remaining preterits but Ethpe. take's _L over the first radical, where last radical syllable
;
has JL in
Peal.*
In the
X
fut.
where
first
falls
away
Ethpe.the
vowel of the
imperat.
is
retained in the
Peal.
20.
A.
its
Formation and
Signification.
1.
is
^vh^
{transitive verb
mcd. A).
{med.
E)
is
always used
should be noticed
inflection of the different persons in the ])reterit Tr. order to perceive the verification of this remark.
ITS
for intransitives
class also
first
57
e.
g.
,^A^
jl,
^o sit^ %i\Ci to
he near.
To
this
belong Verbs
;
upon the
Hebrew
radical
"^^^
;
e. g.
*^p
tofeelpain^ or derivatives of
Ycrbs
pears in
Rem.
Cn
;
'^'^^ ^^^^ Med. O. still ap.^f^ inltDthe Verb jQSlo to shudder. With the inflection of Verbs Med.A. agree those with 3 rad.
e. g.
e. g.
01SQ
in
to
name^
Cl^L
to
admire.
when
Verbs Med. A.
the
lNJ^,
,^
Nfc) and
Nfi^ adduced by
Biixtorf,
first is
and
^G1
placed
rare, in
which
e.g.
is
the infinitive
... Q with
*
^^4^ The
in
apocopate form of
;
is
also
sometimes found
Peal
Luke
ix.
33. QSr*=^V)\
.
paragogic,
^
Q
It
final
^
'^
-X
quiesces in
(p.
e.g.
2 plur.fem.with
^, Amira
Q
is
^-^Q^Q* The
imperat.ofVerbs
Med. E.takes
also
instead of
X
though the
transitive
form with
found
;
e.g.
e. g.
occurs
imperat.
Rom.
xiii. 3.
r^l*
fut.
More
diffei-s
as in the
fut.
Verb ^l1,
7
;
fut.
^1 p,
and
of Verbs Med.E.
-n
fut. 3 sing.
of those having the third rad. a guttural, take fem. the form with ^ attached is
e.g.
;*^1> In the
more
frequent.
Also
a form of the
fat.
with
e. g.
^^^^ participial
emphatic
state
P4^5
is
often used.
In the part.
;
the emphatic
state masc.
and the
e.
g.
jJ_4^*
The
active
. (Mark xiv. 67), in immediate connection with ^^mwA I (verse 54), is perhaps to be regarded as an error in transcribing. The passive form is always fully written ; in intransitive verbs, the first
form
58
an active
bearing,
sense,
DERIVATIVE COXJUGATIOXS.
sometimes derived from transitives
;
e. g.
^\a.OA
r^-J^\ holding.
To
by
tlie
idiom
per-
Avliicli
is
exjDressed
by abbreviated
sonal pronouns, appended, like afformatives, to the participle. But this formation occurs only in the 2 sing, and the 1 and 2. plur. masc. and fern., and is as follo\A s
:
Partic'qyle Passive,
FEM.
Particijyle Active.
MASC.
COMM.
FEM,
COMM.
MASa
2 Sing.
1
^aAla^O
^1
AIa^D -*iivL4>
iNifc^
^1 i\f)^
Ai4c
^oAjlIi^^
Plur.
^[RK.^r^
2.
^6^i^,^^A!L4Q
Plur
the preceding remarks it appears that the signifi Sometimes cation of Peal may be transitive or intransitive. we find both forms in the same verb. In some cases there
is
From
tms\ and .rf>s\ to e. g. difference of signification chew ; and in other cases there is a difference in signification;
no
;
^^^^
^^ ^^
divided.
B.
Derivative Conjugations.
21.
Ethpeel
as in the other
1.
The
or in
Amira, The passive conjugations are distinguished from p. 278). each other generally by the vowels over the radical letters, or by the addition of 2 {Ethta.) or by the insertion of
_L,
(vid.
{Eshta.).
Rem. Upon the transposition of the sibilants with Z The first radical takes _L in the 3 sing. fem. and 1 sing,
of the imperat., in the 2 sing. fem. and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem.
DERIVATIVE
CONJUGATIONS.
59
masc.
According
to others
;
is
used,
\L,
even
e. g. Acts. xx. 27. Al^l^V; ASi\aT This when 1 falls away usage however is confirmed neither by examples nor by Araira. The 3 sing. fern, and 1 sing. pret. the imperatives, 2 sing. fem. and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem. of the fut. and the part, excepting the absolute masc. cannot be distinguished, according to Lud. de Dieu p. 217, from the same persons of Ethpa. excepting w^hen the first radical is an aspirate, which, in Ethpa. becomes hardened. The passive form
^*^,4^21
is
In the
Verb
*flQ2L^, in Ethpe.,
wk-
is
two
The
infinitive
however
2.
excepted
e.g. pret.
*?f\h^(^L\
infinit.
QTfi^ Ak)
;
The
;
a) passive of Peal
to
e.g.
^^4^2*1
*^*21
reflect
;
hy or upon
ones self;
= Peal
d)
to
in intransitive verbs
e. g.
lis and
;
wiJ.)Z1 to return;
e.g.
sometimes Ethpe,
is
passive oi Aph.
^a.tA(
be emharrassed^
from
^O^^l*
22.
1.
Both of these conjugations are characterized by _L in the jDcnultimate, and _2_, in Pa., in the ultimate syllable. The vowel is changed into _I_ in Yerbs 3 Ead. Gutt. or i,
,
( of the 1 sing.fut. Pa. alone takes JL (comp. 19. A. and B. 5). The imperat. Ethpa. with Linea. occultans and the part. fem. Ethpa. are like the same forms in Ethpe.
as
it is
in the passive.
The preformative
Rem.
The
passive form
in
Amira.
It is
rejected also
by Buxtorf.
''
Amira remarks,
. .
p.
only
and
X
7
in
27).
Concerning the
I
7
part. act.
The form
y^\^
mode
(Mark.
x.
16
in pret. Pa.
must be considered
is
as
an incorrect
a participial noun.
60
2.
signification
to
of Pa.
is
a)
to
causative
h)
e.
g.
^jsjj
e.g.
cause
^^
he afraid^
from ^\jaj
fear ;
c)
intensive ;
e.g. g.
M^i^
.^jlJ
overwhelm from
d)
to
Mo^ to press;
to
= Pe.;
;
AaJ
^Jl
and
to
to ^2,55 ;
hold forth^
declare
is
e.
pronounce just.
;
The
signification of Ethpa.
to
a) passive
e.
of Pael
7 7 ^'^
e. g.
^iv^^Z")
he
murdered ;
c)
h) reciprocal;
e.
g.
;SojZ|
^0 5e
to
= Peal;
7 7 ***
g.
t^iluZ]
made
e. to ^^i^^A
= *^m
23.
1.
Aphel is characterized by 1 placed before the stem, which quiesces in _L* After the preformatives of the fut., falls away, and its vowel falls back upon infinit. and part.,
|
the preformative.
in
is
of Aph., Z mit J^
is
and the
formative syllable of
able takes
tlie
passive Z]*
The
e.g.
^\4^ZZV
|
Rem.
The
characteristic
of
Aph.
is
^AumJSd from
;
]jLJa*
Verbs |l
e.
g.
to
tAOp
drink,
or
to he able,
and waAs|
do
( They
are rather
prosthetic,
also
shown by
mation
e.g. fut.
i>T1,
infinit.
0nV) (comp.
20.Rem.), part.
de Dieu
p.
rule holds good as in 22. 1. Rem. compared with ^wa^tor/ and others do not recognize the passive. Lud. 238, approves of the abridged imperat. with Lin. occult.
61
form (Comp.
Rem.).
;
2.
e. g.
The
siguification of Apliel is
to
a) causative as in Pael
it
jZu I
bring forward ;
;
and then
to
frequently takes
two accusatives
e. g.
iAO-^
cause
to
put on (something
e.
h)
imperative or permissive ;
c) intransitive
;
g.
JDD^
mount a
horse ;
e. g. to
Vf> | to he
weak ;
d)
= Pael
e. g. ^^*jsaJ
and
^^wkijI
frighten.
The
co-
Aphel or
to
%^La
to
dwellj
J^LOLL]
keep hou^e.
24.
1.
Shaphel
is
paradigm
with.
In
inflection
m and L and _L
fat.
Rem.
In verbs which
^V)am
new
some-
times furnishes a
new stem
e.
g.
is
!^Qm.9
to he hlack,
from ^QajA,
7 7.,^ Thus ;jsoA|
Shaph. of
The same
true in Eshtaphal.
furnishes the
2.
quadrihteral (^^.i^AaI^
tbat
still
The signification of these two conjugations is similar to of Aph. and Etbtaphal. Sliapliel is, in the examples
extant;
;
a) causative;
to
e. g.
^yp
to let
fall;
b)
inten-
sive
e. g.
^^\%\.^
to
change. Eshta-
or
it
forms intransitives
e.g.
^..>A]
to err^
sin.
62
25.
and
Quadriliteral Verbs.
The
28
sq.)
tlie
most
They
quadriliterals.
letters
To
,
verbs,
are,
prosthetic
Lo
CO
Z,
and
a)
;
Maphel, ,^*^mV)
b)
io
make
io to
^nmV>Z|
and
io
become j^oor
Saphel,
,^oi;flD
permit
io
hasten
;
io
hasten
.^Olj")
,
pass. v^.^ioAfio]
persecute
c)
Thaphel, ,V>\Z
to teach.
Rem.
For SDaGI
;,
Rem.) no
special
form can
X, Sq,
Q,
after
;
the
first
radical viz.;
io
a)
Panel
= Poel,
io
usually transitive
io
e. g.
"Cl..
chew
the cud,
;
pass. J}ClOl\
become divided
;
ft
b) Paiel, transitive
7
^
e. g.
;
^^-rn
t<
suffer ;
''
c)
Pamel
e.g.
to
^mV)A>
be cid
to
remain
d) Parel
^yi'A
^ dance,
pass.
^>;.iZ|
off.
C.
iteral
Not very
different
from the
the quadrila)
to
Pali
Pael
^-lA^i
b)
to
domesticate,
to
pass. ^uZusZ*)
pass.
converse
io
with one ;
Palen, ^^aS
be master,
^au^Z]
malce
one a master.
=
to
and Pilpel
;
a) Palel
= Pael
*
;
e. g.
?r^^
to
to
reduce
slavery
finally
7
;
b)
c)
Pealel with
its pass.
I^O-LSqjLmZI
e. g.
dream,
to heal,
and
pass.
J>amLQflo
7 j1
VS;^9Z|
to be
Rem.
also
Those
belong here
e.
g.
;S^o 1
to blush,
(e.g.
In
quadriliterals
.i^Ao
to elect
a Bishop),
63
falls
away
e. g.
appoint a^ Patriarch.
marked
in Syriac, as in Hebrew, either by Daghesh forte or Sheva, the irregularities in verbs of which the first and second radicals are gutturals are entirely
wanting
radical
is
a guttural or
i,
and those
(Con-
and U compare
1)
7
;
For
more convenient
brought together.
7
perat.Peal,
instead of Q
'^]; 77,77,
fut. j^aJj
I,
e. g., fut.
j^tu
imperat. Jp; 2)
in like
manner
and in the
part,
act. Peal,
e. g.
_L
Ethpe. ^Softf,
'^]Li;
,'''
j,.mSD;
& pass.
Aph.
pass.
^> VI* ^*
Pret.
7
7
fut.
Msp,
imperat.
^)(,
part. act.
and
Rem.
In the
;
same manner
to console,
in
following
to be
]jLq
]SQ^
to defile^
and 1(^21
adorned
(comp. 13. 1.
Rem).
II.
Irregular Verbs.
General
View,
27.
1.
Under
in which there
Such
Quiescent
and
Defective Verbs).
verb iu
64:
IRREGCJLAR VERBS.
ters of tlie
is
omalous
2.
Verbum
dupliciter imperfecium).
The
Olaph
Quiescent Verbs
verbs witb
1.
rad.
(1l),
Jud
(*.^), r-^;
med.rad. Olapb
(VOOD), Zui^;
J<1)
and 3
Olaph
(U)
U'yt
To
defective
verbs
belong
those
with
1.
rad.
Nun
(_a); e.g. *Q2LJ, and med. rad. doubled (^); e.g. *QOj
Rem.
Here, and
tions of classes of
of the
Verb mJLS
(=
i^/^),
by which the
TABLE OF IRREG
"
p
;
Verbs V
Part. Pe.
f>
|
U^.
1
32.
Put. Pe.
i
Verbs \^
Pret. Pe.
p
Imperat. Pa.
7
Pret.
Aph.
Imp. Pe.
7
** *
Part. P. Pa.
|
** *
Imperat. Pe.
Infin.
0.
* * *
Aph.
P
^
1.
3ft
3(C
Pret. Ethpe.
Part. Pass,
Imperat.
7
^7
**
O * * *
Tl
***Z|
3f.
3Pi.frpu7per 2Pl.f.Imp.Pe.
3f.S.Pr.Pa.
S.Pr.Pe.
2.A.
Fut.Ethpa.
7
Pr. Ethpe.
0-^
*-^P
_,A O
:|:
T.
o *
Lo %^
1 S.
a.
**H<
Aj
**Z|
.>J^;
2S.f.Pr.Pa.
2Pl.f.Pr.Pe.
2m.S.Pr.Pe.
Pr. Pe.
--*
Verbs Qland
7
Zo
SPl.m.Fu.Pe
I
* *
b.
Par.Act.Pe.
Pret. Pa.
2S.
f.
Put. Pa.
.*-7
2.B.
^0 o**J
o*
|
O * *
S.
A.
a.
Pr. Ethta.
-*-x
2 S.m.Put.
*o *ZZ
Part. Pass.
p
|
Infinit.
X
Verbs
Par.Act.Pe.
^
*
Pr. Ethta.
'1.
if-
(*)77
O ^
* *ZZ|
|
Pr.Ethpa.
Pret. Pa.
* 7
*Zf
***
Verbs
| |
]i
1
^1*
*.
28.
Pret. Pe.
7
-n
|
Pret. Pe.
Pret. Ethpe.
Fut. Pa.
Imperat. Pe.
7
* * *J
Future.
1
** *
Pr. Ethpe.
|
1.
**
"
Z|
|
* * *
Fut. Pa.
|
1.
Infin.
,.
Pa.
y
(2m.Fu.Pe.)
**
l.S.Fut.Pe.
**
* Aj
2.
(*Q*oZ)
7
2.
I
|
I
|
Fut. Pa.
i>
Pret. Pa.
>
Pret. Esht.
Pret.Shaph.
7
Pret. Ethtap.
Pret.Aph.
7
3.
** *
yO
f.
7 y * * O ZZ] *
'0
3.
* * O
^XUD,
mJDD* 31.
1
Verbs w3
3f. S.
y^^
|
29.
|
Part. P.Pe.
Pret. Pe.
Pr. Pe.
Pret. Ethpe.
Imperat. Pe.
7
Pret. Pe.
1
*O*
1.
;' ^***
Imperat. Pe.
X
1.
***Z|
|
**
Pe.
|
* * *
7
1^
Future.
1
Pr. Ethpe.
1 S.
Fut. Pe.
Infin.
Fut. Pe.
L
2.
2.
.1.
S. I.
Pret. Esht.
4to*ZAj
Put. Aph.
*o*
Pret.
ZZ
Aph.
3.
Pret.Shaph.
Pret. Ethta.
Pret.Aph.
.;!'i.i
g
yO 7 ^ * * O ZZ (
*0
34.
Pret. Pe.
|
Verbs
|
^
.
QaJ
Infin.
33.
1
Pret.Aph.
|
Fut. Aph.
Pret.
Aph.
.7
1
Pe.
Fut. Pe.
7
* *
(*). * *
Part. P. Pe.
1.
* * OJ
* * O
Pr.Ethpe.
|
***Z|
2.
1
VERBS.
A. 28.
67
Quiescent Verbs.
to eat.
The following
1.
In the Pret. Peal, where, in the regular verb, the iir'st takes Jl, but in the imperat. and radical has no vowel,
|
e. g.
^Qol
|
\y-:Dl
If the preform-
falls
back upon
it
e.
g.
fut.
^|i;
pret.
fut.
Ethpe. ^"{1^.
and
infinit.Pe. the preformative takes _!_, in the
Rem.
In the
is
But
e. g.
used
Ui;^, 'M'^^l rA^'r^.^-g^ ^Qb^^K in the verbs ^X> ^ll" *s2L" ^X, r^l!^ ^-'I^
Both of these forms
are found
in
^M,
;lo]iD*
(Z|
It
first class
of verbs mentioned
and imperat. Pe. like transitives with Q, excep), and the second class form them like Lud. de Dieu (p. 265). rightly doubts the intransitives with _L correctness of the double form of the infinit. and fut. Pe. with JH.
ting Verbs 3 rad. Gutt. or
and
the
^,
fut.
7..T\
I
^llSO^
is
found in I Cor.
x.
27
but
Q^2|Z
in 1 Cor. x. 28,
#7
*
II
suspected.
is sometimes found in the part. pass. Pe. of the regular verb (20.1. Rem.). In
.
No
7..-"
and
\o|
The vowel
Verb
pjaf,
is
is
assimilated to
g.
also found in
e.
some
little
g.
^oiZZ] and
2.
e. g.
The
radical
usually
'^'\
falls
away
fall
ists
I will speak. \ does not so often away in the other persons. The same peculiarity exin the infinit. fut. and part. Pa., and the vowel is thrown
eat^
^Qol I will
back,
upon
the
preformative
e.
g.
<^\i
and %kLp*
68
QUIESCENT VERBS.
Rem.
to
go away and
fZf to come^
lose
in the
imperat.,
^f,
^12,
3.
oil,
^f,
^f
oZ, JZ,
XL
1 is
change. g.
ed into
forms au ;
Rem.
In two verbs
fut.
is
changed into
infinit.
ti^,
viz
(Z|
Aph.
*JkAA|,
imperat. l^uf,
]iluj
QL2Lio
part.
lA^.
Aph. ^SQaGI
learn^ are
= p?3J<n )
(^1
<o
-^^^
^^^^ reason
General Remarlcs,
The Verb
ticed
in the
following persons
pret. 3 fern,
and
1 sing.
AllX ALif;
flit.
^-AIH^qXiU,
,
fern, ^-i-^ll
it is
^11*
In the signification,
larly.
to
of
use, to profit,
formed regu-
like
,
Yerbs
(s, as-
not, like
change
it,
for
29.
Verbs
luith
1 Rad.
Yud
it
%^2))
^\a
to
bring forth.
:
should be observed
That
when
transitive,
they take
JL
VERBS
e. g.
69
jdLa
(^r)*
If"*)
t^
firs* radical,
be without a vowel,
it
as
is
quiesces in J.* In the fut. and infinit. Pe. the vowel JL falls
e. g. e. g.
r^\i
r^]^*
So too
in Ethpe.,
falls
back upon Z
first
;
r-^-*M
But
e.g.
LJ^*
Rem.
In the
;
appears
e. g.
*^'^'
Only
*SOU
over the
;
first radical,
under
01, falls
away
e.g.
AoOLi*
appears
OiZ^OIa
7
in the 3 fern,
and
1 sing. pret.
e.g.
him
9v
(Z\SCrL)
falls
away
e.
g.
wkGIOOGlA
they
In the
and
infinit.
is
similar to
Verbs
i,
which quiesces in
falls
.
;
(vid. 1.
above).
But
sing. fut. a
away
e. g.
,SV
The
e. g.
r^*
Rem.
e.
^r^ and
In
like
Verbs
^
is
( 33)
g.
imperat.
^J and i^Z,
infinit.
^^ and
changed
i^ALO^
follows the
same
3.
rule.
into
(vid.
Verbs
]si,
28. 8)
e.g.
jSoV, ^joi.
;
Rem.
lA
is
still
it
should scarcely
1
^^
appear Pa.
^JLO,
Ethpa. r^oZl^
70
to
ash.
The
only iiiPe.,Ethpe.,
passive.
from
upon the
it
first
radical
e. g.
^1*
but when
1
;
u is
the
third radical,
quiesces in
standing before
;
e.
g. %a|J
The vowel
and
2. fut.
e.g.
^(*1
,
In the imperat.
e.g.
^j* ^mU
%s'i>Zl
,
is
some
*V^Z]
|
Rem.
of
it
;
takes place
also a duplication
e.g.
^X ^V^
Both forms
and ^tofZ
1 is
Ethpe. ^A^ill^'and
^]bl2l*
jl
;
3.
( ( (..^
;
e.g.,
*^> ^
and .^U-^ZV
e. g.
^lAl*
(^
Rem.
and
!)
31.
quiescent
(Ql and
*jbl)
5>aO
(^QD)
stand up^
is
A.Vn
to die.
radical letter
or
a.,
and whose
same
In the pret.and
infinit.Pe. of
is
apIn
droj^ped
e. g.
J>aD,
^an!^^
is
changed into
a.,
and quiesces
e.
Ethpe.,
g.
^^QaO, ^<Li^ZZ|,
^^>^ ]
71
;
On
Eem.
the coutrarj,
a.
is
movable
in Pa.
and Ethpa
(=j,
e. g.
vid. 1.
which has
into
jl
;
arisen
e.
inflections
g.
^(o
Q
as
masc, lV)in
fern.
Only
;
in
e.g.
f ut.
Pe.
^onj,
-A),
in
which
cases,
fut.
e.g.
AaIo, ^j.QJ*
over
as -^0f,
e. g.
Voqo1
this class,
Rem.
In
which
are at the
same time
( 32), as |Q-ik
species,
referred to
no particular
IQO,
retain
movable.
;
Some
e.
g.
>01
to take
a handful^ Aph.
\j\
to deviate
X
.a.
from
the
way,
TheVerb
But
in the fut.
;
and imperat.
A^
Verbs
e.g. fut.
ZoSOJ* The
imperat. of %CDQja to spare, takes (*CLm), with the signification, far be it. In some manuscripts Jl is found in the preformatives of the fut. and in the infinit. Pe., which manner of writing was received by the ancient grammarians, and which, as is testified by Amira, p. 311, the Mandaeans used on account of metre (vid. Lud.de Dieu p. 292).
2.
e. g.
is
doubled
By
this,
does not occur e.g. M^lZZl* When three Z come together in the 3 sing. fem. and 2 sing, and plur. masc. and fem. fut.,
one Z
omitted e. g. ^Q-i-dZZ. The occurrence of three L together is unavoidable only when the verb itself begins with Z, in which case four 2 would properly come in succesis
;
sion
e. g.
^oloZZl
Ps.
Ixii.
10,
from
^Z
;
Ethtaph.
^<Li>ZZl
differs
signification
to he
e. g.
Ethpe.
Rem.
raise one!s
self^
Ethtaph.
token away.
ifni g^ZZ]
to
he convinced,
Ethtaph..
from
CLi^|
is
72
3.
fat.,infinit.,and part.,
fut.
;
lose the
e. g.
y>iol
The
analogy of other
part, passives,
it
changes
a.
into
X
e.g.
^oak), to distinguish
No example
is
found of Shaphel.
32.
These verbs, which include the Hebrew js^^ ^^^ nb^^rbs, are different from the regular verbs in the following cases.
1.
The
third radical
either quiesces or
is
changed into
ends in
(-;
^* Here
e. g.
it
pret. Pe.
U-yi
vJ^LyiZ]*
e. g.
The
re.
|J..^j
in
e.g. -&.^..
imperat. Ethpe.
e.g.
;
wi.-
e.g. .-i^.iZl
Pa.
e.g
...
Pe.
is
the same
(J-..-l^*
e. g.
infinit.
end with
Ql*;
Aph. a*^.|^Lo
and Shaph.,
%.
e. g.
Pa. %.k.^.^SD*
Jb.
(-^)
Verbs
Med. E.
Verbs
e.
g.
^.^D
-
Both forms
(SHi and
7
-^^^
swear.
The imperatives
of this kind of
verbs, take
.kM
;
at the end.
7
Some
belong here
e.g.
OlSOS
to
Some grammarians,
73
without proof, derive from the imperat. Ethpe. the forms |J...Z( and
|J...Z|*
The
e.
g.
(OOU
and JOQIJ*
the pronoun,
quiescent,
instead of
e.
g.
Lu\Oy]liD for
nO)llO
;
From
form of the
part, pass.
e.
g.
\10 and
IfD*
The former
refers
more
2.
particularly to things,
and the
latter to persons.
is
When
^
or
a letter or syllable
entirely away.
is
added,
] is
either
changed
into
falls
A. In the
fern,
first case, a.
of
e.g.
all
1-
Ethpe.
;
Pe.
iS..
^yt
;
in the second
form of
all
3 plur. fern.
imperatives
all
e. g.
Pa.
Pe.
,^b
^^i
of
the
e. g.
iNyi
in the 2
;
and 3
in
plur. fem. of
the futures
e. g.
Ethpe. ^-aAyi Aj
;
and
e. g.
Pe. (-^y*
;
e. g.
Aph. Gu^.^lo
and
-X
finally
to
7
6)
is
quiescent in the 1
of both numbers of
that
e.g.
all
the preterits,
in Pe. (excepting
,
quiesces in
e.g.
Aa^..
.oAjA..
In other cases
quiesces in
Ethpe. Aa.S..ZT,
yOL^yM*
in
B.
1 falls ]-.
away
with
the
Yerbs
ending in
retained
e. g.
A^v<
in the 3 plur.
the preterits
e. g.
Pe.
cu^it
in the fat.
is
changed into
e. g.
Pa. ^-.^yiZ,
and in the 2
74
and 3
e.g.
Pe. lO^.^-J
imperat.,
where ^ quiesces
m
Q
e.g.
Pa.
^^y
also in the
e. g.
quiesces in
Aph.
exchanged with
^.k.
e. g.
Pe. ^^>^
Rem.
Instead
occurs,
of Pa.
quadriliteral
form
-kQ^.i appears.
The 3
^OQ^..)
*
?
\^
sometimes with
1*'
retained
e.
g.
Acts
xxviii. 2.
^001;jD
is
neither
the conjugations
sing.
from the 3
(p.
masc.
which Amira
266) in verbs
ending with jl-, and in Pa. of verbs ending with (-, writes a
double a
;
e. g.
^y*
i^.Z|
General Remark.
|l (comp. 30.
Verbs
|J
or .iA,
which are
(J
;
at the
same time
Verbs
e. g.
JG,
Jji,
pret.
fut. l]]j,
plur.
tOpJ,
etc.,
part. act.
||J,
pass. lU,
Aph.
wi]]]
and wi^l,
infinit. Qu|J!Ld,
imperat.
^Ul,
%^|JSO*
APPENDIX TO
8 32.
In the Verb
first
Pi-m with
movable,
is
rejected
when
;
the
e.
radical
g.
1
infinit.
Pe.
Im^
]'^*
Sometimes
this
verb takes
e.
first
radical;
g.
DEFECTIVE
\jJ\!^
VERBS.
fut. ]iiJ for |
> l
75
(better
perhaps ^mV^),
and with
-i-M|,
innnit.
OiV)
or Qa^aPiO,
imperat.
jj^],
part, (^^k)
and p^po*
also
precedes,
;
and
its
vowel
Pe. *>
falls
vacant radical
for \a ai
e.g.
imperat.
(.-**
found in the
B. Defective Verbs.
w
33.
to
go
:
out.
The
In the
IN
imperat.,
and
infinit. Pe.,
;
and in
X
all
forms of
>
-n
Aph., the
7
away
e. g.
oa|
e. g.
The
fut.
and
7
>nmi, >\2U
Rem.
The
;
exceptions
7
to this rule
h)
are
a)
doubled ( 34)
c)
e. g.
,J
;
e.
g.
e.
g.
JOU,
fut.
>cniJ
third radical
e.g.
by
assimilation, as in
Hebrew;
^ASQaGI we have
to
TheVerb
(vid.
tOmi
35.2).
and
part. Pe.
from -r^Vcp
\^\L
for ]qJ.
Comp., 23.
Rem.
34.
(Ml) *mCD5
to
sprinhh.
should be remarked
falls
away
in the pret.,
infinit.,
70
uvt^r the
,
preformative) Pe.
,
g. pret.
*fiD9
infinit.
J3D;iD
fut.
DO;J
imperat., %S00j*
e.
g.
J3Dj1,
The
part.
act.
Pe.
takes
in
place
*Qd|)
;
of
;
the
|
falls
middle radical, which has fallen away e. g. away again when a syllable is added
;
but
e.
g.
plur.
lizM.
Those verbs
fat.
whose 2 and 3
rad.
7
is
aiv
*
exceptions, and
1. d). e.
In the
*
(not) appear;
in the
plur.
g.
>1
^*
The
go
in.
part.
act.
Pe. has
^^a^R
from the
Verb
\>1 to
it is
In the part. Aph. sometimes the middle radical marked by Linea occultans e. g. Heb. ix. 5,
;
^i NN()V)
preformative
;
sometimes remains
1.
after the
g.
Q^aj|^^
Rem.).
;
2.
e. g.
jnoo>Z( J2QflD> are regularly inflected, with the retention of the middle radical. Instead of the last two forms, however, Palpel. and Ethpalp. ( 25. D) are more in use ; e. g.
Rem. The last remark holds good more rarely (Comp. 1. above).
also of Shaphel,
which occurs
35.
Yerhs.
1. By Doubly Irregular Verbs are imderstood those in which occur two of those letters which usually give rise to In the inflection of these verbs, either one irregularities.
This or both of those letters may retain their peculiarities. class of verbs consistsof (vid. Lud. de Dieu, p. 340, sq.) ; a)
Verbs Verbs
^
]2>
,
and
(j
]]
e.
g.
liu
Aph.
wi-CdI
to
approve /
,
b)
and
e. g.
]l] to corne^
Aph. ^Lt]
;
]SC)\ to
heal,
JJ,
Pa. >i)|
\Si\ to boilj
Ethpe. **^|Z|
c)
77
"jio]^
e. g.
fut.
]iDp
infinit.
Aph.
and
-t
..xlkJOl
;
pLi
^0
sprout^ imperat.
;
i-aJLa,
Aph. ^AiO|
imperat.
aJLi]
,
d)
Verbs \^ and U
;
e. g.
infinit. ll^lk)
1p
^^ cA^6Z(?,
to he displeased^
Aph. ^1!^*
To Defective verbs (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 344:) belong 2. the following, in so far as they occur in the language, either in individual forms only, or have borrowed their defective forms from synonymous verbs, or, finally, vary from the regular verb in inflection and interpunction. a) Impersonal
7
Verbs.
From
hefits.
^ojl
to he hit^
part.
act.
^jl
AjpD
it
From
t]iD
it is
and the 3
act.
^^\L
and from
|lo
and
It*
appear the
part. IJo
and 1|*
it is suitahle.
b)
nNm
infinit.
to
mount up^
part,
*aCQJ
part.
found
^7
,
'^
imperat. *nQD
7
^
fut.
.OCQJ
7 7
-
nmV) Aph.
,
>r>mVr
in
Ethpa. ^r\t\rc^.
A
,
similar
%QOl-a
,
^7
complement
^Z] to
is
*aOD*|
is
infinit.
\^
fut.
\E1
from
\L
to
Ethpe.
^OuZV*
come
c)
Those which
differ in
;
form and
go
to
^l]
away and
(see
Rem.);
Rem.
from |001
etc.,
found a
signi-
apocopate lou
loiZ
plur.
.OOU
46)
,
having the
usual
as
;
of the
to
,
future
p.
1A
(A
drinh^
with
,
^Lm\
imperat. *aA|
part.
fut.
|Aaj
infinit.
IAaSd
]Sn4
to live.
,
^7^1, Aph. ^SOiOi to helieve ; ]jLm (see App. to 32), Finally, in four verbs 3 rad. Olaph. ; e. g. l*^
11 1
,
l^Z)
(IjZ),
in Pa.
and
its
78
passive,
Kem.), and
its
;
is
vowel
e. g.
3 sing.
I\^jo^
The formation
infinit.
is
as follows
part.
VnV>
o]i,nV)
imperat. Xjid
fut.
X^cxi
Ethpa. U-^^1
part. il3
Ai
infinit.
o}liAk),
fut. "JlluAj*
80
f
PARADIGM
<?
*o
cr.
I.
il
5^ .<i
-^
OO
like
^^"^h
Ethtaphal.
like
Aphel.
<
I,
-vl
"^
.rvl
<^^ ^^
.rvl
*=
'
P^^
g^^
vj
cTvl
^ q
"^
.TvJ
'Vl
.!^v|
"^
.^nI
"^
"^
,rv|
tTvJ
^^
Q
^
^ i '^
4 ^ V
i
f1
^51
-1 '^
'^^
'
I
^q
'4
-q
-^n.
"q
"Q
-^
'I
'3
"^
'O^
'i
-3 't
g f
I
^
-s4
-n4
-Q
.^
-vj
"^
"^vl
q ^g
1/
M.
"^
*^
'J
'^
'9 <^ t^
<*
1
'i -^
i
t<^
j
^ ^ 'i
..-^
^^ y]
^g
q
^<j)
^ a
^ A ^
N-d)
CO
^^
y\
/I
'i
g
<M
i-H
Q^
00
<N
CJ
f-i
Rtgular,
Verb.
81
=:^i
^^
<
,^-4
c^xl
H/f
.rvi
-^
cT-vl
^-i:i)
<J
^ ^ ^ ^1 ^
^
'"^
^'^
^^-vl
a ^
PI
1
s/
''^
11.
I
1
^rvj
1/
^ ^^
'^
^d
ii:
^-1/
c:|
c:!
r^
'^
'^
'i
1
-d
<^
^#
3
-Q
<i)
'I
'I
^i
-q
-cj)
^a '^^
51
-a
^
-a
c
I
r^
1
'I
'^
">j
-3
r^
f-vi
w-
"^
"J"
^'
./I
,"^'
'f^
^9
d
^
^!?
1
^
T.. ^^
#
^
-Q
Jq
,^
^i
^1
:^
vj
^
a
c
'1
'"^
'3
3-
Q
H.<::|)
H.<
^
1
CN
!rr
I.
^1 J"
'4
i
r-<
g;
(N
CO
C<J
C^
Q~ CO
CO
(M
<M
la.
ft.
82
PARADIGM
II.
Si
-a
5 o
^3
-<
^3
:-3
55
^^
"^
.rvi
"^
tTvj
O
/
'I O
O O
I-
o 1
't
00 CM
'o'
'"o
o -4
o
'ri
^
%
<s>
^
,!rv4
:!
--a
'^
^
"-a
3
p
n
^
"^
t!^
.^
t!^
^^ -^ i^
'-3 ^-3
*
.rvi
^^
;3
^^
\
/S-I"^
'iO J
tK
t^
^"q
''^^
-^ -^
'-a
--I
?[
^ ^ ^
'I
:-a
f*^
^:f-(
/^
"^
/vT
tfvT
/vT
/^
trvT
/^ ^^
/vT
1/
p
p^
1
f p
f-
f^
f-
1^
"o
--o
'^Q
-^0
^q
^^
p
f
-^q
'1
m.
f.
Q^ CO
CO
CI
CI
'"'
Infin.
'^'^
*^'"
^'
^'
""^
2 2
\I'mp.
83
J o
'^
f*v|
tT-i
^-VJ
.-sj
n
O O
r^
^tnI
r>4
r-i
^
^^
<i
t!^
r^
<i
>>j
>!
O -^
o
<i
'51
'S
^"^'^li-li-^-l
O
':?
:?.
o -^
-^
-r^
i
QJ a
^ ^ | 4-:5
=i^
^;2.
o 9
^1
^^
^^^
i
:^
-;:d
^^
-vj -;<
:^ 'J '3 ;s .^ ^^
:^'^'?i
'?i
'?i
U
5^
';
'^ :^ j^'^
*-.-vj
^<i
>
V2.
H-J
h;::L
h-j
>
;2.
"-4
h'-'
"^
^
r-
f!^
(^
^0
^"^
"hr
*^ ^^
r-4
r^ fi
1/
^0
1/
^y
y y ^
*6
1
^(MCMf^CO
CO CM
C-l
rH^COOO
<M
<Mi-H
ft.
84
PAKADiaM
III.
'9
'3
a
^0*
n.
=
VI. /v.
^OOOOOOOOQO H. H. A. n.
-d
.r^
',m-
<=
\m
^f^~
^tmm~
.Tvi
', *r
tj^
^ t^"
^
,r-i
r^
0?*^
rJ^
tT^
trv4
'1
^.
^^.
'-4.
VI.
^0
n.
-4'
^^.
'^'^oooo'o^ooo
"^
t>. fc>
t^^^^
ti>
6.
>
P-
P-
^3
'4.
/I.
'-l. '-4.
rl.
'-4.
VI. ti.
'!.
i4.
r4. r1.
^0*
f_
J-o
P ^ !-Zj
f ^
i^
io
J>o
^7
jCj
"^
^T
P^^
"^
"^
A
to
t^
A^
A A
1
"^i
L*
A^
A A
"^i
L*
'-4. ^-4.
H..
<
p} ^^
""I
f
V
'''1 '-^
k.
^-v
*"*
'-^
^
L*
^1
.
"^1
k
''I
'-^
k.
''I
'-^
k.
H
o
y\ k*
A A A H
k.
^1
k.
i
^1
..
k*
n. V
1
^0*
r^!
H*^
H-^
^M
H*^
r^
'A.
A. n.
'-4.
4. n. n. h. n. o 1 1 ^1 n. i
'
1/
Hi
'A.
P^
Hi
^-i
*=i
H-
Hi
Hi
H^
H
'-4.
A. A.
t}- rd.
A. A. A. n.
% ^
A. A.
2
ft^
c
r-i
;:r^
CO
CO
CO
CO
(M
01
(^5
<M
85
n.
51
n.-4.
:3
9 o
n.
'^^^
d d
^.-4.
'1*1
O O
n.
V
6.
H.
1
4 A. G ^5
^-
4.4.
1^
Ha.
"
'o'
^a '^.
o
'-4.
H. A. H.
1/
^*^
^:%
'3 ^3
^"^
^^'3
c
4^4 Ayl.
'-4-4
^
-l.
'::i
H. 4. a. 4. 4. 4. A. Aj^a
'^
4 '4. 4. 4. H. .4. n. 4. A 4.
o^
t^
Si
<4
"^
"^
<j
-
Vj
4^-
^-^
*^-sj
H*^
<
<i
Cj
^vj
<j
A. J\ iA
A
V
'A
^ A ^ o ^
-'
'^
^i
H*^
H*^
H*^
r<Tr
"^
tj^
H*^
H*^ *;il
n.
^:4.
^^. /I.
^-
A. 4,
f^.
?in.
AA.
?r <N (M
CO CO <M
S
CO
CO
(M
<M
<N
8(3
PARADIGM
J^ -^
-^
.r-vi
IV.
f
p
'vj -vi
i^
^^j^
-vj
,;-v|
--vl
--^4
-^
:rv4
"^
^-^
^^o.
tTvj
^-v|
r^
"^
'1
-a
a =^ci '^ ^^
-Q
-CI
^a
^'I
.a
^a
:'l
^a
1
^
^
'^
1
tK
I
e.
.^
t
B.
1
u
. e.
6-
D.
|>.
-v.
'a
''o
'"cr
.'ri
'o
'^ %- ^ ^ -vj
u-Vl)
P
1
P
A 1 1 S 'a
P
<'a
'"cf
^r
P/
""^
^g
"^
)
f-S^)
1.^1)
c-V
"^
t--Vp
t.-si)
.
J^ J^ ""^
IxJ
'--vl)
^-^
t.^
^ ^
u-Vp
'1
T,
'
C.^
o CO
p
q ^
^d
<j
p
g <
p ^
<i
'
^g
P
P
-1
1/
e
P
ad
'-J
g d
^
1
^ V ^
cj i^ j^
';
5^r
ta
to
^cL
!
11
;g.
'ii
^ii
-ii
;i
^"3
'<2
,S'^
-**4>
*-vp
p
t-'vp
'^
(^
"^ )
p
1..-VP
'"S*
"Vp
*-"vp
tvp
A
^
ft-
^g
.c
age
51
-'^
'c
la
'il
:^
^iL
pil
:^ :^ :^ ^S .^
**
'
1
!
'3.
4-vj
%
'J^
il
'^I
1
'^ :
'
^ ^ ^ :a
p
c^
^
*
p.,
r^
: 's
^ 9
'ii
'4
'
'3.
^4
^ ^
%
1
CM
'ii
'^
3
%
:^
'^
'ii
'5)
,0
'^
^ .4 V .-^--V^T,
<N
C<>
Rococo
C<J
'"'r'COOC
4
1-H
1
Olai^h
Quiesceid.
87
^-^
31
1
4 4
^-^
^^ ^^
^^-^
1
vi
'i
1 1
'iL
il '^
'il
'iL
%S
1'^
r^ .<3_ 't^^t
Ci
'CT
'^
<3
^
^"t
l*!^^
^^
5
^^I
:7 ^7 TS ^7 ^t
f"^
-^ ^
<i
^ ^^
x'^p
"3
^il
"-i
^il
CJ -^
r~J
--4
'^
:^^
'I 'I
31
1
t^xcb
>,<:|)
CK-vp
t,vp
'I'l
11
^ci
"d
^
"-^
31 31
3-1
1
-a 1 1
^r:^
'^ "^
^ .3
^^
^3
^C1 fC[
51
"'5
r
'^
't
a:!
'A
%
1
=7 '^
^3
"^
Ci
cj'^
'fl
\
1
"1
1/
^3
"!'
'J.
w^
'"ci
1'
S
'
ia ii
':^'l
3'1
'V^'V*^*
4-;
^
~
^
^
CO CO
5^
5^
b:<moi
i^
PARAlJlGM
V.
89 'I 'I
'-vl
hC
t
hC
<
^ ^
'^ '^
"9 -q
::^
-q
H
-^
'-3
^-^
"q
'^^
S
<
^
hQ
-I
^'q"
""a
>^3
'^a
h'q
Jq h3
Si
Si
3 c
1/
'3
Q
5{
1/
r^ ^ ^Q
/^
-^
"^d
^t^-
^q
'^
fi
-Q
<5
-Q Q
.q
':::J'^
'^1
^^ "4 ^^
-vj
1^1 ^
1/
r{i
^
Qi cj
'::j
1;
*-3
'^
cr
'^
C:j
c^'^
l
'5
11
1
ill III]
rv|
I 'I hQ hc
-sg
%
'^
^ *^
>--
I
"^
.8-3
3
;^
8 '8
1
2^ Q^ O^
l-^ CO
CO
<M
CO
o:)
c<j
(M
90
PARADIGM
VI.
'Si
j
'^
V
1
^4^
1
^^i^ "1
!=i.
<o
'51
>
V
^
I
^V V
<
;=3.
zy
zy
1
">
-1
^ 1 ^ 1
1
'1
'J !, "^
1. V-l,
CM CO
050
n
I
=3
^ 1
n2
'I
:1
"^r?
'"^
:ii.
1/
1^
Ii1
^
i_
.1
^ ^
"1
y
"1
.1
%
1^'
''^"'^^
5^- -^-
-^>- -5^^
r^"
^
CO
H
^
-1
-1 '1
'^
1 H
"i
"V.^:^
^-a
i i i
-J
'i
a
:^
'-%
^^^ ^
1 i
'-^
-^
-I
'^ f^
-^
S3-
"J 'd
-^
^
o
H
CO
d
CI
--i
a
I
a
?? CO
V a
a^ CO
CO
(N
91
V
1
ad
Vi
5=^
.-1
'I
S3.
'I
"
'-|
au
'
'^
%f*^
'-^
ri^^ .t
^z>
4
r^
':=i
/^^^liV
j
fn
r^
'si
r^
err
^^
'
r^
J^
"V^:^
51
^^.4444
S3.
Sa
S3.
^ a
C^
4^
a
r^ CO
CO 05
S a
Q* CO
^CO
a
CM
<M
92
PABADIGM Vn.
I
61
'Si
-S.
<
q
1:7
'-vj
->^
.^
r^
.61
-^
61
--^ -61
r^
.61
^
r^
"Vl
"^
j>4 .61
>s|
"^
rvi -6]
"^
cT^
->4
^'vj
;^
.61
-61
-g
'I
1
CO CO
,/ ^^
'V
r.
.'^61 ^61
^61
V^x
^61
^61
^61
3
1
'i
j^
6 C
i
:.n '-61
1
9
."^ "^n "61
^ ^ ^
j^
5^ ^n
^6
j^ .n .9
'I
J I
'Q
M/
61
fd
:
^6J
M
a
^
<3
!
'^
q
1
\i
^s 6
<^
'Q
'6
c
'1
<o
-6
n
c
T3
"6l
-d
^
'd
^t
V^T
is
Nun.
93
3
1
'^ d d
^c
'PJ
':::i
c:j
'cr
'^ '^
c:j
ci '^
1
^r-sj
tTvi
i^
i^
.T^
"^
g-
V
c:j
,
'^^
-^
'^
"^y
c:j
c:i
^:^
'^
<3
cj :^
"d
n
"^H
"d
^vj
'>--i
-^
"^-'l
vi
o-fn
*i^
'^^
111 Ji hlVi;
'-^
K
uH
'I
^"-1
^ ^M
^.-
-^
l^'"^ r
<
iT*
'^
*2
'^
'=^
'^'2 ""!!]
''^
n
1
^ ,H
-^
"^^3
'^
'^'2 ""H
'^'^
i-n-^ "l
N*-!
^C
1/
q "^
4 ^i
f fn
^i
<=n
I\q
;r^
p*^
6l
6]
61
61
a .d
f
'^^ ri
f< f^
^d ^d
4
1
s
*-
r^ ^
r^ f*^
>Tr^*Tr
i
^
J
^'
CO
h61
'^
g
1/
d .d 9
I a
CO
(M C?
r-T
CO
CO
(M
(M
i-H
94
PARADIGM
VIII.
I-
'5J
^4
:i
^
a.
^^
'vl
r^
"^
-vl
^
^rv|
*~>4
"^
tTvl
-es
"^
t.xs|
"^
tTxJ
'^es
"vl
^^v4
CK*e>
^>|
CK.es
tTvl
"^.es
'I
-
^ -I
I I
'I
'i
:^
I J ^
?
I
CO
g ^1
4?^
I I
"^
tK*^
'I
'
i
't
'"q
^
c^
"VJ
~*e
^
-^
j:t
<-.rs
^^
i
<j
fl
1
't
^
a ^ a
'a
V^T
C--*^
^^
^(^
a
1
f
^a
'B
I I I
H
^
I
'^
'vi
t-es
-^
a^
^
^
"^
.es
"^
rs
a
*o
%es
'I 3'
't
^.e*
V
^e^
'1/
%es
*'
p.es
^es
^*^
f!^
^es
"-.rs
I I I
'J
:^
'I
.^
t^
(M
4;0
!Q^ CO
CO
<N
C<J
rH
g^ CO
CO
<M
(N
i-l
95
4i
^:::j
':::!
-^^
%^
.rs
ii
i
'^ '1
O!
z:^
'a
-n.
^7;;
"I
1
^i
'^
^'^
^^
:|
v^ ci r^ LP
-r::!
,^ ^a
ci
':::i
,.*;
^'^
'^ -.
^'^
J^
'I 'I a a
I
f
K.?>
'i
^ -- 7S ^ I
'2- '2-
"^ I 'I
^^^ l.al-a.a
i
'I 'I
!
r^ >vj 'a .a
f-^
-vi
W
"^
'^
<i
*'!3
<4
^"^
V4
f
=1
3'1
r^ ^o
%;!
C;!
t;:
^n.
^n.
r;;
%#>
^'
1
coco
<M
C<l
lli^^COCC
C<J
<Nr-l
96
Compare
4.
Rem.
).
3 w.
Preter. Sing.
3 /.
2 m.
c.
Vy^^
Ai^o A\6o
AV^o
Plur.
q14^ q14^
* *
Fut. Sing.
^Q^OJ
"v^c4)Z
^o^oZ
Plur.
,q14^U ^Q^OJ
Imper.Sing. m.
\o^
^Q^^
Plur. m.
qLq^O qLq^O
Infin.
^4^Sd VV^nVo
^^y-fexi
\\.4nV) VV^nk)
f.
ol^n^
^*5^-4^
etc.
Part. Act.
m. U^-o"
Passive
^Jy-*^
^^u-^
they
may
easily
97
36.
The union of verbal forms with suflBxes is much more It should be remarked simple in Syriac than in Hebrew. in general that the vowel of the first or second syllable
either falls
away
e.
g.
in the 3 fern,
and
1 sing. pret.
falls
and Q in the fut. or the vowel of the second syllable back upon the preceding consonant e. g. in the same
;
;
per-
of the
tOD
first
%ji
and O quiesce
in
and
Verbal
,
-il-
and Q-
remain
vowel of the first syllable ol* Pa. and Aph. remains unchanged, and the suflSxes of the 3 plur. are attached to verbs in the form of separate pronouns. In respect to the particular persons the following should be remarked (see Table of the pronouns, 16. and table of the verbs, with
suffixes, 36).
A.
Preterit
with Suffixes.
^JjD in the
masc.
1.
and fem.
3 sing. fem.
AS^^
A\4^
before ^QO
The
others
Al^
with
sutf.
a.
1.
2 sing. masc.
with
2
suff.
c.
sing. fem.
jiA^^^
is
changed
into
^aAa^^ with
suff.
suff.
b.
1 sing, com,
a.
1.
suff. b.
or with
iQD
^^a^
..7
3 plur. fem.
parag.
^^ >
oS^Q
eitiier
^o*4o w^ith
suff.
c.
or with
V^Q*
98
2
plur.
and
fern,
.oANfco, ^AlZjJD
Rkm.
suffixes
,A4o
2
with
The
are
3 fern.
masc. and
only
distinguished
the
first
point,
which, in
4).
follow the
and
with
retain
where
e.
sing. fem.
Al^^
Yet the form OiASQaj) occurs in Ps. cxviii. sufF. OlAl4s 16V, instead of which, since no similar example occurs, the punctua-
The same
is
^|
;
is
changed
over
01^]^
but in the 1
]
sing.,
remains
it
e. g.
^A^|s*
f
In respect to verbs
1 rad.
and a
quiescent,
fir>t
should be remarked,
and a
its
;
e.
g.
OlA^O|
But where,
in the regular
it
verb,
7
'
firet
of verbs retains
,
in
the
1
same manner
g jlo] with
Gl^^f
|\
*
with
suff.
\ ^
'-
retain
in the pret.
yt
unchanged,
7
like the
7
form
with
^\4^*
i>
'^^^ ^ fem.
7
;
and
sing,
change
suff.
into
e. g.
Ao>
;
01 Aoj
^j^
e. g.
.QOAoj*
syllable
''>e
unchanged.
In respect to
second syllable,
retains
it
should
of the
,
Pa.
but where
falls
away
or
falls
first sylla-
ble
is lost.
The 3
sing.
sufi'.,
are hence
all similar,
masc. and 3 plur. masc. and fem. in Pe. and can only be distinguished
e. g.
01X40
M.4^
^^
^\4^)*
before
when standing
tQ2 and
i*^
B.
Throughout the
inserted, remains
sing,
and in the
1 plai\,
Q which
,
has been
suffixes
#00 and
99
it falls
^4^^ takes the suff. a. 1. ; but if the suff. is in the 3 person, only the suffix, a. 2. is used. The other persons are treated according to the rule laid down. In the plur. the 2 and 3 niasc. and fern, remain unchanged with suff. c.
Rem. *^
with the
also true in
syllable,
suff.
falls
away, and
is
is
connected
suff. after
What
away of
true of
in Pe.
is
Pa
excepting before
;
of 3 person masc.
g.
^G10i\5oi
is
appears sometimes
over
Q
and
by
Sionita.
But The
this
form
neither
mentioned
by Amira
;
nor
sing,
plur.
(J
The same
put me not
*
.
is
1 1
iZoioZ
to
shame.
radical retains ..
p.
'
,
i.
-X
"^
P |j
^
e. g.
Ps. Ixxi.
9. ed.
Erpen.
>
r\n^m/
'nSL* Amira in Pa. Ps. cxviii. 1V2, 1 1 found particularly in prohibitory negations, which remark is likewise confirmed by the examples given. The persons of the fut. with ^ remain unchanged. But it should be
.aJ.Q^sZ and
,
adds that
this
form
is
remarked that
masc.
25,
;
if
the form
^oN^Hl
,
e* g.
,>CTljU0\f^O1
sometimes
falls
away
e. g.
Matt.
viii.
^^OlO^JLJn
C.
The 2
2.
sing. masc.
^q4^
suff. a.
of the 1 per. sing, and plur., and of the 3 sing. fem. When the suff. is in the 3 sing. masc. the form of suff. c. is used.
jAq4o
with
suff. b. ^i
Q^q4o
passes into
o^^oo
with
100
The 2
Rem.
rare,
and omits
The
imperative with
its
and .
;
and
7
1 1
i
in
7
the other
conjugations, retains
*jkCl
I
vowel unchanged
e.
g.
Nno
receive
him.
The forms
unchanged
e.
g.
^'M
^^
reminded,
with
plur.
suff.
it
1 1
i^?Z|
in the
of Verbs
|2)
vowel
_*
vowel
But
is
in
those
"i
"
\i
Q,
this
radical;
e. g.
0^(
with
suff.
^OlO^O]*
as the
Yet
7
this transposition of
Q
-x
_,
*>
in
r
Verbs 3 Gutt.,
pruise him,
falls
away;
suff.
e. g.
Om.*^* with
^OIOm^^A
Verbs
o\oo|
with
ll
e.
g.
;
^^Q^l^f
e. g.
do me good.
suff.
tONofjuQ with
is
iCH
^n\f^nn*
;
the more
usu.il
but
in Pa.
with siifF. a. Pe. changed before the suff. of the 2 per. plur.
The
infinitive
^4^^
1.
remains unsuffixes of
The
^4^Ld.
But
the infinitives of the remaining conjugations with a ai-e treated as feminine substantives, the feminine suffixes of which (those of the 3 plur. excepted, which are attached
2.
and
48. B. femiaines,
Rem.
In Pe., where
falls
away, some
Buxtorf adds
;
grammarians
e.
g. Ol
N^nSOV
mth Q a Q
e. g.
^y
8T. MICHAEL'8
r-
PAHTICIJ^LES
WITH SUFFIXES.
If the
,
101
vowel be
as in
Verbs
GLl
it
remains unchanged
e.
g.
gi SnnSO\
with Suffixes.
E.
Participle
Participles,
suffixes.
which are considered as nouns, take their This occurs, however, more rarely in the part, act.,
;
where either prepositions are used seek thee^ or a noun formed from the
the suffix;
^
e.
g.
v^
participle
is
OljOpl his helper. e. g. >rl sujpjporUng On the contrary participles with separate pronouns (vid. IS. 4. Rem.), or with alformatives ( 20) form the present tense.
102
Proper Form.
Sing.
c.
2 m.
Sing. 3 m.) 3
f.
^^\
AX^^I
^
^ujZ(^^
jj2\L4^
*/^6^
V^
^'a^^
^^AI:^
2 m.
Al4^
^aL^^I
2f.
1
c.
jj-iAl4^
AV^
m.
Plur. 3
q1^
2 m.
2f.
.o"AX^ jJLJ0Al^
^Al^
^:^^
^^y-^aLo!
^jjjI'AI^
c.
^*li^
.^.KfcnV^
inl\(^
.inKt^nSo
Infinit.
.>iV^r^V/^
Imp. 2
2f.
sing.)
m.)
m.
V5^Q^^
i1
iSo^Q
%^a4o
q1ci4^
.all
Vq4o
Plur. 2
oS^no
2f.
^^O^X)
1^'ut.sing.)
m.)
VJ^^^
^^
*o\(^ni
.ilSfcoi
^i^4^
>>nSf^ni
Plur. 3 m.
Pret. Pa.
^^
o\f^nV) ^Zo\fcnV)
Infm.Pa.
103
Plur. 1
c.
2 m.
2 f
aiS^
aii\l4^
;
GlS^O
^^
(t:4n ^5\1^
.QQ^k^
.QDAS40
*
X-
inVAo
GiA^4^
oi2M|!o
^-^Ali4^
*
^Guti^J^
^oiaki\L4^
C71i\l^
ou'Al^
Ullt^^
^^Al^
1
jt
.02
A^^
.
^Al^
.'^qVAo
^01 ol^^
1
c -Xt
tO^S^^
p...-h
7
kn\t>n
^^olJoAL^
GuoAli^^
GiLA^^4^
^oi^l^
^
*
p.
7
^'M^
X
ik:
^aiai\^
oiS^jciKo di^L^aiiD
*
X
.7
fs
fl
t-
T>
,^S4ciSd
,
^aOuJiQ^O
ou.Sq4o
\oAo
X-
*
*
^oiaJ^(i4o
^(TloX^oo
oL^o^o
oioL^Qo
^-A^Q^^
.qI^qd
X-
4f
*
-x
.
oijLl^4^j
44oi
^quIq^oj
X
^-iJq1q4^
P -x*
.
^oi^Q^nj
oi!i4^
P -xt
->
^jqI^oj .onjoX^ns
oiS^o
T^^i^
^"Za^^nVo
^onl^
^n\go
mlnkl^AKn cfi2o^5'^^
.ooZal^k) ^ZolL^^o!^
37.
Suffixes to
Quiescent (]])
Verbs
with
treatment.
It
may be remarked
in general
(
as in the 3 sing, 1. That the termination ^either loses masc. pret. Pe., or in the sing. masc. of the imperat. Pa., Aph., Shaph. with suff. c or 1 is changed into w*. movable,
;
^QO
_A-b
where the
also
falls
away,
)is
according to some.
fut.
changed
2.
into
j^ with
in
^a.
either omit
entirely,
and
connect the
with
Pa. and Aph. (and sometimes Pe. with ^a. final), or remains with suff. b, as 2 sing. masc. imperat. Pe., and,
without exception
_
,
first
case before
OD
-
'^
The terminations
^>
b,
and
into
JU with
3.
otiant.,
take for
the
OQ (and o]) and for Qa- the form a unchanged in e. g. 3 plur. masc. the preceding cases with suff. b pret. of all the conjugations excepting Peal. In respect to individual persons of this class of verbs with suffixes, the following should be remarked
forms
all
;
:
A.
Suffixes,
The
Buff.
loses 1
and appends
form ^y*
suff
b,
and
%aOU of the 3
105
a. 1.
The
The
same
is
^"yi
c.
2 sing. masc.
2 sing. fern.
^^yt
^A^..
attaches
suff. b. to
is
changed into
oo^
(and o(^.t)with
\.
suff. c. suff. c.
\^
3 phir. fem.
Yerbs 3
with the
suff.
,
a. 1,
,
The
tOD
where
The
3 sing.
same is true also of the 1 sing, in both conjugations. The 3 plur. masc. occurs mostly before the suff., with o doubled
{see
Amira,
p. 372);
e.g. Ps.
liv.
3,
ed. Erjpen,^
1
OIOQIID appears
falls
away
before
;
the
suff.,
and
^ becomes movable
;
but
quiesces in
wi
e. g.
a^
with
suff. ^cLjjL
oTZul with
suff.
^ODqIZLiII
The 3
suff.
e. g.
plur. fem. in
away
of
over
takes
suff. c.
The
With
(
which terminate
3 plur.
afiix to the
form -\jJ
suff. b.
The 2 and
masc. and fem. remain unchanged, and are connected, as in the regular verb, with suff. c.
106
Rem.
Apb.
mode
Sometimes
;
also
suflf.
3 sing. fem.
e. g.
;
Matt.
19,
her^ or in Pa.
tt.
e. g.
Luke
xiii.
oui^jf
e.
And
g.
2 sing. masc.
^^-^yi is
p
unchanged with
It
sutf. b.
\i
is is
changed
into
.-^y
with
sufF. b.
\.
*
mO
affixes suff. c. to
|Jyi
the form
J->-^y*
Rem. The
-J oiflD*!
imperat. Pa.
sufe. g.
heal her. The same is true in the plur. masc. of the same conjugations. In the fem., the paragogic form with suff. c. is the usual one. (Compare 2, above.)
D.
Infinitive with Suffixes.
IJ-vv^? in
In the
is
infinit.
Pe.
place of
J., %j
without a vowel
inserted with
suff. a. 1.
of a. before y^^, ^-*^ (see 1. above,) Lud. de Dieu, p. 395, doubts. The infinitives of the other conjugations are treated as in the regular verb. (Compare 36, D.)
E.
Passive.
Plur.
Active,
Sing.
Plur.
Sing.
,oA-iS/,
AaX.I
m.
, ,
107
participles of the other conjugations are inflected in similar manner, retaining the characteristic vowels ; e. g.
act.
The
Pa.
^1
.oA-L-1^ ye
ask^
Aph.
^jqSd we
thank^ Ethpe.
i 1
<^ASo
we turn
about.
General RemarTc.
Verbs of the form of llo to console.^ never lose the third radical letter 1 when taking a suffix, but throw back its
vowel upon the middle
ally stands vacant
;
e. g.
j^pLo
fiit.
pi.
masc. %..kJO(jJD,
*^ 1 1
*^
,
l,
fem. wiJUf^jD
wtGiCLkViJS
2 plm\ masc.
t0|.ftjo
108
VERBS
J]
WITH SUFFIXES.
Verb
)]
Proper Form.
Sing. 1
c.
m.
f.
Pret. Sing.
Pe
r
7
3 m.
Pa
Pe.
1
Pfp
7 7 7
2-0
i
3/
1
c.
P^7
Pa.
A^^
Peal.
*
X
^A^-iD
7
wI^Aj-^
o\o
0Q\O
X
X^7
X
Plur. 3 m.
7
Pael.
n^mi
..p 7
..p 7
/.
'K7
> 1 1
1'fO
Tnfin.
llcik)
;nk)
;nV>
Imp.
2
Pe.
wi. 1
Pa.
P 7
/.
IP
ill! .g'pO
wiJOO'fO
Plur. 2 m.
O'pO
p
-^
2/
Futur. 3 w.
vv
\V
oula'jTLJ
^.^nj
in*;m
luy
3f.
C.
2 m.
X
.
1
Gilo
t
-n
-n
I 7
cruQ>A
7,P
-R
.p
oiZ'pO
oiZ'^o
""
''
^*
GlLtl^i
diiL^
01 00*^
*
X
.QSZu^
7
X -X
^o^Aa*^
-
-X
aOlbo'rO
^CFlol'pD
X
.QJDOO'rD
X
-X
^7
>
X*7
6io1-D
01
.QOOf'rO
>)^
cum
.
-R
..
P 7
t>7.
0.
p?.
-rpT.
0T-ji,,O
.
O-r.7.
p*T.
-n ?.
-A ^.
OULifO
X
-R
-R
cyu;nV)
OU'rOSD
^.^
P 7
T>
-R
T,
^ 1 n i;.fiV)
6u^
7
.
oi;o
Ip
10
IP
OU'pO
lip
^-
4^
-X
^Gioo;^
OlOO'rO
.
.X^7
-^
*
X
-R
-n
^Giaa;ni
OU'rOJ
110
1.
If 001 to be^ which, in Hebrew, exists as Yau conversive, is used to form the moods and The other, tenses which are wanting (see 18. 4. Rem^.
which
tia)^
is
001, belongs to
Yerbs
it is
]J
like
which
it
is
which
not pronounced
this
is
has begun.
Upon
fut.
(oou
and looiJ
see 35, 2,
Plur.
The
inflection of A^l
is
as follows
Sinor.
R
_jl1LA-1
a
-^A^l {we
{ye are)
{the?/ are)
M.
are)
F.
C.
M.
1.
^^L^ {lam)
Jbj^ {thou
art)
is)
Oa^Aal
.0OLLi|
*^A^V
__iOUu|
auL^{he,she
is
^cyioLtXs.
is inflect-
2.
In connection with U
A^l"; e. g.
ed similarly to
^^^
/ am
not.
in connec-
e. g.
^cjiohJfhe was.
looi.
The same
tense
is
also expressed
e. g.
by looi
Zuooi Zuooi
/ had
DERIVATION OF NOUNS.
HI
CHAPTEK
The
ISTouN.
III
89.
1.
Derivation of Nouns,
Nouns, as in Hebrew and Chaldee, are primitive, To primitives and sometimes compounded. belong nouns of one and two syllables, which indicate animals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the bodies of
derivative,
animals, etc. (See Gesemus, Lehrgeb. p. 478, sq.). Inasmuch as they coincide with simple verbal forms, they are always recognized as nouns by the nature of the object which they
7 7
^
designate; e.g.
derivatives,
\nx^ fleshy
JDOlj
^oZo?,
%iLD
silver.
The
which are by far the most numerous, are form ed partly from verbs (verbals), and partly from nouns
(denominatives)
2.
The
derivation of nouns
;
is
effected
e.
a)
without any
g.
,iXSg> counsel^
to
from
;
\V)
to
counsel
v^
mourn
or
by
a mere change
;
of the vowel
e.
g.
^^SSo king^
;
^P-n
fAls
\Q\ fetter
h)
by the
;
sleep^
from ^Aj
;
Aa
7i_pi<
.-j
;
e. g.
care,
from
c)
*)
poli
the
hearty
from ^fH^Q^
are
I
,
but especially Z
by the addition
Those
letters,
of
if
;
Lo
a,
if
^ and Q
final,
Z*
times found in
noun
e.
g.
j^a^d^Z scholar^
112
Nouns
derived
from
Verbs.
participles,
and
de-
significa-
But
The
modes of
TABULAR VIEW
OFDERIVATIVE NOUNS.
113
TABULAR VIEW
OF
PARTICIPIAL FORMS.
A.
Of peal.
a.
The simple hut unusual Participial Forms, ivMch are mostly Adjectives.
Absolute
state,
^^O
IJ^^
1
H^
Emphat. state.,
7
m
sick.
;jQ..
a man.
foolish,
r^LM
an
associate.
7 7
rural, quiet.
Ql and
m
p
wiJ^
^>
IrOJ
pure.
U'
Iqs,
^QA
equal.
hard.
r
-1
I 7
PQ4
iff^pf^fc ;
tjL.y^IS
much.
From
1^0,
these
-X^
17
are derived
Abstract Nouns
e.
g.
\LQ.aJlO hardness;
multitude.
114
b.
a.
Active.
(3.
Passive.
Absolute
state, j
state,
^
^O
IJ^
j
(
^\^jl^
IJIT^^
kO^'l righteous,
Emphat.
>GlD a witness.
^ i\> sound.
pQ^Gl-^A given.
CLL
^QO)
6/ac^.
^.1
a hireling.
-1^
and
.k^
psAa an
U
9X7
P
inhabitant.
PI
^Ql
^^aA cursed.
X
7
IfiQJ
a herdsman,
6Z?!>?,c?.
I^^ilJ long-suffering.
Ql
I4^J^
and
.k.l
Ml
P
17
i\>
Ml
beloved.
reviling.
1^1*^.4 renowned,
\y\j^free,
(^^inn
\1
IT
rare.
|aA9 a herdsman.
POI
a landlord.
]2)
(02 concealed.
U'and
|ii{y)|
U'and |i
lls) ni.
a j^hysician.
|]"and
iZulSD
f.
beautiful.
U
|J
jl* beautiful.
and
pL^J 2yrophet,
fA>*^1 prophetess.
Here belong
publication,
\
also
AbstractNouns, as |ZQjLflD|
AewZ/ziy,
|ZqlQxjQ^
righteousness^
I^QAjl^-^
dryness.
115
c.
Ab.
Stat., j
Vy^i
^q4^ ^q4^
,
(ni\<^ a plough-
JQll small.
rec?
Man.
|^^^-^> ?^ea^.
^i^hemer.
{color).
fto\n
tAS^lM) a friend,
^
|J-(bJ
\2i
()
merer.]
\zi
Q^ and
^2)
Ql
and
jli1
[2 fjsiO\a possessor.
9Qa a spendthrift.
pQ^J damp,
pQ-tl a ^i^er.
QL and
a-A^
Ql and
*.LL
Mi Ml Ml Mi' divorce, ppy ? ^ ^ ^p x p yx 7 fjjj a combatant. \iQ^y\ a youth. \\0\y% a barber. |J.J^O> a bill of
.
^J^^ an
orator.
^Qjn.* a
spy.
P t'
cleft,
*P?|7
i
|J and ^^ |J and <i2^ U and a^ *P-X( ^PP7 l^'^'f" creator. ^Vk a seer. y^O^iO mournful.
*
( N
* P
P
*P'XP
UO^
^i^t'e^.
1^0? t ^ mocker,
U'and
7
]2>
l-k^l a baker.
From
(Zo>Qll
Abstract Nouns,
like
(ZqaXm
etc.
rejection,
116
NOITNS.
PARTICIPIAL FORMS,
the other Active
a.
Of
Conjugations.
Pael.
It takes
Aphel.
usual ^
Shaphel.
the
form,
v^ith
Usual
form
and
"j
Usual
form
and
form ]]^Q!^
p;^^
a leader.
naV>
a dwelling.
pincers.
offense.
\LL\M^
7
rich.
|ib;rnV) poor.
]^n\V>
IP
pCLiLDlD an
("^NtK^ changing,
(I'^NV) a
m
teacher.
r r
VtigiVQ
torturer.
/rue.
(I^IO*
\\
a deliverer,
PrvJLlO a
and .A^
QL
L.OpO
^^QiD
and
-aJL
c^f.s
spairing.
1 1
\\V> proud.
Part. pass.
7
united.
Is'^r^
]V)>;V> high.
|j
injurious. i
>
W^V> completed.
Ql
X
and
.k^
and
-k-^
|JU;.<^10 seditious.
.0
y
|J
and -k^
p_fcjaiSiD a leader.
|1m>V> a watch-tower,
and
la
-X
poUiJLo a
|J
sickle.
|1 ifir>|lO
a physician.
aT)d
7
li
and li
comforter.
wL^
confessor.
%P
PI i^V) a
P^>q1d a
From
|Zqj^^
direction,
(Zoi'^NV)
117
Of
the Passive
Conjugations.
Ethpeel.
Ethpaal.
\
Eshtaphal.
Usual
form and
#
,
Usual form
)
and
tl>0
those with
Jl
\1
those with
)]
\1
'
Ql
,0 P
i:
and ^.^
entreat'
llln/.A^
.0
lim^ZAlD
mg.
^
Ml
curdled.
and
*x2il
]\[\^m:^
full
-^
flilr-'^^ renowned.
]i^\V)ALo
eloquent.
C.
Palel.
Pealel.
Paiel
iHbQ^^^ ^
treasurer.
church-
|V)\V)\ unhurt.
|;^u-2)
a farrier.
Parel.
Taphel.
Qu ad ri literals.
}
Ni 4^^^
^7%
accuser.
IJy.^j^A
a pitcher.
\^Qy%yL an interpreter,
|,
:3QljjCQVD sudden.
iV)\Z a pupil.
118
n.
INFINITIVE FOEMS.
A.
OF PEAL.
Forms
a.
Simjple Infinitive
SegTiolates,
Absolute
state, J
state,
^
^^^^
j 1
^J>.^
j
^
\a^
U^Q^
fAe Arncc.
Emphat.
7
(a2U
]]^
^^V^
F^^?
]]^
*0'X
the soul.
rain.
\M'iClO holiness,
|V)>N bread.
.
Wj?
morning.
pios
>g^
^
li^l
"
^
/awi6.
tJ.^A sea-grass.
K<*'Ol
zf;ay.
(iD;^ herbage.
%a^
|A2)
cZz"%e?ice, (for
*|
(p-^ a
child.
As ^j).
Q1
and jA
goodness,
Ql
(ZqId
and
t-i^
Ql
and
.a^
death.
V^-*^ inace.
y^'i a dwelling.
1^^
L.Ol a yoke.
|J
(OCO an end,
and
ftjJjk
U and
-ft-^
(]...
a treasure.
(^^
^^-^^
Aear^.
pQC
coldness.
^Jti)
and
K
all
IJ'and ^1
U'and
]Zf2) countenujice.
It is
\lo\1 labor,
\LiO\ anguish.
seldom that
g.
inal
e.
oftener
two forms,
an oah^
\i\
119
Infinitive
Vowels.
Abs.stat.
^"i^
^QO
y^lcia
^^^040
oi^^^
Em.
Stat.
U^
U^q4o
T^ol^^
folly*
'\\\^a herd.
Ir,^^ a work.
y^Oy
ture.
apunc-
t^^onN seizure.
o\*^C0
dam.
|u?nnV) affiance.^Lo^L^i^ a
gleaning.
'\si
king-
^
l-flol
(^Q2
a girdle.
.
U'^^V a/^^^^^-
g^
(AjAof a howling.
jc p
^^
Ij^^ij renown.
w.
^aA
, .^
.X
QLandwLl
p
-x
ft
UpO
Ql
talkative
and ^^
7
i
(j
vessel.
K
^'^
^
(.A
on
|J
favor.
CLl and
ness.
]llsi nature.
^ question.
and -i^
]x1j a floioing.
fl
and
^^ ^"^
"^
IZQjlJI indecency.
^Oj
-x
WoQ2);?er>me.
|Z.QaOVM appearance.
*J>j
-x
>
iL-a
^0
p
]]
and
^
confi-
]Zoo,i
sion.
posses-
A-fiy.
^^
'"'"''
P andli
|ZQa|)
ment.
orna-
|i\oV>/M llness.
(nnoN
]]
I
and -'g^
(2
rf^wce.
iSi
sprout.
^
P P
U and )
-x
^JlQJ
error.
'1^
B.
Peal
Pael.
Aphel.
Shapliel.
^^nSD
lAnatV>
thought.
V4^QS
]^S>Qs
change.
fZo,nS
slavery.
\\^^L
help.
(jiAqILd a concussion.
combat.
Isi
yfj^OQ^
delay.
Izi
\
de
V^li speech.
1/
]lhay]l7nerchandlse.
e/
IZaJpOQlO
struction.
^,iD
insight. lAXiaoZf/espair.
fAsaioSba
^2)
f;rnV)
ri
^/if.
j^lOQS
deliveraTice.
^
^^Q2lji
belloios.
i-fc-i
Ql and
jLL
]io<y^Vn departure.
saw'.
/ioe.
|J
]LQ^L U
rubbish.
JJ
Vr^SO a
(and )a)
Ql
and
and wi2k
??ia?itie.
and wk^
^
]]
1Zq-AxSD
?z as-
(iSV)Q>
|J
con-
ing.
sembly.
elusion.
and ulS
V'and ^^^
doctrine.
*
P and -ua
^Zoi >'^QiD
elusion.
co^i-
and
a^
misc.
3'^
a drawing l^UjoZ
VijOO* a joro-
1]"and "la
jA^Zlsi) arrival.
121
INFINITIVE FORMS OF
CONJUGATIONS.
>
r
Palel
4
and Palpel.
Pealel.
(;aJ011
splendor.
'<
VASnlk^Kji
nocence.
in-
JlXoZ a worm.
|J
and (.i^
^*.^Qy.
motion.
Pali.
^
ination.
-*I
fACn^QS
astonish-
ment.
Parel.
*
9
Pamel.
Taphel.
I^ODQCO
swiftness.
l^llOO* shame.
122
DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
41.
Denominative Nouns.
Here belong
1.
JSToans
a)
may
be either jDrimitives or
e. g.
liiyi
garden
]\V) a seaman^
from ]\V)
with the
formative syllables
Gentile ISTouns)
;
U-
masc.,
lA_i.- fem.,
(Patronymics or
e.g.
with
the
;
falling
e. g.
of towns
|>rn^|
or
e.g.
Vqi\^
ness,
Aeac?,
youthfulness^
IZo^uQl
blind^A<?
c)
(A^Q
tie
g.
po*^
;
Utile son,
from Vr^
"IjQ>*1
?i^/!?e
brother^
from
"U*]
lA^oZ'^
dog,
Zi^
|flonn\n a young
;
from
)*^^*^,
e. g.
"^JO*^..
and
from
;
Ir^yt*
e. g.
pound nouns
also occur
;
also
a double formation
(A-iJqAjoZ'pO a very
e.
g.
pocoo'^.. a very
little
man,
little
daughter.
Rem,
letter
Amira
(p.
145)
doubled, and
inserted between
them
e.g.
^4^6^^
a)
little
by
affix-
e. g.
p^09
affixing
spiritual,
from
;
(a*0)
b)
by
niasc.
|Ax- fem.
e. g.
(.ilQ^Qyt masc.
128
from lSQQy.
the third,
ordinal numerals
(see 50. 8)
e. g.
|lLiZ
from
Y^l
c)
by
affix-
ing
tlie
masc.,
(AjXmO)
Rem.
marks
In respect to
a.
and
c.
above,
Amira
re-
(p.
42.
1.
Comjoosite
151
fre-
son
e. g.
|m;n
man,
e. g.
lloL'fdvoice;
\tl^
^muj principal
(A^^Ia^j
firstling;
\b^k^house ;
;
e.g.
AjlO
(m^S
corn-house; sometimes
\^\
eating
e.g.
l^'^O^:^] adversary.
In
changing the
last part of the
hostility,
is
regarded
e.g.
fZonnr^i::)
;
e. g.
IZoAa^
L^j
2.
house-holding.
Upon
The Syrians have introduced many Greek words into their language, and given them either Syriac terminations or permitted them to retain, more or less, the Greek forms.
The
following are examples
;
v^\\\ ^7ot,
.nA^y^Oj
svayysXiov,
P0V).i^Cyi
*flOOV>rn
I
-Jjysjxwv,
.Q^k^iiO
|xaXXov,
|^iD|ALD
fxaSrTjfjiara,
.0\OfY)
tfuXXo^jCfjt-o^.
124
GENDER OF NOUNS.
which
see 12. 5.
and
44.
Rem.
the
8.
At
the Syrians
;
e. g.
Franks^
%ji)901
/l^V] Germany,
Henry,
etc.
SIZuIXmJI England^
p.i;<=^ Prince,
43.
Gender of Xouns.
The Sjriac language has but two genders, masculine and The latter is distinguished partly by the signififeminine. cation and partly by the form.
1.
In respect to the
signification, the
gender
is
fixed
by
men, masculine ofiices, nations, mountains, months and Feminines are the names of female persons and anirivers. mals, countries, cities, and members of human and animal bodies, which are found double although they have masculine endings in the plural;
2.
e. g.
vv...?,
etc.
characterized
first
by
of
(^
),
*-!.-.
Q-
But the
is
\\C1j^ female
com-
panion from
\d^
To
masculines
e. g.
it
is
l^^NV)
the queen.
-i
have
arisen
by apocope from
on
(j
The
e. g.
last
seldom used
^^1^ part.
GENDER OF NOUNS.
Rem.
tives
;
125
in adjeo
|
,
1.
[^
is
generally found
e. g.
If the (^
;
this
letter is
changed into
p
P
;
and forms
-X
e. g.
p p
-X
I
.
j"?
tion into
final are
(.j..
e.g.
a)OGLk masc.
(u)OGLa fem.
Nouns with \l
;
masculine
when Z
is
e. g.
(AaO
boiv,
\Ld
ornament, (A^l
Rem.
2.
Many nouns
or
;
common.
e. g.
P,
They
ij
( 45. 3)
]a-Ss. ship,
T
zt'e//,
P
rib,
|li| earth,
^
P
y^\%\ jntcher,
^
P
A^?'6?,
-X
p^Ii
|;0*^
(2^
6e^/y,
sword, com.,
|J^qLd burden,
|)p
5to7ie,
1^0^
|la\ com.
(>QJ ^re,
jOlflO
|o;JL
me?z^,
s^?^,
com. moon,
|ij0)
-X
|;nflO shield,
(22J.1 branch,
6t'(;/,
com.
i^mf/, (A-fcZ>
-X
terror,
tt
P.
Names
common
gen-
bers
from 20 to
.\
100..
their
gender
e.
g.
n)OrJQ0
tfuvoOog-,
In general,
considered as
brew, ending in
state,
Ht,
and
all
end in (Z
( 45. 3).
26
NUMBER OF NOUNS.
44.
Number of Nouns,
There are two numbers in Syriac, the singular and plural. There are, indeed, four dual forms, taken from the Hebrew,
ending in ^-_ (^iZ masc. two^
hundred,, and
^UiL
fern,
tv^o,^
^^1^
two
but they cannot be considered Pairs are usually exas a special form of the language. pressed by the plural, and duality by the numeral two. Tlie plural of masculines is formed by annexing the
^j ^So
Egypt)
syllable
^.&-.
to the
noun
sing.
e. g.
^'Q^
mountains^ from
(
>Q^
by ^
(instead of
e. g.
poAo
virgin^ plur.
^oAi3
Plural masculines of derivatives from Yerbs U,
,
Rem.
1.
terminate in ^-*
T.
e.
g.
Jj^ hoy^
-n
7
;
plur.
^iN(^
wi;jfcSD
dwelling^
plur.
g.
_,^lD
Feminines
ending
m
:
q and l
take tQ
e.
onNV)
kingdom.^ plur.
QnW)
^
;
e. g.
j;^ creature^
Nouns derived from Yerbs VLL, if the doubled plur. ^;^* <jonsonant appear again in the jDlural, take Linea occultans
X
..7
wnder the
first
of the similar
lettei*s
ap7
^^Djk sea., ,^1
I..
V^
e.
g. ,^j V?V)i
from
m.
Rem.
manner
*QCd1
''l^''
;
2.
same
plur.
;
as feminines.
Here belong:
;
\iSo\
crib.,
plur. IZqjjoI
>Z( place,,
-mi^Z^,
plur.
^
;
-X
|Zoq>j
pjOD
;
plur.
plur.
iZojjQO
P
N^
.-^;
7
;
P."
-X
m^A^,
o\i\
\
(as
member.^
-np
plur.
y
;
|ZqAQ:
"^
^^>
herdsman,
plur.
,
a part, ^-i^j)
.Qi^j
]o*
cup-bearer^
(Compare Agrell, Comment, de varietate and upon the absolute and emgeneris et numeri., p. 68 phatic states, th.-'- form and use, see 45. 1. 3.)
plur. VZoQji
&c.
NUMBER OF NOUNS.
Rem.
lines
;
127
3.
The following
feininines
1AcdV?^;7/, ]ai]]
IZjOSDy.
coal^
|;lDQ..
thorn,
<//6,
'\L^i^y
;
fiff -basket,
^A.iD>
|4*^;
;
|Alk>>
<ear,
tl^J
\^^^^^r**
L^
;
|il\4>*
wheat,
TZaO
w>mc?0M;,
loD
lA*2i^
"(irA
lA.
A Sasm
UJ^
;
12\\^
;
s^c^^e,
VqaaID
;
XLUjD
hair,
U^l
TZpio 6ar%,
;
VAlj.flD
^/i^^,
|j.flO;
lAntS
1Z>Q.|^
Irvv'
etc.
90.1^
I'Ali y^ar,
b)
|A1^0
;
bark,
\2l^O
KrVh* almond,
;
^j^
tZpa
X^La
e.
hour, ^-k^'
by retaining Z;
;
g.
Uvo
Sooi^y,
Ul^
|Z]^
; ;
lAl^cry, lAly.
lZ|
\l\j>^ sight,
w^Zmes^, (Z(
rust,
li\2)^ care,
VAs^
Xtlo
calling,
X^^
l^O*
lAjaOS
Rem.
4.
a double plural
father,
(?7
1^7
J>
^7
;
7
;
army,
^i\>
.
and ^0Ni,i
P7
l^fAj breast,
>
^p^
P7
and ^O^j^
; ;
^1
7_
^^me,
17
1*^1
(77_
and .1*^1
(times,
turns in repetition)
X
^a hand,
VOQ^
-? (;iO
daij,
17
P7
;
^rk( and
^''C
;
\^1^
and .Q^lll
Zorc?,
^;l0
XP
l?7p,y
and ^0;l0
;
ikPX
Ir-LL/eas/,
XI
P^x^P7
JOU
stream,
17
a^QlJ and
1
P,77
^OJCJIJ
;
P7
iS (foun-
^am)
P7
(OOS
^t^n\
?ia7^e,
and ,^nnS
X!)
p;jO horn,
PP
^J^ and
Soiue
etc.
128
NUMBER OF NOUNS. Q
or Ol between
e.g.
XLi!^ part,
]lin^
"jAlLl
is
in-
e.
g.
|Z.jQO>
|AjJQDQ0,
hee,
|u?as>
(AOOj
^^^ace,
(A-i^Oj
lAfiOQCD
7?iar^,
etc.
Rem.
5.
The composites
;
e.g.
|m^O Aa^
kind,
or
;
granary, or
h)
e.g.
the
first
part
e.g.
> i
man-
c)
both parts
U-oZlO
tattling.
e.g. f-kSo
Rem.
6.
in the plural
water^
(jLJs4 Zi/e,
Rem.
Jtiihui
(p.
7.
{collectives^
( 6)
e.
g.
\mDy
horses,
fr^^
and
|
ca^^/e,
,
p.1 sheep.
Amira
>
%*^ draft-cattle.
Rem.
8.
e. g.
|<y^r>orfs <y^|
g^iCxo'jroi,
Lw^2)
(poCkcLyysg,
tSQ..Oj 5oyixara.
e.g.
\LQlDy^
fX7]p^ava/,
(ZojAcoI
-H
e.
-X
droL^ioL.
Letters
terminations are
9
commonly omitted
from
vo.ao^.
g.
^CDQSQJ
J
vo.aoi
The
by
hg and
rsg,
from from
and
ctg,
are represented
av^Piav-re^
and ^^
e.
g.
|,
iNo
xKti^sg
xXsij;
(^^'r^l
from
kvS^iOig.
The Syriac
often re-
and of the
SQ, J2D|,
cases, represent-
(first
declension)
7 7
T
by
I.
e.
g.
*QJ01
Jwva^,
01
tlDtl-^^-S)
(piaXag,
J2DQ1jZ|
'A&>)va^,
;nir) Ks^p^^faj;
and
ouj
(second declension) by
and
129
and
g.
.fr>r><y>
x><y^
dy.'ki^rfr^ur'
e. g.
ULD
x(paXaia
the genitive
by .Of
e.g.
tOl-.i^9|
a^x^t(Ajv
sj
are represented
by JXLa.,
!, .X|
and
e.g.
*D;ao KaiCa^a^,
15
.nr>|o\<y>^-Xr/v^r
is
,DQ1a.^01 'EXXrivag
;
represented by *Iu.
e.*.
g.
CLkXD9
ai^scfsj^
ending in ara,
are represented
by |4
^^^^ l-bl
w^yiOj
and
^pD..O>
nouns
;
^oyjxara.
Some
e. g.
IlDpQJ| annonoe
^CDj^^COpD
g.
IX> p...
'
castra.
The same
is
Otiol. Syr. p.
4649),
45.
Noun,
1.
in
Sjriac
the
and Chaldee, an
emjjJiatic state.
It
originally
marked
definite article.
It also
occurs where
we
article.
The
one.
indefinite article
is
expressed by the
absolute state,
by pM
There are
e.
g.
J^Ql*
heat^
tLDQO
situatio?i
l^oZ
2.
diflPer
bull,
tZolb
death,
etc.
The
construct state
a) of
;
nouns masc.
sing.,
does not
state
e. g.
^s^ good ;
but in the
130
plural, the
^^
is
changed into ^.
e.
g. ^^-i^i
con-
struct state
i>
from ^^'^L*
IS'ouns
by ^^*j-rQ
state is
%jla
e.g.
from
^r^;
^)
;
of the absolute
changed into 2
As2
from \^i*
;
To
the ter-
minations
Q and
e.g.
.^1
only 2
is
added
e. g.
2o^\V) from
is
onW)
In the plural; Z
i^^i^*
appended
instead of
S.
A^^J from
The
characteristic of the
is final 1
emphatic
the
state,
for
both genThis
(= ^
Hebrew
article).
_i-
preceding;
07
e.g.
the
1*..
termination
7
[^ with
away of
y..
--.
e. g.
7
f^yy
b)
the
men,
from J^yt
attached
before Z
;
in the
emphatic
and
i_
plur. (- is
falls
In the
sing.^
away
lALoAci from
constr. state
e. g.
i^oLd*
In the plural,
is
retained before Z;
Rem.
1.
The emphatic
state
masc. ends in
;
(^-
in
nouns
from
in the phiral,
( 44.
Rem.l)
e.
g.
;
MrA^O
viz.
_u ,aSd
6o?/.9,
(.&.-
instead of \m^
ti
N^
|-ij^/ra^me/i^5,
,
^.\^
]
1^
HH^*
>^
;
cites yet
]1I
e.
Rom.
ix.
24. ]1'^;
in
Ephes.
11. ]-!il^lI
ip.. 7
Hut these forms are not recognized by Amira, and the form
should perhaps be restored in these cases, as more correct.
in
[^^
fol-
The
:
(l*^*^ |
131
(Ao
Rem.
( 43.
^0;jD
^/lee,
empliat. state
is
fOjQ^
quiesces in
(A.t.*
Q Q
inserted and
.
P
;
-X
..07^
"i"
e.g.
I^^O^js*
from |0,Myoy.
Forms with
(.k^
take
Some words
e.g.
in the
radical;
(Z^^. from
state fem.,
and especially
the
syllable
by
affixing
in^^'^sc).
e.
g.
(AiQ^ (from
;
tiQnb
Adjectives
jJ.^
change
in
this
e.g.
(Au.^^ from
dull.
Those
^
into
take
^
e.
after
e.
g.
compassionate.
before
e. g.
f
In the
;
emphat.
state
g.
Some
e. g.
take
m Q
;
(LQILd from
da^ part.
|A^^(Lo
Rem.
which
(vid.
is
3.
is
formed by
e. g.
king
Syntax, 73).
182
Tdbh of the
Noun,
MASCULINES.
A. Nouns of one and
two
(Decl.
syllables
1.
with
immutable
vowels.
48).
Plural.
emphat.
constr.
absol.
'
Singular.
emphat.
^
5
''
constr.
and
absol.
Head.
Vessel.
7 7
f P
"'^"i
..7 p 7
--x
>
P P 7
Thief
7-X
..T-x
^''*>
Herb.
Nazarite.
-^
-7
..
X..
P7
Nation.
B.
Nouns
in
which
and
fall
away,
retained
(Decl. II).
7 7
7..
r^lO ..p
...t
%^ r^lO
7..
7
p
^ ^no
I.,
p
I..
naiCD
^07
^JOICD
...X
^Pp
fXJlCD
1
^
pa
lrl
"rTlD
''>P
Talent.
_->01CD
i..x
>aifiD
'
Witness.
^^
Vif-if
^r-^l
^r|
^af7.
Altar,
U^AO
*
.ujL^^
^jJ^^ V^^)
-R
^^
>
DECLENSION OF NOLANS.
C.
133
Nouns
falls
in
winch
(in gutturals
7
away,
appears
radical consonant.
III).
)]'4)'ALd
wiX^oASd ^-i!!L^Aii
1]'4^ASd
^\^ALd
(O^e dead).
a vacant
consonant,
or
over
or
..
reappears in
inflection,
is
their stead.
(Decl. IV).
H\vi
|;2iCD
.
-X
._,.Kvi
,F1S0
King,
Beck.
-X
-x
(s)ao
*-n..
^.AjB^on
7
7
^-i^joo
X
7
..
l?ao
Ul^.
^0,0
Holmess.
Master.
..1
..7
^Q
2>oa>
X
..X
JSOOa
_
-^
^jySOCU
7
^^AiOOk
7
lk)Ql
Day.
Eye.
..
U^'
DiS^
r-^
-ty
^]^
lls^
^4.
Impure.
E.
Nouns
f
|J
ending with |-
->
in
which
passes
and
is
(Decl. V).
\jlL J
iS
IIOIJ
7 Pt7 [>\rr>Vr>
.
Zq1>
7t
>
,
^r^' ^Q1>
!'".''
H^'
[jJL^
"^^1
|
^^' tl>
1^
^
''
^^^^^
grazes.
Herdsman.
XonVn
*
7
^>\mV)
*
f*
\m V)
\mVr> Abandoned.
*
m^
7
<
U^
m.
>A
-n
Rest.
(in*
in
^in
|i*^<
(0
Prisoner.
184
FEMINIZES.
A. Nouns with immutable vowels (Q, ^A-,etc.) before the ending
U
BoAsi
Plural.
Virc/in,
(Decl.
I).
]lo Bride,
iLi^
Cify.
Singular.
absol.
emphat.
constr.
emphat.
constr.
absol.
lAl^oAi'
AKoAq
^oAo V^o^
Xt^
lAL^rk)
tS^otci
]]oAo
Aili
Aj->r^
Vd
M->r^
Alu
r^
r-^r^
B. Nouns, whose
final
(Decl. II).
VLojf Widow,
i2^LsD-,r
U'^'
Chariot,
]i{]
Alms.
AisD,T
^iv
^^1
^>i
i^^>r Av^iV
lAi^^^
(Aoji
w^n'
u;^^
jbji
12^1^:
1Ad>i
AS^
Atdji
AS^^
Aoji
first
syllable
).
is
moved forward
to the
Decl. Ill
I'r^AA Partner,
^Pj?
]]Ll Cow.
^7a
7
.7
IZ'rTija
Z*rlx.
^'pilLM
U*pCl>^
Z'pClAj
7 P I'r^lM
lis^-
^^-
^^
lii^
iS
:^-
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
D. Derivatives of Verbs
fl
185
whose 4^ and
Decl.
ending in
f.-^
and (O
and _^
in the
emphat. state
sing, quiesce in jl
IV
).
^*-mO
i?/ame,
|0>
Animal,
'"
C ^*^^'
^P
P- 7
>
"
X7
TAi^
Aii^
^
|j
77
^:ja
P7
1114
IAA4
E. Derivatives of Verbs
ending in
and
%jk
*.il- (
),
beginning
i^nd
(Decl. V).
Q.J^* Request,
XL^l
p,
p
..
r^-5
Zqj^
p..
-^
Zoa^
ZomId
(k,^
..
^Pa
-X
(ZglmId
QmID
0'-
-n
VaI-^
P
t
IL^
rzai,
l&lVi
Zu*^
J^
ol,
Aivn
X
7..
rzos^
Zoi.p y
..
zai.
Alio
-x
p 7
..
l2oi^
120-;^
Zqi2j3
Zo3^
.0^
p.. 7
rzo-A^
Zo;k)
0*^
136
The noun,
suffixes, 16),
1.
m taking
;
and table of
:
In masculines
is
attached to
e. g.
away
of j
|^N^
with the suffix >>n\^> In decl. I. Ill, lY. Y. the radical vowels are not changed. In nouns of decl. II., the final vowel of the absolute state Jl or _^, reappears before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plural
(from
y^^\
A)
( 48.
e. g.
^-Ns, emphat.
jaiCD
,
|V)Ns,
with suffix
>Vr>\v
;
jOL-flO,
nouns, which again before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur.
^>Cl
,
with suffix ^OljOlflO* So also monosyllabic lose Jl or _!_ ii^ the emphatic state, take it
;
e.g.
emphat. jSO
y^
(J
% (^r^ from
;^), etc.
In nouns,
ending in \1
of the 1
,
before the
;
suffix
^
5'
m _^
;
e. g.
>
>
\^
n^.\^
-
-X
from
(j.^
emphat.
;
X^^-^i
?*-^-^
is
movable
e.g.
a >
e.
g.
grammarians,
%j is
OuX^
\.^).
The same
is
.k^
32.1,
X
7
48 masculines, Decl.Y);
7.
e.g.
^oouAaLo,
.._>
AaVn
(. . >
A^Vr>
)
1,
pronounced
e. g.
- A>Vr>
ri-^iy
drink, (^aIDjQD
my
throne
from IffljQD
is
an exception).
\a
,
Here belong
all
having
which
with a suffix
is
as follows
^;Sd
y*^
oi;iD
X^,
.ooi;iD, etc.
having a vowel
is
followed
e.g.
Kyi 01
reflection^
;;, ;
13'/
suflf.
.-k-iO^
;
^0\^*
^11*ao
stand for
The same
suff.
11 for la
e. g.
iViQ^ with
etc.,
plur. .^f^ao,
But
1-i
,
does not
as in
pxD
;
takes Lin.
-x
and 2 and 3
other
suff.,
pkir.
e. g.
*apxo
^QDp.0
suff.,
etc.
In
the
1 is
e. g.
and in the
phir.
with
the
vowel of
;
^pj2D
etc.
form
e. g.
a)
suff. 1 sing,
forms a crasis
passes into
oi,
an\So
In the
masc, however,
wk.
e. g.
wtOionW)
(also -a01Q-
= Germ, au (Engl,
p. 160,
nearly)^
according to Lucl.
de Dieu^
Amira)
and
in the 3 fern.
e. g.
OiinVn
suff.
( 16. B).
form ending
wi-a
e. g. ^^^-^yi
with
y\ *^v<
^ 07
\i
;
-nOiQa.^..*
"
So
..-7
also in the
emphatic ending
#7
,
V,
with
M-
e.g.
;7*^^y((
;
Also plurals with J^- e.g. m^, with suff. %,i ,\ l and and those plurals which, with the suffix of 1 sing.,
from the
e.g,
^^j,
differ
;
sing,
suff.
w4*^
''
plur.
emphat. J-^AmlsD
with
suff.
"
my
drinks.
Rem.
e.g.
Illwith
oul
j^ll*
p.
Only
jjij]
takes
the
suff.
plur.
e.g.
,-itG1QAJ(*
Amira
138
Rem.
2.
formed
anomalously.
The
e.
first
of the 1 sing.,
;
change
Final
(
into
m.7
,
g.
wk.2|*
is
The
7
,
last
takes
e.g.
^aSOh.
,
changed into Q;
etc.
e.
g.
^QOf
.a^QO|
7
,
-X
wuoiool
2.
aiaa] ^qo(
In Feminines
a)
is
attached
to the
ing
e.g.
The
suffixes of the 1
e. g.
^l \n^^ from
Rem.
P
1;^i>j
From
7
|Z^
is
found
of the
;
OOlZ^*
1
suff.
^7
(p.
sing.,_
first
e.
g.
^Z;2 *
be pronounced,
if
e. g.
suff.
.obAl^^,
IZpl with
%a2rl
Amira
,
asserts
190)
etc.
b)
e.
g.
^l^oLci s/l^oLci
Rem.
etc.
In
;
numbers
and
( 50. 2),
plur.
it
should be
sing,
suffixes,
forming
last,
demonstrative
those
pronouns
twOy
e.g.
OlZ;rQl
his ten,
^OCLkJL
those two,
^GLkLJL.
tOGLkA^Z
those three.
, , ;
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
47. Declension of Nouns in Oeneral.
139
Nouns are varied in respect to inflection (44.46) according to their form, either with or without any vowel changes. Thus they are divided into two principal classes, viz. those with immutable and with mutable vowels. The latter class, on account of its diversities, may be arranged under several paradigms, and together with the former class, takes the place of the declensions of the western languages (comp. 48).
;
48.
to
Declension.
A. Masculines.
Decl.
X I.
This includes
more
-X
all
those having
p
,
immutable vow-X
els
(jb,
Q, Q,)
j^d^^J^
lean,
latter class
is
either
P
a close one
e. g.
e.
g.
^Q^V* herbage,
or such as
7
(gentile
nouns with ^_
^'rf-^ Nazarite),
if
tlie
;
syllable,
(=
Dagh. forte)
*^^i thief
Avith
Rem.
which
first
7
Here
the
^
also
g. X
in the plural,
radical letter,
of
two
,^>
17
state,
doubled
letters
with
^
Lin.
occult.
_
e.
-X
^Q^nation, plur.
Q and ^
belong to
7
;
and
in the
emphat.
which change
X
and
'^
.
into
segholate forms(Decl.IV);
eye,
e.g.
pOQa
^.i^
emphat.
state
X
* P |l
iS
as
circumstances
Q
i
is
transposed
e.
g.
v0pO
holiness,
emphat. state
pi)QD* In
J^
ai
falls
;
kid,
and
CLi);2) 2^<^radise,
away
in the
state
and
,
with
_z. preceding,
forms
e. g.
emphat.
|V)i\\
etc.
140
DECLEXSIOX OF NOUN'S.
with _1 and JL, which have
or
two consonants
e.g.
^Q name^
mixed one
;
two
syllables, of
which
as in
W^oVn
(part. pass.
Aph.),
>K
^iiV) mighty
e.g.
;
or
whose middle
;a . sparroiu
;
radical
must be
doubled
table
po
e.g.
talent ;
or has an
immu-
vowel
iaSl eternity
; jcfico loitness ;
^J-^-yi wheel.
final
suff.
syllable fallsaway,
and 8
plur.
e. g.
emphat. state
]^\s
with
suff.
OlSoll
Rem.
etc.
Here belongs
also
plur.,_-ipil,
Forms
Hke tn,V)
syllable with
and
(M^^Lb belong
first
here,
over
the
radical letter in
e. g.
|mCO^
*
(see
7
15.
4).
The following
etc.
are examples
%mJ^
morning^
>.,>A<y^Vn
opening,
]'l I
From ,^iVV>
emphat. state
SV)
plur. I'Li'sV)^
Dcd. HI. To
this
consonant,
viz.
in
participles Ethpe.
e.
g.
all
(see Gesen.
568
sq).
Such
for the
labic nouns which begin with a vacant consonant, and have for their characteristic vowel _L or _!, which appears first
first radical.
its
In
this
form the
formations.
They
may
as in
" of verbs
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
141
A) To
phat. state
the
;
first class
state ]:3i\ So
\2^D hooh^
;
child^
em-
1,JLi
with
oioIld
^C5\\Sin>
^^^
To
Hholem
in
emphat.
state
2.
(comp. 15.
pioo
emphat. state
also
state (JlO.
Here belong
and Ql
lose
or
or Q
In con;
e.g..
JL
emphat. state
I^Qaa
(AaQ
emphat. |Aj-Q).
Rem.
The
viz.
;mo flesh,
\^S^
side,
sea,
i^j^
counsel,
[^
etc.
1 1
|j2iD|
Some
;
_;;_
e.g.
etc.
is
considered as a guttural
when
end of
pd^
,
^|LQ^,
plur.
and
in the
a()Z
also
^^l^ )
fi'oni
Bed.
Y.
participles
I, ^
and
infinitives) of Yerbs
ending in
that
1 is
and w-_
changed into ^^
movable
as well as
emphat. state sing, and before the suffixes with the union
.
with
suff.
OLiJi
f
. But
before the
suff.
quiesces in
142
DECLENSION OF XOUNS.
e. g.
.00UJiy.
The same
Kem.
1)
is
which
]
;
ends with
^^aJ^..*
( 44.
e.g.
The
emphatic
state
ending
i.i^*
In
should be remarked
state,
if it
;
in the emphatic
e. g.
be
a monosyllable
]I.^..
e. g.
from
p.. revealed.
the preceding
"pVwJk)
from
|V**iD, pt!liASD
A.
mute likewise
e.g.
(inn from
"^^
and
e.
wine.
jk. (part.
pass, of Pa.
;
Aph.
]
>
g.
xmVn from
^iNffiV) abandoned ;
;
e. g.
|iNmV>
ending with from ]Q2*
Rem.
with
(_ we
find forms
>
I
e.
g.
f-*^*^ (Matt.
vi.
4)
Here belongs
V^ from
act. differs
by being
form of feminines
of
dexjl.
IV.,
and
is
changed into
e.g.
^j^'
constr.
i\>
emphat.
hA)
Jl)
From
|fiD9Q2 throne.
and
into
.*.,
.i
^P
17
P^^i^"-
emphat.
!m->^j
!m-vj^
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
B. Feminines.
143
Bed. I. This includes all the Feminines ending with (which have an immutable vowel in the penult syllable. In this case the penult syllable has either a vowel with a letter
quiescing in
it
;
e. g.
is
a derivative
of Yerbs ^, in which case in the plural, the first of the duplicate radicals reappears, and takes Linea occultans
;
from
ml
^^^So*
The
sulf.
of the l.sing.
;
is
appended
-iA^oAf3 out the union vowel The suff. in other e. g. persons is joined with the form of the emphat. state e. g.
;
^'t^ot^
Rem.
from
etc.
(comp. 46.
2).
From |ijiZqO
ivaistcoat,
1 1
iZqD
as if
l^luZoO
or .-iJ-*ZqD
final (j
c^7^/,
take Linea
occult, in the
|AjLji,1o
;
e.g.
fl^^^
p^j^f
emphat. state
or J falls entirely
away
as in
another^
emphatic
state
|Z^|
11.
Bed.
Here belong
all
nouns
fern,
whose
final syllable
begins with two consonants. They have the peculiarity, ^hat between these two consonants, in the emphat. sing.,
or
This vowel is determined by the vowel is inserted. belonging to corresponding masculine terminations e. g.
;
^^^isDj]
masc),
emphat.
state
;
AVvn ;^
before guttu-
e.g. \^\2i foivl^ emphat. state \L^\Zi^ nants in the emphat. In the reception of suffixes this declension agrees with deck
e. g.
Rem.
too
Some
III.
e. g.
So
l^i^'Z wonder^
|j!*jQZ love.
Bed.
the
first
syllable
moved
144
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
e. g.
flyjJL
Nouns
of this
taking a
sufF.
in the sing.,
decl. I.
several
;
emphatic
g.
forms.
Thus
|AO)l*
terror
\0'i\ cdms^
e.
|Ao>l
|AO)l
pi^>
offering^
(AOIO
|*^m
looman,
(Jjs) fictr,
etc.
The
:
l^^yi
brick.
vine^
\tf^
fern,
for
|Al^\
from |1*^N
Bed
ing in
and
(0
It
them
that the
retained,
and
;
m and Q
e. g.
(
in
in
and
first
Aa-kjO
\/n^
>
from
lou-j^ animal.
of the
(jii^
syllable falls
away
e. g.
girl,
masc).
But
and
a.
e.
g. A.imo
Zqj-kj
A-iA^
plur.,
^1 Mpf
Rem.
etc.
Here belongs
^a.
,
and Aph.
but
masc, with
takes
.7
instead
of
in
;
the
e.
emphat.
g.
state.
With
this
1".
vowel
#7
7
t>N.i V)
Decl. V.
To
this
ending with
Q and
;
u.
e. g.
crea-
Also
dissyllabic
ANOMALOUS NOUNS.
vowels in the penult syllable
;
145
ujoZ thanks^
e.g.
qD]
victory^
whose O and
plur.
w* qniesce,
*ji
But
in the
where o and
take
are movable,
some nouns
letter
;
(derivatives
of Pa.)
after the
,
second radical
,
e.g.
Q^
entreaty^ plur.
.Q^
Zoji^.
|Zq^
2 belong
here,
which
Q with
the falling
away of Z;
e.g.
D^ offering,
#0^1,
Zo^, 1Zq^
ZqLdj, |ZqSoj;
e. g.
aAio
5?oi^,
Rem.
^
The same
_
peculiarity of taking a
7
new vowel
s^e^/),
is
found also
7
^O
,
-n
lOjiO
etc.
if
(aOl
plur.
.OOJ and
So
also in
\^0 a hundred,
P
plur.
(ZopD
P
as
from
Q1JI
|j
;
and OpD
e. g.
P
Q-i\^ 2^^^^^^^^''^^
^
ir\
-X
^P
plur.
^Oy^j^
,
OjOlQD
,
plur.
,
|Zo>GlD,
others.
and even
onW)
onNV)
besides
O'^W)
and some
49.
Anomalous Nouns.
Some nouns
paradigms
( 47, 48).
This
arises either
form conforming
less closely to
146
PARADIGMS OF NOUNS.
MASCULINES.
Plural.
emphat.
constr.
absol.
I p\r
Singular.
emphat.
constr.
absol.
(oiof
*jC7ii:i|
^oic^l
^oiof
\L'i
.^V
7
-^T
Father,
(Zoi^f
Zoio]
..
^iio
..X
p
l-o
fli
5on.
To
K
r^.n
A^o
7>
]^9
I'ZaiSoft
ioiio*
p
i2o,7r
zo,7r
"7 ,^y
]ur
i'zr
FEMININES.
Aiib
P
..*7
rA>i
_
Ak)V
Al)0l
..^^Daughter.
Sister.
PD] Maiden.
7
.V
^.. I
i^7
IAsdI'
Zq1>V
2p
..
-ft
l^ol
VAl
p ..
-^
V^o]
People,
AiA
|ZQ21D
ikP.
.QiJCD
p
-x
l^sui
Idoj
Ztp.
P/ace.
-x
|A^0)
Ali)0)
148
NOCJNS
T\^ITH
SUFFIXES.
Paradigms of Nouns
A. Masculine Nouns.
Singular.
Stat, absol.
Decl.
ft
II.
Decl. TV.
Decl. V.
90120
Witness.
-ffzw^.
^oy.
Drink.
Suflf.Sing. 1 c.
i-i)Gl0
P
2 m. 2 3
3
f.
Y^>
)au]o
*jlO)01D
OljOlflO
m.
f.
oin\V)
olLL^
ouAaIo ouAaIo
OlJOlCD
r)C710
oinSV)
6l^^
Suflf.plur. 1 c.
2 m.
.QOJOlflD
,-a)>012D
f.
3 m. ^OOljOlCD
3f.
_.! 01)0120
^6oin\^ ^oialk)
.x
5',
*v
(To
.
of the forms
V^
i\(^ and
^
>
46.
1. a).
^,
Plural.
SufF.sing. 1 c.
^JOIQO
7
P
^)01CD
7
2 2
m.
f.
^)OlfiO
^ija-ijoicb
7
,
i^inNV)
7 7
3 m.aO10>Ol0 3
f.
%u010nW)
oi>n\v>
v^oiq!i4
^oiq1X^
ouioicD
OL1X4
ouJi.^
Suff.plm-. 1 c.
^joim
X
~in\V)
.
2 m. tO^ji^OlCD
N-ny
^-^
f.
-jLlLklOlTD
^>^>'^\^^
.001
1
77
3 m..OOUjOlD
3
f.
n\V)
^OOLiJ^
^^OUJOICD
^-jOIi^W)
^O
l i
^i
\^ ^Oli >\^
^001
i I
149
with Suffixes,
B.
Feminine Nouns.
Decl. IV.
Comp.
49.
Table.
Decl.
1.
Decl V.
]]oAo
Son.
?>
Father
Maiden.
Petition.
-or
X
-Alii
^7
^7
..7
oii\LbZo
7
Ol
di'Zo^.
X
-n
.7
.H?
-X
^qdA114
^
X
1\
->
.qoZqI .
-X
^7
7
^aH^
Ao ^ooiAIX^ ^ooiZolk. .-aCTiASoAr:^ ^GlAlL^ ^oiZqL*
.
-X
-n
-n
.001 Q^ I ^ T
-X -x
OCT! Alio
^oAa
Flood
^
^li4
#7
Waters.
..
wiASoAiD
j^ASoAo
^j^'ASoAo
^cnoio
'tLKi
^^a1!i4
-^
P t
7^^
oiASoAri
oi'AlLoAs
ctTaH.^
oiZo^.
aiZoj^.
oilk)
ctAH^
.QoAiX^
^ooiAlL^
j>'S>
.^oAo
oa^^
V^
9>
.qoASo^A^
^-xoAlLoAo
.obZoii^
-X
.. y
.ooiAloAo
7^
.ooiZoS^
^oiZoji-
OGLii^O,
tOCTii i^T)
r>
-x
150
and Numerals.
Adjectives being derivatives of verbs (see 40. and tables) and having the same form as nouns^ are inflected according to the same laws (see 44, 45, 48). In respect to
1.
41. 2.
The Syriac
superlative.
has no special forms for the comparative and For the manner in which these are expressed, see
Syntax 77.
either cardinal or ordinal. In the former we should notice the peculiarity, that masculines from 3 to but feminines, on 10, as in Hebrew, have feminine endings the contrary, have masculine endings. From 20 to 100 there is only one form for both genders.
2.
;
Numerals are
A.RDIN ALS.
Fem.
1.
Masc.
r^
^tii
til
Xtll
A.'
Xt^
1"
^
6. 7.
2.
^o*
liioZ
3. 4. 5.
11l<:)Z
8.
MiiV
]ioir
^l
\mL
K.r
with
9.
10.
suffixes,
Rem.
Upon
2. b.
see 46.
Rem.
The
by
30,
the plural of
^^ i
e.
g. 70,
^SLl
sn>f
40,
V) > 50,
^A
60,
^i\n9
The
the
or
common gender. Itb signifies 100, ^^ti) 200, 1]SdAL2 12o]!iD A^Z 300, etc., with the preceding unit in the fem*2il^
signifies
1
imne.
phat.
lalS.
plur.
^^i^\s.
|alL )
^j^!L ^>Z
significfl
151
2000, ^i'^^ TA!^Z 3000. etc. (with the preceding unit in the masculine). The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19 are formed by the union of units with 10 in one word, in the following
manner
Fern.
Masc.
Fern.
Masc.
T^li'l
,QiMZ
-MU
*,aiAlZ
7
12.
18.
1
-^22^
,msn
^ ^
7
!
iy.
^mv'^i
7
P
7?
15.
1'^"
tfnsaV>M
V 7 V/h mvA>vr>.>
....
I
.y, jcqiaZ
;msZ
7,
19.
The intermediate numbers from 21 to 29, 31 to 89, etc., are formed by the numeral representing the number of tens, followed by the numeral under ten preceded by o e. g.
;
lA^Zo
the
^A^Z
masc. 33,
;
^mlOjaO
^A*
fem. 65.
Sometimes
number
liio
3.
precede e. g. ^;Q10 ]Ldh\ 24, etc. So if the of numerical words combined be large, the greater numerals are always placed before the smaller e. g.
units
;
masc,
]A^-
and inserting
the first^
a particular
differing
somewhat
Foi before the ultimate radical. used, and for the second^ a form from the form of the cardinal for 2.
word
is
ORDINALS.
Fem.
VAjlLd^^
(A.iJLk)Z
Masc.
Fem.
the first.
Masc.
l^rJ^
l^U^u^
|
X^L^Ea
iSiOft
XLk'LkS.l
|A><>*-^%
X^k^l
(^S,n?
the third.
the fourth.
;/^6
l2ulaii)Z
)li^Z
]l{iifrS
\LLL^JtL |aSiZ
nm.'A.
(7l..<^>> ]'>,a,Vn>i
//^A.
liLfimS
the tenth
152
PARTICLES
ADVERBS.
Hebrew,
i >;rftv
f
The
either
by
cardinal
fem.
are
e. g.
l^l^Ai^Z,
<^r^;
I
^
etc.
The
units
put after
e. g.
]^A^Z
formed
.>
preceding
e. g.
jA.,fr>k^
Sometimes the ordinal 10 is united with a cardinal number and the word is preceded by j e.g.
masc.
7
7
,
,'^jy
,
,Cllr>*?
\aiLylJ
etc.
Rem.
by a feminine form
letter
;
after
the
etc.
first
radical
e.g.
lA^oZ
]loo>
Upon
the
CHAPTEK FOUETH.
PARTICLES.
Particles belong adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions In respect to their origin they may be considered as primitive, derivative, or transferred from other The last are by far the most numerous. parts of speech.
To
and
interjections.
51.
Adverbs.
1.
The
|j
,
following
may
_1
so,
Q^
not,
^^Z
]b
here.
2.
characteristic endings
PREPOSITIONS.
Alk)f) at first, ZqIojZ again, Li!\gi!^
Aji|;iQl Hehraically, (liDQji today.
153
godly,
Aa'rj^l at last,
Aj|;a^
8.
5/io?'^,
As
transferred from
:
considered those
a)
from substantives
with a preposition
fil^l^
j3)
e.
g.
(Z>k:) finally,
,
p;a2
^
^r2</?/,
o?2ce,
^h^
,
inwardly^
\^
Knin-trmpdiaiphj
ui^>^Sd aneiv ;
without a preposition;
^^JD wholly,
en-
e. g.
'^*^ (want)
not,
foVeZy,
h)
from
adjectives,
g.
o?zce,
^Om\,
as the
0>Ao
o?2^?/,
r*A^l
,
ir*^l
CLlk)
i^'/^y
.^
c)
%^6L again ;
adverbs
or participles ,^mV)\
are
transferred
|xaXtf<ra,
^<^vk^
;
Vo
almost.
Rem.
Some
ixaXXov,
is
:
e.
g.
.oWV)
guage
lowing
.uAIdIj
^m>\V)
in
\^
The Syriac
Such are the
lanfol-
especially rich
-compound adverbs.
P^A
wherefore?
(J
liOA ^^^
to he
all,
l^''W ^
1*^
may
^^<5^^')
H^ A 1*01^
etc.
Among compound
Aa.L not
(see
adverbs
38).
also be placed
the circumlocutory
is
The simple
of
interrogation
7
:
either not
expressed at
or
by the addition
,
->JD
tion, is expressed
by p
and (ai P*
The
wi*)
prefixed
to pronouns
e.
g.
pZU |
Lo
whence
(la |
who
52. Prepositions.
1.
To
y (gen.),
noun
the original Prepositions belong the prefixes *Q (dat. and ace.) which are always joined with a or pronoun, and are vacant when the noun or pronoun
^\vr>\ begins with a regular consonant e. g. JjQaid Prefix prepositions take the vowel, which is usually _L, when
; .
,
154
PREPOSITIONS.
]vn*^ the following consonant is vacant e. g. or when the vowel falls back from the quiescents
;
^
)>V^^
]
or 01;
e.g.
]]^o from
l]So for
] ]Lo
wiIdooi^
1,
for
,
>^ A^^,
or oil
the vowels, in
which these
prefix
li> I
,
letters
qniesce, fall
,
e. g.
"jlj^s
^jIjo^
and
1r]J
l.iNiK joiiS
,
from
etc.
Rem.
Before
and
|A
6,
^As, these
prepositions take
pro-
and _ftAAl
In
falls
>\oaD
y>rOQ^
which
>0>ao
2.
* which
B.
c.
e.g.
^^^J^Oq\
in
except
when
suffixes are
original
form reappears
tions
e.g.
01Aa on\
etc.
Among
may
to.
also
^Ql
Zq21^
6y,
2q1
2.
Most of the other prepositions are considered as transferred from other parts of speech a) substantives in the
;
constr.state
e. g.
^^O
ir**
be/ore,
tPOy
instead, *'^\nfor^
.^
.^
and Al in between,
^k? (fromAllD
prefixes
before
;
;
^^^ *^>r^
about,
;
jjari)
from,
>Aq
after
to,
substantives with
e.g.
c)
>AcDlQ according
;
^^ss^ocl^ against,
compounds
e. g.
-^
I^A
'^'-ritil
to,
,^^*^ IsD without, Jjjsj ^Ld around, about, Vi^ClOO^ _S^ against, 3. Several of the prepositions seem to have been originally plural nouns, on which account they are united with
plural
suffixes.
.p
over,
gainst, ^SL^t^for,
^^^
y^
. O
^O
.
after ^ a2.
before,
C.
^ takes
the vowel
with
quiescing in
as ]^
is
not a
Tr.
155
16. II. C.
and 52
).
A.
With
B.
Of the Plur.
>
Masc.
Fern.
2q1
in.
io.
after.
against.
over,
on oxcount
of.
Sing.
1
C.
wfc.
2 m.
y^
26^
Plur.
1
c.
^2q1
^Ao
y,
^-Soonl
to
.-x
^i\s
A!i4k5
f.
3
3
Rem.
The following
^\lL
except.
take no
suffixes
La^
in,
;^\
until
ivithout,
to,
Q.i^
within,
oi^er,
AjaAi^ under,
\^t^
and
^ID ^^^
166
Conjunctions
and
Interjections.
1.
The
j tliat^
lience^
Aif^^
as^ since^
o\ or^ *jk^
51. 3.
Kem.)
namely.
^J
lest.
Rem.
O and
like
^ and
2.
Compound
tlo ^]o
Conjunctions are
a)
with
^1
e. g.
Q-L
if,
but^
^\
it ;
although^
^j
;
'
ooul and
lest,
^rA
if
he
b)
with
e.g. IJj
?
especially
after prepositions
because, >
e. g.
e. g, >
^]
as, j ^^:^-4^
^^
^^^ ? *^^-
;
_!^
lest,
liSOA until ;
c)
^^aSOI
7
he7ice,
m i^V)
?2oii;,
there/ore,
(J
(
Jii^
although.
-^
From
3.
e.
g.
oj
^0(
^o
i/
luo I
(01 behold !
^OU
I
7e?/
Aa
/
;
They
e.g.
are sometimes
,
%SoA(
%jtQ^
o^*^*^
I 'pray you
PART THIRD.
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER
FIRST.
THE PRONOUN.
^ 54.
Use of
the Sepo.rable
These pronouns
at the
beginning of a sentencp,denote
relation
e.
is
not only
that of the
Aj|
.
nominative absolute
piiD ij
iv. 20.,
g.
Rom.
xiv. 10.
tliou thy
^Q>j|J
(>
Aj|
hut thou,
15.,
why
judgest
iv.
brother !
it
Eph.
Acts xix.
;
II Tim.
5
;
but
e.g. a)
may be
7
9
also represented
;
h)
iii.
by
11.
by the
genitive
e.g.
Matt.
n\oV)^
to
V^l -
1^* V? O^n
,
I am.
/^ )
not luorthy
unloose,
e. g.
John
xix.
ii.
Ephes.
vi.
20
by the
dative
Kirsh.
2.
*AJ|
7)
to
me,
Luke xxni.41
^oAj|>
by the accusative
Kirsh.iv.7.-9.
^i\n
pD 001
find in
OiAt]
the
lohat
time^
you
seek to
find in
not.
the night,
I seeh
to
day
and find
it
158
Rem.
THE PROxoux.
They
I
are
also
emphatic
after the
verb;
?
e.g.
Luke
iii.
14.
> <
|
Ijsj
^2)
,*^M plD
we do
Upon
^QJf and
table.
as accusatives,
comp. 16.
Rem.
1.
2.
mark
a) of the substantive
is true-^
verb looi
(see 38);
is
in the desert
pjOl
e. g.
he
is
here
h)
of the finite
tS\
verb with
its
\i\
'^'\
I say^
r^
of the
Rem.
see 12.
1.
B).
The contraction
is
found in the
It is
pers. plur.
e. g.
la;iD
*.
ive
read
1 i
also
g.
Eph.
iii.
13.
Of
;
ii-^M*
T beseech
3.
iii.
11 (comp. 20.and37.E).
a) the
person
may be
e, g.
John
i.
20.
PI PI
/ o.m
;
xiv. 20.
lOAj | .i^
oAj
ye are in
is
me
Matt,
xxvi. 73
placed bexxvii. 4;
tween
e.g.
Matt.
;
iii.
11. fj(
;
^^Ik)
\l\
baptize;
John
h) the
xiii.
13
Barh. 68, 16
105, 14
148, 15.
may be
;
contained
both
4.
subject
t;-^*
e.
g.
Gen.
?
xxix.
^1t
^Ld
fO^I
I.
pV>M
;
whence are ye
we are from
Haran
c
the
)
Assem.
83
12. 13.
,
as substantive verb,
may
follow
8.
tf
and 2 person
001 pI
as
;
subject
e.
g.
f
;
Acts
xxii.
^Q.mjk
I am
Jesus
;
Luke
xxii. 67.
Messiah
214. E;
PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES.
pers. as subject
;
159
e. g.
Matt. v. 13.
I.
ye
of the earth;
Cor.
iii.
Barh. 183.
1.
Rp:m.
of the N.T.
^^OloZuf
B.
|j(
lQm\ ^Q2uAji1
.oAj]?/*? are.
Suffixes
1.
The pronominal
;
tive
rarely,
and
for
e. g.
.-i-jA^ou for
v^ Aoou
thou
hast given to one. Rem. This imitation of the Heb. is neglected in passages of the e. g. Zach. vii. 5. comp. with Ephr. II. 296. B. and Isa. xxiv. O. T. comp. with II. 65. C. 4,
2.
the
nomen rectum or
wi-OAo>
jSo
thy
embroidered
;
garments,
literally
of
thine embroidery
or ornament
15
Matt. vi. 11. ^mJQCDj |V)N our necessary bread, literally of our need. Rem. The suffix is seldom found with the nomen regens ; e.g. Ez.
^p
-x
"
*.
-x^
xvi. 27.
nection with
f1 i
p i V)>
the right,
and pSOfiO
7.
Sometimes
>^;D,\
e.g.
Ephr.
I.
204. B. and C.
^;^QO
a suffix
stands before an
1.
adjective
connected with
good
e. g.
Ps. Ixxxvii.
(a^i^ OIjQ^^
m /m Ao??/ mountain'',
his
4.
e. g.
Ez.
vi. 9;
Epbr.
I.
284.
A. \cl^ Oii.oj
treasure.
The
suffix to tbe
noun
is
Exod. XX.
^?^
20.
OTAl^K^jyear before
him
I Cor.
10.
xi. 25.
jlJ^OjA
Rem.
B)
;
me
Jobn xv.
C\CiO^
sufF. (
;
Possessives
Barh. 49.
7.
by ^\aj with
16.
e. g.
Gu^)
|Ja.MJiu) his
commander
146, 10.
160
This manner of expression is used particularly when a stronger emphasis is required than is indicated by the mere suflBx e. g. Matt.
;
vi.
13.
i>
thine is the
kingdom
Barh. 146,
1.
to the
;m.O) ^~^? |AOj JLpl our great church in Haran. If the suff. noun be also repe'ated, it indicates (emphatically) the Greek
Sjuio^
;
possessives
gfjiov
Co^,
&c.
xv. 9
e.
;
g.
John
3.7.
;
iv.
/3^wjxa
vii.
Rom.
17
in
ii.
prepositions
e. g.
II Cor. v. 19.
^-^>
e.g.
John
^^
7
2,
Matt.
xxvii. 4.
^ pD ^>
2.
r/ itfog
John
xxi. 22.
Rem.
for the
of the
suff.
in ^;iO
,
J^,
^^11, j^^^l
the
16.
^^r^i^j^or
the pronoun
to
first
person,
when
xliv.
discourse
is
addressed
7
*x
superiors
e.
g.
Genesis
^;V)
N !^H
M^
to thee
{my
lord) ?
St)
^,*^s\
ii'i
verse 32.
kings
use
in
is
]n\V)
{my)
e.
g.
Esth.
viii. 8.
]'^\V)>
in
]Snn QOo'Ao
to
the
e.
hinges
name ;
v. 1.
;
and
reference
God,
<7T,-Ss
used
g.
Gen.
Also
e.
second
he calls
g.
Mark
differs
xii.
37.
7
t^^lO
,
CTL^
\\0
him
the
his
from
^pD
mer
is
common form
e.
marks the
New
Testament
g.
Acts
Rom.
xiv. 8.
be considered as an imitation of a Hebrew idiom, when the suffix relates to a noun which does not occur till later in the discourse (comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 739) or when the noun itself is repeated instead of the pronoun e.g. Gen. xvi. 16.
Rem.
3.
It is rather to
55. Pleonastic
Use of Pronouns.
Here belongs
(comp, 12.
sing,
1.
tlie
pronoun of the
third,
all
is
person ooi
(Ol)
persons of the
is
and
plur.,
by which an emphasis
denoted, which
still
It is
found
in such
161
John
viii.
26.
I
;
xv. 16
Kom.
as
iii.
31
to
be considered merely
ooi ^^m|J
;
pleonastic
in
Luke
vii. 19.
^i .'^rr\^^
;
o(
or shall we wait for a,nother ? Eom, xiv. 8 Heb. xiii. 22 I Tim. i.4; v. 9; Barli. 133, 3 Assem. I. 221,A.5, especially where it occurs with a feminine noun e. g. Kom. iii. 28.
;
;
fai;n *)j>11d
is
X
OCJl
IZqiSOaOIO hy faith
;
is
man justified,
Ephr.
I.
001
e. g.
214, D.
-X
..
-n
"^
tOOUJ^O
children.
OOI
tOOl.*.jfcJ
Z\\\0 on account of
%J
his ivives
and
Rem.
found
;
Sometimes
e.
also
the
fem.
vaOI
(still
more emphatic),
X
is
g.
(it)
Rev.
xxi. 2.
A^fja __
I'Aaj^ ^Ol
and the
-X
lAla^kiilo
tOJOl Assem.I.
>
and I saw
plur.
emphasis
3.
e.g.
John
;
v.9. ^SoQji
e.g.
this
day
..7
Barh.148,
'^
>
_ft
Matt.
iii.
1.
tOJOl
JAiOO>n
^5
lO^^^
but in these days. The pleonastic use of OOI is confirmed from the fact that the Philoxenian version omits it altogether.
B.
1.
Suffixes.
The
suffix is often
when
^
;
as
follows;
shall bless
Matt.
i.
21.
OlV>sN %jiOiaa^
verse 24;
ii.
;-il..
ooi /or he
xiv. 47.
{it
his people
6,
11
Mark
Without
thy
talent
1.
^
;
in
cnLt.M^
with
I buried
Rem.
The
after verbs
;
e.g.
Gen.
^i yo
Luke
OlS \AU}
John
xi.31; iv.3.
^oZ Ol^
he went out
186,A.30. ]iV)?]
L^^\
he had gone
162
to the
Eplir.
I.
226, B.
(^QJiO
Ol^ ^) Moses
the
stood
up
2.
;
kingdom of
(^
heaven
near
same
e.
is
true
frequently,
14.
;
after
AolO
=
7
to
life) ;
g.
John
xi.
dead
Mark
ix.
26
Assem.I. 367, 9
sometimes
e. g.
'^aSO
John
i.
xi.
31
,.^1
to
lAii to be
foolish,
Rom.
22
and even
after
fOOl John
i.
15.
falls
Rem. 2. On the contrary, the sufRx in active verbs, sometimes, away when it can either be easily supplied from the context, or the same object has already preceded e. g. Barh. 424. 9.
;
IfoiO
p-ij
[it)
Vn^
JZlp[ he
brought
out
up
before
him
particularly the
neuter; e. g. Gen. xxiv. 49. w.JO(Qaa inform me thereof In many verbs following each other the suffix which is to be repeated falls away e.g. Matt. xiv. 19 I Cor. xi. 23, 24. Where two follow each other the suffix is usually added to the latter verb e.g. Barh. 419,5.
;
;
7X77
71^
esteem
and honor
it.
The
suffix
is
nomen
iii.
regens
18.
which
with
e. g.
John
otSdaS
in the
name of the
;
^QJu>
I.
w01Q-^.i j
the feet
of Jesus
verse 31
also
1)
Acts
the
after
v.
Ephr.
of
87, B.
suff.
Rem.
^\^J
it;
Here
Matt.
belongs
repetition
the
before
( 54. B. 4.
Rem.
and
V.O
the
all,
without J following
ii.
e.g.
xiii. 2.
\mXD OIjO
whole multitude;
3,
\bX^^ ^(Jl^
noun
;
all cities.
e.g.
Barh. 71,6.
-
Ol^O
"
f
* ^
pQl
but
-x
.
Matt.
vi.
33.
^Ol^O
iNoi
e.
Without the
iJSD every
3.
suffix
^\0
g. Matt. iv. 4.
v^
word ; Acts
is
attached to prepositions
is
thus
> is
PERSONAL PKONOUNS.
considered either as a sign of the pfenitive
relative
the
;
168
( 52. 2)
or as a
to {it)
e. g.
I
i.
Tim.
i.
8.
law
John
V.
{him) Jesus
;
xviii. 15;
jfj^
Rev.
11
lo^ Luke
{it)
xxiii. 7
'|i\a4jaj
xiii.6
;
01^1^4^ for
sin
^
;
^Ld
iii.
Rom.
;
Acts
viii. 8.
Rom.
tJie
tyrant;
^CLL 76, ll
io^ Luke
is
{it) the.
v.
19
h)
e. g.
Luke
1,
IjZIo aiQ in
;
Assem.l. 27,
to
{it
29; Ephr.L87,B
feast;
John
35
;
2.
yZoAV)\ dlS
ix. 21, etc.
to) the
^So Acts
viii.
^^
Acts
General
In Syriac, we
of number in La]
e.g.
Barh. 166,
6.
Ir^s
(^flCliiO
among
twenty
is
women and
;
ten children
used
e.g.
Luke
is
xxiii. 45.
U>2
J^zP(
^li^O
the vail
of
in twain.
The same
e. g.
Hebrews
xi. 26.
^9 J^)
;
diA^aro
;
Egypt ; Barh.
9,
108, 2
h) of gender
e. g.
10.
^OUD
VZoiZV^OCJlLo ad
if
places
colleccities,,
in these
by
tives
men
or inhabitants
O'r^?
e.g.
IZqajI awji|
they
1Zq\u^
U'o/nl
many men,
580,
and
1,
lOOl^
^|o
(Z(j.^
they
5,
found a great
captivity
;
these
also
led
;
into
fAia^D 591,
w^cL-^Vl50,
11, 12..
164
56.
1.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Use of the Relative Pronoun ( 17.
>
2).
The Relative
etc.,
time,
a relative signification;
til where f
j
^
P-i|
^Aere, w;/ere,
John
;
i.
28.
-J^Oa looi
;
,V^SLo>
;
p^j
there
where
]iu]i
f/o/m baptized
thither,
verse 40
Barh.82,2
xiii.
1a.i]] ivhither ? }
]^Xi
ivhiihei'
/go
Barh. 198, 18
just
>
a.^:
Assem.I. 27;
iii.
]x:L'(
how
Uif
e. g.
John
14
v.
26
xiii.
33
^Z\SDJ ivhen ?
*aASD| wheiij as
;
7
; e.
g. v. 25.
>
hear
7
]Sn3 Aoz^
P
much?
^ioo 5o
g.
John
vi. 11.
QUi .J
p^O
iii.
as
much as
they would.
J
;
gives the
j
same meanwhere;
e.g.
jZf
John
2.
8.
are formed by some mark of the suffix a ) the genitive is indicated by added to the nomen r eg ens ; e. g. John ix. 11.
cases
;
^QAa
p|
*.
OlSosj whose name is Jesus ; Assem.I. 165, A. 14; the dative, according to the following example Rom. i.
;
h)
9.
ftV)ftV)
;
01^ J
^f;/^o?7^
I serve ;
verse 31
^-"-^r*
c)
the accusative,
thus
e. g.
John
i.
26.
01^ .oAj]
is
know
not.
The
accusative
;
also
e. g. iii.84.
God hath
IS
d) the ablative
by J^
e.g.
John
is
^^
e.g. 5>Q1,
God,
etc.
Rem.
to the verb,
preceding
like
subject of the
cases
ivho, /,
whom^ me,
\l\ ]j1
g.
Gen.
xlv. 4.
;
*jJJoAio1j ..arDQu
I am
(Ephr.
Joseph
whom
Num.
xxii.
30
Isa. xli. 8
11.88. Y.)
j^A^Ijaj
whom
(thee)
I have
KELATIVE PRONOUNS.
made
strong.
165
;
witli prepositions.
e.
g.
Num.
xxii.
The
relative alone
the neuter;
lative is
e. g. Gen. i. 31. r^^} \^ all that he made, The re sometimes used before' the mark of the case e.g. Barh. 43,
;
12.
to
OU^V^'
the
to
which time
137,
5.
jOOl
|>
Arabians.
3.
preceding
>
or
J
which^
,
etc.,
as follows
fern.,
a)
bj
001
7
001
7
pOl masc,
>
? *-0l
;
? jjoi
e. g.
and
vii.
in the
16.
jj(
plur.
J
7
^QjOl masc,
^oJOl fem.
sent
John
wk.J)r*)
ii.6.
OOlj hut
his,
who has
me; Eom.iv.
5; vii. 6; Phil.
John
;
i.21:.
05jA(j #0301
those
who were
fem.,
170,5
Matt.
b)
hj
^Sd masc.
A-l?
and
and
^^k)
7wm
;
neut.
e.
g.
xiii. 12.
;
^Sq\
34
;
TiOL-aAj
01^
t<;Ao
John
iv.
v.30
vii.17,
;
18
i.
ye see
Kom.
28
viii.
;
25
c)
by
j \lu\
masc,
ooi
;
) (raj
fem.
and
he
mf
plnr. y
^>\i} com.
e. g.
Eom.
;
ii.29.
V^-fioarDj )la1
iv.
who is inwardly /John ix. 8 Rom. ii. 2, 3 Barh. 85, 3 d) frequently b}^ the participle
;
e.g.
7 v. 14 Rom.vii.l.
;
-X
..7
(qdqLqj ^^Ap^
^7/056
tvho
know
the law.
is
Rem.
If a particular
emphasis
10
one
is
this
very
the
fjilo
he
who
is
sat.
Sometimes,
e. g.
;
like
Greek
attraction,
demonstrative
rou
v. 2.
wanting;
6u)(f(A)
John
14.
is
01^
\>l\
;
plj
e. g.
u^aroj
7
ou zyCi
-ft
auTw
or the relative
wanting
Heb.
->^>tV>
wanting,
,
-ft
Job
xxiv. 19.
Finally
vi. 1.
Amos
-Q
woe
to those
166
57.
for the relative^ nor emphasis to particles and numerals (comp. Gesen. Lehrgeb. p. 750 sq.). It is used only in its proper signification.
The
neither "ased
special
does
it
give,
as in
Hebrew, a
Rem.
It is
( lY. 1.
SOI
hicce ;
2.
e. g.
may
be translated by
John
xix. 19.
The
^
-ft
interrogative
pronoun
I
7
17. 3
;
is
united with
xii.
e.
g.
Matt.
48.
-n
,jljS\
tQJ|
^^O ^{
-
wiOl
-SD
li'ho is
my
my
e. g.
hrethren f
The
oblique
.7
cases
7
noun
*-Aj| ^IsD
art thou ?
xii. 3.
or so that
^
7
;
follows with
^//io.se
>
preceding
e. g.
Sam.
the noun 0lV)> \^tOQ poi e. g. Matt. xxii. 20. whose iraage and writing is this ? The other cases are formed by the special case-signs preceding, or by prepositions
;
P^t
e.g.
Assem.
1. 34, 6.
^2*1
^^^
to
whom
shall
I give ? Matt
relative
xii. 27.
pJ^O
ivhereby f
(l-i|
Rem.
Sometimes
question,
\l\
occurs
>
instead
it
;
of the
e.
in
the
indirect
-without
following
g.
Matt.
will
xxiv. 42.
^Q2;So
]Ai^ IhV^
|001
;
^t
come? and
is
OlV)
truth /
includes
vii.
e.g. John
38.
\j\M
OlV) what
20.
58.
the
A. Reflexive Pronouns. The Syrians express the reflexive pronoun ( 17. 4) as fol. fows a) by the passive (comp. 21. 2. 22. 2. 24. 2); h) often, particularly in the third person, by the personal pro;
OTHER PRONOUNS.
nonn
77,
e. g.
167
5.
Ol
;
they chose
themselves a king
83, 16;
by
prepositioDS
and
by (aU and
;
|!iDQlXD.
The
former
e.g.
Olmsn J>aip>
15
;
Barh. 56, 2
;
84,
144, 12
xi. 17.
is
in reference to things
e. g.
Luke
lohich
dlaSU
^^
.
-.^^ZZj oalliD
.
^^ every Idngdo-^u
used in reference
<
-x
divided against
itself
;
}Ldqio
II Cor.
is
to
e.g.
^SOQIO
I give
Luke
xi. 17.
a house ivhich
Rem.
divided against
frequently
Less
; e.g.
occur
in
;
reflexive
signification,
e.g.
\*\\ heart
iv. 5,
Lukeii
.51
utA^ head
ps^O)
sioirit ;
Dan.
way
e. g.
Rom.
;
x. 3.
(Zopo
;
OGUl.2L3> their
ix. 3.
,
own
righteousness
1 Cor.vi.l9
i.
Phil.ii.4,5
Rom.
>V)Q1)
|jV/??z?/6^e{/*;
Heb.
ix.
28.
B.
Other Pronouns.
:
The
1. 2.
I'rTi.I
This, that,
Each,
every,
xl.
is
are
expressed
iii.
a)
;
as substantives,
by
Gen.
^aj] I Cor.
8
ii.
vii. 2,
Gal. vi. 4
vii.
the latter
xi.
doubled in Acts
;
38,
45
I Cor.
17
21
II Cor. v. 10
I Thess. iv. 4.
expressed by a2L3
33
-ajl
^
;
\y.D
Rom.
xni. 1
;
r*^
r^
\0
Eph.
v.
Luke
xiv. 33
^aJ'^jQ^ or oftJ;i
Vo
17
;
Eom.
1
xii. iv.
18
3
;
h)
as adjectives; a)
I.
by V.D Matt.
A. 19
;
;
vii.
John
11,
/3)
by
a re-
petition of the
noun defined by
each, every
e. g.
II King?
168
y 7
OTHER PRONOUNS.
J>ai Jxil every nation
e.g.
;
xvii. 29.
Matt. xx. 10
7 ) by the
plural
Amos
iv. 4.
is
The neuter
is
ex-
pressed by
3.
^^Ld \0 John
Whosoever, (quicunque),
expressed by ou]
j
^O
or
.a'iIo
?
John
I
i.
7;
iii.
1 Cor.
iii.
|Lf ^o
John
j ? '
^ Mark
;
13;
^o
16
; ;
Matt.
xiii.
19
;
vii.
Barh. 195, 3
by
\in\D Acts
iii.22
iv.
23
>
'
io^D
Somebody^ anybody
{aliquis)^ in interrogative
and con-
33.
^tal
i/" fl/??/
^j1
;
]^\
&)
hath
any one
.
(
48
1 Tim. vi.3.
;
Uki\ Lm\
j
one teach
Eev. xxii. 18
by
^lo
Mark
16.
iii.
any one
;
c) sometimes
xii.
by
^^
v.
1,
Rom.
^OOllk)
si
tjvs^
Mark
or
more
iv.
in ac;
Hebrew
-ft
idiom,
is
by IaU Lev.
;
2
*
vii.
27.
J
The neuter
*
expressed
a)
by
^^ Acts
;
V.
36
;
^y
I
OOl
u.
^r^J
15
;
John
^io
vii.4
John
the)
b)
sometimes by
^
)
; ;
Lev.v.9.
PsD>
some {of
5.
blood; or
;
Gen. xviii.l4.
expressed by
Nobody, no one
1]
a) as substantives, are
i.l8
;
^mS\
Matt.ix.l6;
;
John
James i. 13
]J
10 flCor.ii.ll
wj| Aa.^
>
'rC)..
]]'Num.xxxi.49
^1
\L iJjer.li.43;
xv.l3;
fol-
John
vii.4
sometimes by ^Jfj
v/ith
Aa^ John
Aa^
or simply
e.g.
by Aa-^
an adjective or participle
no one
;
lowing;
Matt.xix.l7.
\^l Aj^
Phil.
ii.
is good. vi.
The neuter,
7;
by
I Tim.
A^^
fol-
OTHER PRONOUNS.
lowed by ^^Lo Matt.
vi.
169
preceding, II Cor.
as adjectives,
x.
26
with
^^
;
10
without
6)
ii.9.
by
|J
2vm U
89.
|ijl1
no eye
fj
hath seen
creature
;
it ;
Eom.
viii.
lA^;^
no
iv. 24.
Heb.iv.13
Eph.
V.
a)
;
by
Avith
John
ix. 9
words interposed,
;
^'r^l?
viii.
>.y,
]jU( Aa]
uaj]
I Cor.
Phil.
cally,
i.
7
;
xv.
34; II Thes.
;
15
I Tim, iv. 1
^
;
,
11
h)
ix.
by
16
;
oLi]
c)
jaij)
John
32
;
elipti-
by
,-Sl5,
;
coAj"!
shall ye kill
Mark
xii.
Acts
xvii.
Eom.
iii.
d)
e. g.
Dan.
viii.
27.
is
pOll
,
The neuter
;
A^l
Matt.
xiii. 4.
also
verse
7.
8.
Some,
others, are
expressed
a)
by
\^'r^\
i.
^*fi,J|
Acts
xxviii.
Ij',!11
~
24
or
by
.mil
-^\
;
15
!
Z>)
by
Ajf
-n
? Au")
Matt. xvi. 14
I.
12
or
with
-x
>
-X
repeated,
Assem.
32
;
10.
Kem.
c)
by ,ooiiio
.oouLo
Acts
xvii.
Barh. 105, 10
ioi ^oouioLo
;
Q^4^
by
^oouSri^o
-So,
some they
killed, others he
blinded
finally
JJr^l
When some
signifies the
greoiter part^
it is
expressed by
170
JpAjf
OTHER PRONOUNS.
^Sd
The
K^iuCO
Acts
Jolin
vii.
40.
Some
this
others that,
by
|AaJ;>*l
8.
y
Jj^js*!
XIX. 32.
a) of persons,
fern.,
repeated; or
by
;^yt
|;^1m
a^t>
Isa.
r^\\
xii.
U*\ Gen.
it
xiii.
11
Matt.
13.
(Jll'rCi^ y^'(
LLdIo cnr^Y^^Mi
.Aj]]
he stretched
became sound as
^
;
A^V^r
ii.
if
;
one hath an
Phil.
3,
&)
by
,jsj
or jjOl
^m one
;
to the other
{=each other,
;
comp- Remark)
tj>*1 _
Matt. xxiv. 10
^'r*^!
John
^''rJ^l
xiii. 2>6
also
by
c)
John
iv.
37
xxi.
by
the
repetition
of
one
the
same
noun,
;
Acts
34,
^pSD
Vo^p!iD
IjliI
this,
another that
^^^'''
or by ])h^ Gal.vi.2.
another's burden.
7
7
One
another
is
interposed between,
John
14
xxii.
34, 36
sometimes by the
one another ;
suffix,
Rom.i.24.
xvi.
^OOIO among
;
jpAj
Jolm
19
9.
The same,
himself, herself,
itself,
7
are expressed
a)
;
by
p placed between
srtme sacrifice
;
e. g.
Heb.x.ll.
U^?
iQJCJl
-X
-n
tOJOl
^/^e
Phil.iii.l.
^JOl
p ^JOl
^/le 5<5^me;
also without
the
p ;e.g.Assem.I.44,13.
;
(Ak)CLi
.QJOlQ ^ooio at
same time
by
1.
a compound1.
l7.
Rem.; 57.
Rem.)
i.
c)
by the
42.
Heb.
ii.
14;
ix. ix.
24. 21.
OTHER PROKOUNS.
|Sd> ^Sd
17
ouk)
;
witli
^J and
tlie
noun
;
following
4l6,
1
;
e.g.
Assem.
1.415; 3.
d)
suffix ( 58.
A), Matt.
6;
John
v. 26, 43.
7 7
,
Rem.
More
J.
definite are
i.
0C71 QJC71
;
exactly the
same yJolin
15
vii.
25
Barh. 26,
2.
10.
certain [one)
l^^^klo
a) by
r^
John
iv.
46.
pM
;
a certain king;
;
v. 2.
(Aooj a
cer^r/zVi
place
I.
Barh.l 16,10
117,3
;
with
33; 22,
27
Barh. 93, 6
3.
'
h)hy
e.g.
Barh. 1/0,
;
^>0^
K'A ^^
r^
into a house
l78, 2
194, 3.
it is
Rem.
tion,
In proper nouns
g.
by OILQSJ Ajl;e.
Assem. 350, 18
351,
2.
11.
e.g.
As great
as {tantus quantus)
this day.
is
expressed byv*Ji|;
^aw;
p^o] ^V OW U'^e?/
Of which
nature
no need so great as on
of such,
;
\^Od]
e.g.
is he.
This
latter idea
;
alone
is
also expressed
by
^\
e.g.
John
iv.
23;
70, 18.
CHAPTEE SECOND
THE VERB.
59.
General
View,
brew,
of the Preterit and of the Future^ as iix ihe Heso comprehensive, that by them almost all tne other relations of time are designated, in accordance with definite rules (comp. 65). This, however, is usually in such a manner that the preterite designates those tenses which
is
The use
stand in connection with past time, while the future has the same influence u^on future time.
60.
1.
In the Past
it
e.g. Matt.ii.2.
Clf^OQD r^V^
to
we have
ship
h)
01-^
-j^mSn^ ^Z"!
I.
;
u>e
are come
;
wor-
liirii ;
John
iii.
16; Assem.
861, 26, 27
[Aorisi)
mostly
ject
Mark
John
xi. 11.
ii.22.
5>qSjo]3
Je-
rusalem
bared;
e. g.
>u010f>V)\Z OpjZl
remem-
(3)
after particles
denoted),
Cll^o
;
]]
line 4.
]io
;
A until that
I.
Matt.
;
25.
brought forth
18
;
Barh. 24, 6
Aj^j t^^
;
i<??^i7
Ae died
;
213,
217, 3
Assem.
3i,l7
Ephr.
1.
196,
178
the Pluperfect ; a) in relative clauses which define the principal action, and in point of time, precede it; e.g. Matt.
i.
24.
the
"U'r^?
OTdOSd
Olii
r^? 1^1 r^
xi.
of
e.g.
p ivhen, after
;
Matt.
;
ii.
1.
ii.
^Ql* A-iZ]
p
;
tt?Aen
Jesws
;
vjas 'born
verse 9
?
John
22
vi. 23,
24
Barh. 90, 9
Assem.
84, B. 6.
>Ai3 o/ier
^/^a^;
Barh. 89,7.
164,8. j
^5>^j
jA-S
,DQa9rL
Assern.
I.
after that he
)As
_lo, ibid;
213,
A.
25;
Rem.
1r**^
so ^ooy^ as ;
for the
More
frequently, however,
pluperfect,
(
1001
65
).
e. g.
Matt. xvi.
2, 8.
AoSdcd
^Ae
5%
Z5
red;
John
iv. 85.
jields ichich
are white ; Isa. i. 8 ; Ephr. II. 1 1 general designations of time, denoting simply
b)
is
in
what
usual
looks
;
e. g.
Ps. xiv. 2.
it
Lord
c)
when
e.g.
^sliZ] ]lSb\ z^Ay art thou angry f 3. It marks the Future Tense ; a) in prophecies, asseverations, and the like, (for themost part, however, only in translations from the Hebrew) which are viewed as already fulfilled and accomplished e.g.
Gen.
iv. 6.
;
^^
20
pD> pOIQJ 01-M they shall see a great light Gem sometimes after verbs in which is involved the
e. g.
Barh. 80,
1.
cou> \^X
he
promised
that he
would give
;
; b)
exactum) after
t(;Ae7i
> ]2i?
e.g.
Mark
dead ; John
in clauses
4.
In exhortations,
and
tions
I Thess. v.
ii.
6.
^;.^ ^ooi
ii.
let
us be ivatchfal; verse 8
Eph,
11
Tit.
9,
10
b) of
174
the imperfect
lA.1,4*^
John
ix. 41.
Q-^
tOa^ Zooi
;
no sin; xv. 19
%jljS\
c) of the pluperfect
|]
e. g.
John
xi.
21.
Iooi Zpi)
AaOOl
;
^Z
al^
;
my
brother
Barh. 93, lO
Ephr.
001
I.
225, E.
is
sometimes want-
[OI\
i.
^\^f^
;
do not thereby
the imperfect
;
burst
xxv. 24
is
Mark
44
ii.
21,22
Luke
v.
36
subjunctive
future ( 61)
and
that,
7
iii.
15.
AjOOI
Oil
cold
Ephr.
III.
284.
^^
A^OOl
U'^oL
would that
under
c.
5.
Finally,
the preterit
also stands
for
the Imperative
and the
Infinitive ;
10 OOl
tion
occurs as an Imperative
;
m connecv. 34.
9, 10.
xii.
e. g.
Mark
]<j^>V>.
II
Tim.
iv.
Rom.
;
n^>
iv.
>>|l
.oA^OOl
love
your brethren
;
I Pet.
ii.
13
after
preceding imperatives
llOOl
;
e. g.
,
Luke
(fb
'jrolsi
x.
37.
;
^*^v
AjiOOI
iii.
Aj"!
*i\
^ol
-TropSjn
xai
ojaoiwj
I Pet.
b)
15
the preterit
to
ing
come,
to go,
Barh. 415,2.
QOl
^
;
to send,
etc.,
e.
g.
]{ ]1] he came
Acco
402,
8;
7
16,
I 7
17.
;
Qiso-0>|
Barh. 68,
to offer
1.
^\
e. g.
w*xO,^0
y cjvjAa
^\M he began
to
open
and
up.
175
;
But
this
e.
g.
Astern, I, 288, 2.
0V)O
they arose to go
i.
e.
they went.
a) for
Future
e.
g.
Matt.
xxiv.
35.
t;n2J U
>iW)0 lOViQU
and
;
earth shall
i.
my
word
pass away
21,
23
Luke
xviii.
John
xiv. 13
b) for
the
Complete Future in
Jolm
v. 43.
^qLtidZ OctI^ aiMSLi ^QjlD ]l]I ^'r^l .f if another shall have come in his own name^ him will ye receive ; viii. 28.
XV.
2.
7,
10.
more
rarely than in
Hebrew
jAaJ
#]
p
e.g.
\SI)
01^
n'a^
6
*iOZ
f'^ ^\ m
6i-]^y](iz\
^
;
''>
>
<rivwv
p
ix
rou
v^arog rovrov^
ifcikiv
t^
''^
with
j
verse 48,
after
^7ie
^j) Luke
croi(;5- /
)ip
xxii. 61.
|J..-J>Z
;
y^OJ
)
^^o
5^ore
coc^
;
b
I.
;
the Imperfect
a
>
after
such verbs as
to
>
^;a
Assem.
speak)
27, 20.
OT^ ;lDp
*^;* Ae spahe
p7
.
him
^
{began
before
;
to
P)
ii.
after particles
e. g.
Luke
(>7
21.
flb^IlO
^4^^
v. 8.
^r^
;
^r^
xi.
before he
was conceived in
his
mothers
;
womb ; Barh.
15
c)
more
e. g.
Jud.
hath chosen;
(J,^,
3. >
19;
Jer.
i.
d) the Pluperfect:
5.
^^
before
e. g.
It
)
Moods
;
the Subjunctive
of the Present
in general
176
Jolin
37.
]AJO
^La^
]2)j
let
him come
let
to
me and
after
drink
>
,
Barli. 79, 1.
2qSqj
^i^iiiio
now
him die; ^)
;
Jj J
e. g.
John
V. 10.
j^pT ^aaZ> A
carry thy bed;
4^^-i^
vi. 12.
;
it is
should' St
5>0*^
^"p
;
]]j
nm\n
gather
11,13
Matt.xxvi.41
Assem.I.377,10,
;
b)
of the Imperfect
f
a) in conditional clauses
John
IX. 22.
OIQ jQJ
;
.AJl
^f
z/ ariy
man
ing him
/3)
after a
preceding imperfect
zV
e. g.
John
ii.
25.
JOICQJ ^J|)
(OOl O>ir0 U
any one
CJl^^l
;
r^l^^^?
after
that he
I.
Barh. 80, 3
e. g.
Assem.
8.
359, 5
the
pluper-
feet
Johii iv.
tOl^p)
y)
that they
might buy
223, C.
Ephr.
sem.
I.
As-
I.
297, B. 3. V.
c)
J and
e.g.
John more
51
Ephr.
I.
237, B.
and
d) of the Pluperfect^
;
rarely,
e. g.
Ephr.
I.
40, B.
OOl
|Zuj
U^=^?
f?cn:)
jooi
(oou
it
p'^fiooM
p.^
good ears
Rem.
May^ mighty
;
and the
like,
are
also ex-
Ephr.
40.
I.
203, F.
IvmJO ^iV?
that
he might go and
they entreated
see ;
John
iv.
QIO
;
him
that he
v.
^T
^P
p^
what shall we
xviii. 7
;
say, shall
vi.
we
16, 30, 31
Luke
John
28
Heb.
177
every one
49.
i.
who
fered
68,
18;
Mark
ix.
lA**Sj
^
; ; ;
of-
->>\Vn //
Prov. XX. 9
sacrifice
should be salted
with salt
i^W ^^
^^^ ^^V^
>
^7
<**>i
^^^y ^^ circumlocution,
P 7
raay
m
;
e.
g. T Cor. xi. 7
O with a
Tim.
iii.
future
following
e. g.
John
iv.
24
2.
;
B) The Imperative.
a)
in Prohibitions
iii.
e.g.
Matt.
i.
20.
34.
John
b)
vi.
20
I Cor. xv.
^?^,
^Oi^L U sm
John
i.
710^
after a
preceding imperative
Usts, verse 47;
e. g.
40.
^OVmZo o2
spxso'^s xai
viii.
11.
is
Rem.
The
which
is
*.
wanting,
If 901QJ
there
be
light.
(OOU
which
let
The
after verbs
e. g.
in-
Barh. 34,
4, 5.
^. J")
]1q
/ie
5ow^Ai
^0 A:i7Z
90,7,8.
ii.
7
^aOlQ-JS^njj ^'mLI^
he thought
to kill
1.
;
him
Matt.
^7
22. ^iIj?
.
7X7
\Uj> he feared
to
go; Assem.
33, 25.
iii.
U^O ^Owl>
>
^\m
11
he began to fast
and
to
pray
4,
John
3.
1UjJ> >.^V)
he cannot see
viii. 28).
;
verses
like
viii.
xv. 4 (without
following, Matt.
In
manner occur
55
;
\l\ Matt.
v.l7
^r- ^vi. 3
r^QS
Luke
Acts
i.
and many
with
others.
also
Rem.
pare
4.
The
(
infinitive
^
is
follows
these verbs.
Com-
63.
B.
Finally,
to be
the future
/A5XXe<v )
also expressed
by ^Al ready
;
about
and a following
he
infinitive
;
e.g.Matt.
iii.
xi. 14.
(Z)s2l^
r->Al>
who
is
to
come
John
14.
(jul >
1*5
C1^
ei^en so the
Son of
;
Man
xxi.
to be lifted
vi.
vii 35
in the plural
Luke
178
^h"^
89.
^^i-^
iM come
is
to
pass; verse36.
ap-
The implied
pended
;
expressed by locFl
e. g.
John
vii.
o\nnV^\
oooi
^^Alj
paOj
the spirit
to receive.
e.
Rem.
Also occurs
197,
is
g.
;
Assem.
1.481,22.
Ephr.
I.
Vr*J? IjOIO
h>^?
;
the priest
shall hegin
37,17;
in the plural
John
vi.
15.
)
The idea
>
of willing^
fol-
purposing,
also expressed
bv
y^t
ci
with
and a future
lowing;
especially
Matt.
xvi.
v.
24.
*^jAQ
;
I^JJJ
^^?
;
^r^
e.
whoso
me
or without J
g.
Luke
xviii. 13.
^Q^p .
fOOl
;
\d\l
i.44.
he would not
lift
up
b)
John
go forth.
62.
1.
command ;
take
;
e.g.
John
V. 8.
*,*C0*^
^QO* ^QO
;
walk
or encouragement
and permission
e. g.
Mark
i.
38.
|jyr>o\
Rem.
tive
n^Vm
go
John
xi. 15.
In the same
l2f
\L
e.
of
(vid. 28.
l.Rem.
%jZ
2.
Rem.)
verb, especially of
and
in the singular,
i
when
let
tended
g.
|V)
O V) >ni
when
go.-
\L
make a
meant
covenant
e.g.
xix.
xi. 7.
32
and
oZ
in the plural,
let
several are
John
^l|j
o2
us
2.
after
;
the
e. g.
future,
some-
q\oo|0
iO^N \2^ I
ivill
give
to
you
and ye
179
out a copula,
*-i;5 .-*Jil
e.
g.
John
;
iv. 16.
go
to call
verse 29.
0]-m
oZ come
Oi
iO
to see
Ephr.
I.
201, E; or
cause and
this
effect
i.
e. g.
Gen.
xlii. 18.
0,^1
(>oi
do
and
live,
e.,
if ye
would
Hue.
;
Rem.
In
e. g. Lsa. viii.lO.
>V)io2Z
(jO
|A^So
oWV)
speak a
word,
it
is
negative,
viii.
it
is
B)
e. g.
John
11.
^JL^^L P *So2 \MG\ ^iDO wi^l go and henceforth more ; Rom. xi. 20 Eph. iv. 26.
;
sin no
Rem.
Concerning
see 60. 5.
the
third
comthis
10 001
person,
a.
to
designate
63.
Use of
the Infinitive,
The
form
latter
Syriac,
which has
not,
like the
Hebrew, a double
by
A.
Infinitive Absolute.
The
and
denotes
infinitive
without
is
which
;
it
precedes,
a)
e. g.
Hebr.vi. 14.
^^i^i^fiol
o\
I
is
Sam. xx. 6
xxiii.
;
22
John
ix. 9.
lie
Acts
v.
180
28
;
b) certainty^
confirmation
e. g.
Barh.
15, 13.
shall
know with
verb
it is
certainty.
Negto,
atively with
U before the
finite
equivalent
by
no means
went in
e.g. Isa.
;
e.g.
John
ix. 6.
xx. 5.
;
Rom.
c) it
^^
XXX. 19.
7.
.oaoZ p
Exod. xxxiv.
Rem.
ever
after the
By the
;
infinitive absolute
how-
other minute
Jer. xxii. 10.
),
points of the
language; e.g.
weep
Ono foo!^
Gen. xxxvii.
8.
much
Aj|
Germ, etwa
7
N^
A^^
xliii.7.
;
O^
7
^V)V)
X
ivilt
p
then, truly;
^001
vii.
^->-^r*
per-
haps, indeed
Acts
34.
A^V^
;
I have
i.
indeed seen.
More
29
;
frequently
it is
;
merely pleonastic
it is
e. g.
Luke
22
;
John
e. g.
xiii.
Acts
vii.
45
and
Isa. vi. 9.
l^Vp^Vn QvVna
it
;
Jiear
4.
stands before
e.g.
Gen.
iii.
^L^DL
ye
The
e.
g.
Gen.
ii.l7.
ZqSdZ IZoSb
Ephr.
I.
fl^^ri
T
tl1)2
(compare
24, A),
which
;
is
mode
ingly
of expression
;
as
c.
J^^
(AO) fZo^A*
|,j^
rejoice
exceed-
see 67. 1.
B.
Infinitive with
The
Infinitive
with
stands
a) after verbs
tiont
i>
wish,
determina-
capacity,
f
command,
etc.
e. g.
Luke
xi. 54.
^^*^
^rSo pMpol
; ;
THE INFINITIVE.
John
V. 16;
vii. 1.
181
cr^cnk)^ looi
Barh.
|J
^.
83,
]]
^c would not
Matt.
;
go;
Matt. xiv. 5;
14,
110
18;
vi.
ii.
24.
man
can serve
Mark
Johnm.2; x.21;
he sent him
Barh.192,20.
;
(v;<^\ 019^*
feed
;
John
I.
iv. 33.
^i^lSoL
^La\
he.
brought to
shall take
eat
Ephr.
;
230, D.
oicrUioL
_ ^onmj they
\i\\
to kindle
John
xi. 31.
]nnV)L
to be
];^oV%
h)
;
to cease,
accustomed
to
g.
Matt.
;
iv.
17.
I,
1,
preach
;
xvi. 21
V. 42.
Barh.
6,
Assem.
(J
I.
513, B. 20
Acts
;
they
Eph.
16; Barh.
to
5. 10.
0'^^aV)\
^^i^
customed
Rem.
1.
changes.
infinitive
The
Gen.
with
viz.
in
Hebrew, be rendered by
while^
or
when
e.g.
ii.
3.
created,
cir-
when he made
cumlocution
tJie
it);
forms, after
;
and
after
looi, a
e.g.
But
of
Gen. xv.l2. -*^;^^V |aSD ]ooI the Hebrew idiom, by which the
is
infinitive,
explained by
only
^iO
before
e.g.
Assem.
to
1.
42,8.
0*^\V)\>
negatively,
]ool )] ]]o
iv.
i.
and
he
ceased
not
teach ;
Hebr.
entering,
1.
e.,
\\ vVn\%
who should
or comparatively, without
>
Gen.
iv.
13.
n*^aV>\ ^Lo
%jkLn
N^cm
.a01
\^y
my
crime
is greater,
than
Rem.
2.
In
the poets
a transition
182
from the
infinitive
the
finite
verb
e. g.
Ephr.
III.
129, F.
|las ^iXm
I^Q^S^D
(Jo
]AVn\
|j^SD UcTI.
it,
rUD ^fHi
to
0C71
wKkOZ)
W *^i
yar
better is
in
time of thirst
drink water
(literally,
and we
which seems to be
et
Siefi".
done
for the
Hahn
)
Chr.
p. 7^
Anm.).
The Syriac
3.
expresses
(
infinitive
by
the
future,
61. 3.
or
by the
participle
).
64.
1.
Use of
the Participle.
Participles
:
may be
as Substantives
A) As
Adjectives^
and take their object in the case or with the preposition of the verb from which they are a ) the Active Participle ; e. g. John ii. 14. formed thus
of their subject;
; ;
(jQ-aO i^r^O
poZ
who
and
doves
verse 16
viii.
44
Barh. 52,
74, 20.
I.
IcrilL ^^y-wj
]nl^
Acts
270,
the
A. Kem. 9
Ol) ^iilioisoj
.alSn
ix. 2.
b) the Passive
;
Participle^
e.
g.
Ez.
;
ao
Barh. 32, 14
the
108, 6
l70,
4.
19.
\rA
,^
if-^*^
\i<^
t
maimed
in
hand
Lev.
;
ii.
}aaSliO
Sam.
ii.l8.
p'r^D^ yui>!D
blessed
of the Lord.
participles
B)
As
Substantives
stand,
in a genitive re;
noun
thus
a) the
]83
Gen.
xxiii. 10.
vii.
1
.
went in at
the
gate
Rom.
fCDOSQJ
those
who
1
know
11.
the
law
I
(literally,
the hnoivers
of the law)
the
Barli. 195,
|<=^<y>
sivord;
>.
y.
214,
..?
To.
who
denij
(i.e.
refuse to
i.
10.
1ASjDQ2^ \\1
Participle
\
^r^m
breaker
of their oath
the Passive
hP^?
OlQ-ijO
blessed
of God;
xxvi.
29.
2. Participles
mark
A) The
Aj|
present,
in connection
(
54. 2
e.
g.
John
iv. 9.
I.
^|i
ihou prayesi
^!)
(art pra.ying)]
,
xv. 15;
Assem.
84, 9.
.;Sd
p(
nn^
have no
commandfrom our
Lord.
Rem.
definite
In
;
the third
person which
is
usually
already
rendered
is
omitted
g.
Luke
.
xv. 5.
he
heareth
it
(the
sheep) ; verse 6.
into his house
vii.
mr>0->...\
calleth
and
;
his friends
\kll\
John
iii.
18,
20;
iv.
36
17
viii.
47
iv.
23.
lAla
P
;
B) The past
|OOl
e. g.
a) the Imperfect
in connection with
( 65)
/3)
John.
iii.
22.
tar-
and
81
vi.
;
2
e.
y)
g.
after the
vi. 5.
John
Iv^aO
and
;
he
saiv
a great comI
.
verse 11
e. g.
Assem.
4, 3.
75,
A.36
Barh.
lia^
onScY>
184
THE PARTICIPLE.
they vjent
vii.
see^
^|>jO ^Q^;ja>
h
)
the Perfect
Jolm
52.
^ U^?"
the
.^WO *^^Q
arisen no
^(d
Rem.
U search and
projphet.
It
is
to
constant idiom
of the language,
"r^X^^
when
Hebrew
infinitive
finite
^l^n
verb,
is is
or the participle
^1
e.
g.
Gen.
viii. 5.
^tqLo 0001
and
the
^iV X^o
decreased
rtiore
-i^on-1
"ijibn
;
vr\
Sam.
tr]7^yr\
ii.
waters
and
more
26.
the hoy
to
day.
C
shall
The Future ;
;
in general
^/ly
propositions
rise
e. g.
;
John
/3 )
xi. 23.
i-kJDakil
^p3
;
brother
again
after
present
rise
1.
John
again
jA*Dj
;
xi.
iv.
24.
^)o>
7)
Pl |lr
Z:?20w;
^Aa^ he shall
25
after a preterite,
IjI
mm
olL '^f
him
;
]^^V>S OlS ^
^^aV)
-ISDO* IALZ
the city
;
he said to
iv.
that in
)
three
John
.
25
after
^.^^^
I.
ii
e
a future
John
xiv. 23.
^-l-iZ(
OlZo^o
>mo><j->>.i
my
862, 5,
looi
]t
>fcmp
shall be granted
after
me
that
;
^ ^ouAj
loi,
;
to
him
Assem.
/|"
if
then will
xi. 24.
;
?"
I become
a christian ;
an imperative
that
Mark
believe
ye shall receive
(01
John
Gen.
xvi. 82.
vi.
}Ll V*Z|
xlviii.4
;
behold the
ix.
17
Exod.
18
>)
in direct
and
indirect questions
185
shall the
;
Jolin
vii.
41.
|MiiV)
\l\
U-^yt
31
^ P^?
;
? verse
;
viii.
22
xiii.
27.
^pSo
?^/^^ ^/ioz^
;
^^7^ do
vii.
after particles
e. g.
John
121?
2.
%aA!i1
*^tS\
luhen
he
shall have
U^?
t^
;
in conditional clauses
Ephr.
I.
218, F.
X^
^ooil
]S\
^0U> UV
unless
him
water.
A
|OOl
The
Subjunctive
;
)
viz.
a
;
of the Imperfect
e.
with
10.
compare
|J
65
after ^(
g.
Barh.
38,
;:)ZASd
the
ground
woidd
|>i>
not
break
Assem.
I.
379,
2.
Z]Sd B'Io
should ht
\LL
m^ar^ \ZiD
^
;
if he denied
after ?
Christ then
live^
],
QMwOrlQj^ ^^.t^.
rifice ;
(
besides
that
they
would not
in
relative
clauses
)
;
depending
e.
= imperfect
subjunctive
^.fe^pi)
g.
^a oom
g^
l
.001^ .ilSauAjj
Ae
ordered
them as Bishop^
ask
(compare
e. g.
JL^ ^jkOGl.kO
tOA^OOl I
^ Oa
t
1 *
S had
been possible
own
19.
eyes^
Heb.
X.
xi. 15;
John
after
ii.
B
to
I
The
P
Infinitive^
to
verbs signifying
etc.
;
to
begin^ to ccase^
permit^
command^
to be able, to pluck ;
e. g.
i.
Matt.
;
xii. 1.
^ i ^\V>
Mark
45
Luke
v.
21
186
XV. 14 I
;
John
ii.
8.
I.
to see
;
the light
Assem.
;
^\M
7
he began
;
to call
;
50,
Barh. 96, 7
108,
19
160,
180,
5
;
83,
12
Matt.
16
;
xiii.
^->^>
ODCLQ*
;
suffer to
x. 40.
44
xviii. 8
;
Luke
ii.
^ T>r^ 0^
,**]
John
help
me
Mark
;
2.
^Oj]
v.
o^n*!
43
;
|]
could not
;
hold them
vi. 37.
vii.
15
John
also
19
viii.
Acts x.47
Mark
e.
Rem.
Sometimes
cominr/
;
>
stands before
such a participle
g.
Matt. xxiv.30.
see the
Son
of
man
John
v.
19
Acts
xxi. 32.
>><.n%
Vn
Q^OIQ
.^n\no^\ 0001
4.
sVajCavro
rC'rrTQVTSg
rdv
Ila-JXov.
The
it
;
Absolute Participle
e.g.
is
distinguished
bj
a)
preIZ*)
ceding
\j1d
Matt.xiv.25.
to
^Ol!iD
^ql .OOiZol^
;
\^
Jesus came
1.**
xv. 32;
6.
p p
;
\l\o
came seeing
Barh. 62,
;
A^Jk) t^'rOO
|SlJi
^-^ASd
P
e.
disquieted by
war
he died
73,4.
p
J
]]V5>o]i
to the earth;
6) by
preceding
Mark
ii.
14.
xi. 2,
]mnV) A^^
4
;
JO^tlj
;
sitting at the
receipt
of custom
Matt. xiv. 26
xxvi. 64.
Rem.
If
to such
a participle,
struction
e.
g.
;
^GlOpkl
5
;
^^aio
44.
ivith
unleashed
hands
Mark
vii. 2,
John
xi.
foot.
New
O^l
Testament,
sometimes to be understood as
it
;
verb following
,
e. g.
Matt.
ii.
8.
O^nS
cropsu^gyrg^
f^eratfars
187
active
The
signification
viii.
those
e. g.
Matt,
vii.
18.
14.
Ol^ ^pr^> those surrounding him 01^ OOOl ^oAjlOs) those hearing him ;
]oai Mji^lo troubling the water
:
Luke
John
;
v.
4.
|'^\
I.
Actsxxi.16
Assem.
;
30, 4.
2.
;
U^^^^uil
b
)
37,8;
the
377,
she
drew him by
;
hand
e. g.
;
Matt. v. 4.
Mark
;
vii.
SO
y^JSk
John
xi. 19.
xii. 15.
a/o/
Barh. 170, 2
223,
1.
|C>)
^\l 2uA^ pO
upon a
bed.
Rem.
Participles
sometimes
;
e. g.
the
Latin participle in
-ndus
(
2.
^\a-Mj timendus.
constructions
jl-^
Here
also
belong
T
>
compare No. 5
have forsaken all
.^7
such
as
^\d
thee ;
wi.1 CLft.CLS
/
, 7
y^
.er,^
I deny
wa^ >0
V^
>>>
^|
a$
/ ?(^i7/.
;
6.
a) the Masculine
becometh saints
j^l ^Djl w;^
;
Rom.
xvi. 2.
|a >,n\
;
*)>!>
j^j ay
I.
if
Heb.
viii.
it
Philem. 8
thee
Assem.
;
33,20.
24,
m?/
son^
behoveth
455,
A.
4L
?'^
Lord
;
John
ix. 4.
iii.
30.
|^*<^\ |ooi
Rom.
Coi,
xiv.
bVi
^
;
fjLs'Xsi
dt'jroXXi^jxs&a
the
Feminine
neuter
e. g.
Gal. vi.9.
;
^1 l^Uo
2oai U
l?01
let it
not be bur-
densome
to
us
U^}
^Ai5 is
probable;
188
was necessary;
;
482,24.
,
honorable
also
and
right
5 19, A.
4,
Here belongs
hands
;
i.
Rom.
;
\\v. 4.
^010pft))
t4^
^^
comes
39.
into his
r>^>^
e.
|J
he can
and
]A ]>
^<^r>
ye cannot.
Qb.
View of the manner of designating all the Tenses and Moods ; of the Imperfect^ Pluperfect^ and Optative in
'particular*
1.
The
Indicative
A
2)
;
of the Present
is
expressed
a)
by
the preterit
;
(60.
h)
2. a)
c)
usually
by
the participle
and 64.
2.
A);
the participle joined
of the Imperfect
( 18.4.
a) usually
;
by
10 001
Kem., and 88
/3 )
;
e.g.
Matt.
verse 20.
child's life
i\(^)
iii.
oia^j oooi
^>*'*^^ ^OJOi
who sought
the
5.
.X
out
rite
2.
;
John
xvii. 12.
AaOOI
\^ I
;
kept;
)
( 60. 1. b),
)
;
and rarely
by
61.
C)
flf)
of the
Perfect^
60.
1 )
rarely
by the
;
future (61.
c);
h) by the participle
( 64. 2. B. b)
10 001
person and number added to the preterit
;
in the
same
v.
e. g.
Luke
189
terror
had
;
seized
v. 13.
him
Jonn
iv.
8.
into
fOOl t-U-yiZ] he
had
x. 22.
1.
fOOl
c
)
;
|oai
he
had been
h)
(
by
60.
c)
rarely
by the future
61.
d);
1.,
some-
times
a)
by the
;
Preterit
( 60. 3. a)
h)
by the impera-
tive ( 62. 2)
c)
by the
Futurum exactum ; a) by the preterit ( 60. 8. b), more frequently h) by the future (^ 61. 1. b), sometimes c) by the participle ( 64. 2. C. b).
)
of the
//.
The
)
Subjunctive
A
looi
3.
of the
( 60.
)
;
Present
a
),
is
given
;
a)
b)
4.
very often
A. a
of the Imperfect
by
e. g.
John
19.
^'\ ^oA^OOl
^->-lrJ>
j^ o2L
^oAaOOl
father
;
^^>-^r*
*^^V
A.
b),
if y^
;
also
;
know my
b)
verses 39, 42
xviii. 30,
;
xxi.
25
by the
future ( 61. 3.
( 64. 3.
sometimes
by the
participle alone
A.
a)
C ) of A.c);
by the
future
(61.
3..
D
b)
of the Pluperfect
future (61.
3.
by the
a)
( 64. 3.
is
A.
b).
expressed
by the
interrogative
190
pronoun with a
ix. 29.
or future following
e. g.
Judges
Jr->l^
P^ ]^\\
to
cnSr\w]
in
^j
^
e.g.
oh that
!
I had
;
me)
Hvis people,
my power
thai,
Ps. iv. 7
by
with a pre-
Gen. xvii.18.
ImP %aoA|
loGi
;
oh that he might
live
e. g.
II Cor. xi.l.
xS ^oA^ooi
!
^;nimV> ^oAsf
#1 or
me
is
7
Rem
The
to
optative
J
Q-^
^tO
e.g. Ps.lxxxi.l3.
i1VV)
my people would
j
;
hearken
e.g.
me ;
XVI. 3.
Exod.
tA^lD)
^001
^^lO. would
it
that
is
we were dead
omitted
;
When
Luke.
the
the substantive
ii.l4.
verb
denotes a wish,
e.
g.
|01^]j
njT|n
|AajQOaZ
7
;
Hebrew
Job
1)3
e. g.
xxiii.
but
it is
literally
translated
in
Cant.
viii. 1.
kA-^ p^l
^^Aj So
my
brother,
is
ex-
o)
by the
preterit
of (001 ( 60. 5. a)
b)
by the
Y. The
expressed
ture
Infinitive, finally,
;
i3
a)
by
,
the preterit
h)
by the
fu-
( 61. 3.
C)
c)
by the
partici-
ple
( 64. 3, B).
The
and
fern,
passive conjugations
191
llrb. x. 34.
the masculine
it
of the preterit
;
e. g.
Q^ *i\D
it
pained you
Luke
of
x.34.
he
cared for
him;
/3)
the
;
future,
24.
-ik Ok6j
it
tvould he
;
good for us
b)
Jer. vii.6,
;
tO^
%]^^
,
the feminine
a)
of the preterit
Ps. xcv.lO.
fj^
;
^^ Ajpx)
Aa'^O
it
it
shames me, {I
am ashamme
Ps. xxxi.9.
%^ Am
;
it
grieves
Luke
xviii. 23.
9.
OI^
pained him
(3)
of the future,
;
Gal. vi.
^ tf^K
Oui Ijsij
a)
;
it
Ps.
Ixix. 20.
2.
^^^ whom
grieved,
is
usually ex-
pressed
verb,
OLjlJ
by
a)
thus
it
impersonal phrases,
as
Luke
vi. 13.
;
vjas light
John
vi. 17.
Aqaai
it
was dark
pas-
AiSdA|
the report
it
Assem.
481, 7
;
I.
298. A.ll.
/? )
Ol^ Aij^yiZl
as
was revealed
him
in
noun or with
subjects
to
e.
g.
John
i.
28.
i.
pass at Bethany
;
3.
Zooi
Ipxi
llal
there
u^as
it
not
any thing
to
Ephr.
;
I.
240, F.
{ok)
-'<
I.
^^^
fjOl Z;l
seemed good
it
Moses passively,
to us.
Assem.
380, 4.
A^VmZI 1d>1
;
seemed just
Yet
we
h)
culine
rest
i^N
01^
1 1 1
(j
there will be no
for
thee
I.
Barh. 133,
8.
r^^
is
^^ ^'^^^
^^i^
to
him;
Assem.
3.
362, 5.
a^ jdouAj
^f it
When
it is
nite,
expressed, in Syriac,
in various ways,
English,
thus
a)hj
e.
g.
192
Gen.
xi. 9.
is
( i. e.
one
calls,
it
is
called)
to
whicli
also
after the
Hebrew
verb
tread
;
e. g. Isa.
(
no more wine
e.g.
i. e.
or
(i.
"imj]
and
one)
\\^\\
I Sam.
ix. 9.
fOCn ;Sof he
e.
any
^^ow;
said ;
John m. 4,
can
old ?
shall he told
Acts xvi.
to
L^ looi IvmASd ^L
58, 13, 15
;
|Zq^
h)
(
there
made ; Barh.
Ixiv. 3.
xlvii. 1
;
by the third person plural e.g. Isa. i. e., men in general ) have not heard ;
xi. 3.
sees,
oZ U they Dan. i. 12
(i.
Heb.
a001 ^V*^AliD>
>^^
e.
what
any one
what
;
is
seen
also
ciple or adjective
e.g. Isa.
xxiv. 16.
;
0>
^M
li.
ed ;
c)
by
e. g.
Luke
4.
^j^Z
^A<
p
in
t(;Ae?7,
iAor^ hringest ;
(i.
ii. 1.
^n;nV> jOOlZj
)
;
//loz^ o/^
ferest
e.
^Aa^ ^Aere
he offered
vi.
is
24
d) sometimes by the
first
e.g.
Mark
vii.57.
}^\:^Q
that
we
(i.e.
anyone) should
and
;
cast
e)
more
fre-
e.g. Matt.vii.l6.
^^^^"^^ jSoL
;
men
gather ? v. 15
;
ix.l7
x.
29
I Cor. iv.l2
Barh. 6-2.
58, 9.
also
f
Here belongs
^S
one
obey.
it is
e.
said
and imxii.
personal phrases
with an
infinitive following
;
g.
Matt.
12.
AvVnV
may do
Acts
v.
29.
oma-^ASliL ]]o
193
speak of themselves
pluralis excelkniice
(i. e.
first
g.
Gen.
26.
(kjf
,aL2
let
us
xi.
7; Barh. 90, 9.
;
hold we
to
11.
^
a
)
us (me)
Rem.
Sometimes
the
though
for
the
passages
translated from
Old and
New
the construction
Micah
vii.
18.
^Zq2| (Gw^
and and
15;
AjV r^X
there
is
Vo
no
Oilol'fl^
]o*r^?
God as
11.
thou,
who
remitteth
retainest
the
transgressions of the
(compare Ephr.
(CDOSO)
XiysTs
b
)
remnant of 284, A. B
heritage,
not 21.
Mai.
ii.
Gal.
iv.
Ll^L .OOOU)
ol
^r'-^A*
^'^M t^^l
;
^^
0*rib|
;
(xoj,
vito
vopiov
^s'Xovts^ s/vai
Rom.
;
ii.
Matt.
xxiii.-37
from the
,^1
first
to
the
.
third
person
e.
g.
25.
001i\s
him,
GU^
5i>
^o.il
Here
e.
instances where
in
first
person plural,
Ixvi.
ancestors;
g.
Psalm
6.
CnD
^^Z
then did
we
rejoice in
him.
When
several verbs
it
having
diff'erent
more
e.g. II
Sam.
xi.l3.
67.
Construction of
the
Verb
with various
Cases
and
Prepositions.
I.
1.
With an
)
Transitive
e. g.
Matt,
ii.
6.
->mri. vi 01 j
194
.>Vnv\ having
214,
2.
ifjjio
my people
iv.
16
even
intransitives,
;
at the
same time a
transitive signification
e.g.
Barh.
1;^^
an
ass
215, 11.
Rem.
Here
;
also
other cases
believe ;
|JL1 ^0
e. g. xii.
,n^
Ephr.
command
x.
^^V?i01 to
ii.
John
answer
38; Romans
III.
16,
with
<o
%^ John
23
285;
^^IlfiD
announce; Acts
xvi.
10. etc.
a Here belong the following classes of verbs signifying to put on or put off clothing, to adorn, to
h
)
;
those
gird^ to
vi.
cover
v:ith
anything
an\
9
^Do]
I Cor. xv.
53
Eph.
11
^-^jia^A n\l>
iii.
;
that he
ii.
%%i\% Col.
;
Sam.
Acts
Acts
;
xii.
8
Ps.
e.g.
*'^{^\l\
xii.
"^^^|
; e. g.
and
/3)
Acts
1JamO jZonii I
001
U^
^^6
er
i/"
xiii.
10;
he suffer
viii. 86.
Olmaj
y) verbs of reraemhering
forgetting,
Lnke
i.
72
;
pjif John
17,
22
X^i neb.
10
and
finally
^)
XV.21.
Tyre
iv.
Mark
John
A*Ij
c)
38;
Luke
ii.
51
John
ii.
iv.
^jl
Luke
Acts
42
3
vi. 1;
ii.
j^Ol Luke
12
;
39
iv.
14;
;
John
^oaj
i.44
^oScD
v. 1
14^
ix.
xviii.33
a) in
as
their object,
12.
formed
r^\
to
e. g.
Judg. xiv.
\Lfj^o\
195
Ez. xvii. 2
Acts
ii.
17.
;
pop^
1
*****
^'
(Vm
)V)\n ^oSm
Ephr.
I.
to
have visions
253,
dreams
Matt.
xiii.
24
is
251,
especially
/3 )
when
e. g.
the
noun
ii.
Matt.
lO.
they rejoiced
exceedingly;
John
iii.
29
Assem.
862, 18
;
Zach.
14.
to befall,
001
in the sense of
happen
e.
to
any one,
xiii. 2.
vii.
governs the
accusative
,
of the
object
g.
;
Luke
Acts
tQJf
fOOl
|i201>
40.
uCJUOQl
him
Acts
xxviii. 5, 6.
t 2
The
which takes an
off clothing,
-^>
a) verbs of putting on or
adorning^
covering
with anything;
I.
e.
g.
jrjQ_^,
\*(
Mark
he
*0
P
239,
A.
;
clothed
,.^7
John
xix. 2.
^.'
PQ..>|>
IZImJ
;
^cn o i mn o
-x
they
Ez. xvi. 10
I.
e.
g.
Ephr.
527,
A.
tilai
oil
;
tj]SQi.
Alli lAliif
53.
;
^^e vessels
with
Luke
John
i.
\tsi^ ^l^flO
"llSkD
^/ie
hun-
y) those
which denote
teaching,
xiv. 26.
iv.
^fV?\o .on<^\j
6
;
;
Ae
^(;^7
^ow
1^5 the
all things ; I
Tim.
John
xiv. 8.
Is] .OLm
Father
verses 10, 32
verbs in Peal with a double accusative signification. Here belong a) verbs of clothing, covering (also with ^Q of
h
)
;
the thing)
e.
g.
Ephr.
1.
239,
A.
iLLsiboi
^qjI* jcof he
196
to
sow
Lev. xix. 19
e.
/3)
g. Jolin
ii.
7.
;
11.^1]'
]Ii
;
^f
Gen.
oSlk)
;
fill
verse 9
Barh. 212, 2
Assem.
832,
A.
the person
he
and thing)
e.g.
vi.22.
\o
all thai
had commanded
him',
Mark viii.ll.
;
IZ]
OLl 0001
^->-^K*
demanded of him a sign 5) verbs of showing or doing any thing to any body, or making a person or thing to he
they
thus and so
^Aee
est
e. g.
Gen.
xvii. 5.
a Father
John
viii.53.
i.
QliD
i^/Aa^
7nak-
Assem.
I.
346,
A.
4. v.
E.
Alis
which anything
])p!^ ijI
formed;
-e.
g. L
Kings
viii.
82.
V>Lq^
;
Uq
j'^o
an
altar
s)
verbs of naming,
18
John
iii.
1.
II.
1.
joined with
especially
;
etc.
Here belong
emotion of
a) verbs
e.g.
;
state or
the
mind
Luke
ai,^0V)O
*i^
at his birth
Barh.90,20;
iii.
thing
Matt.
17
Heb.
ii.
x. 38;
V
;
^ OlLoZZ]
to
;
vjonder at;
Matt.
xii.
Matt. xxii. 33
Luke
;
47
*^
\CiSQ to hope in
;
21
ii.
John v.45
Ja
I.
%0
^!lLiOl to believe on
;
Mark
;
i.
15
John
;
11;
\j1
to
look at
;
John
i.
36,
43
Barh. 190, 18
;
Assem.
89,
A. l7
0 ZoiO
to be
ashamed of
Rom.
i.
197
or threaten
7 7
;l.(^
to
;
rebuke
I Tim. v.
(p
ibid,
\i
Matt.
ar
;
viii.
26
Luke
;
iv.
41
to
mock
ii.
Matt. xx.l9
b)
xxvii. 31;
*o ^O^k)
/o Z//^/i at
Acts
13
by, calling
upon;
e.
*,jiQ
1?^? .htSo
xxiii.
Mark
aC)
i.
Acts
Kom.
shall
X.
9,
10
;
Matt. x. 33.
;
ioaajj
;
^
^
;
whosoever
I.
deny me
372,
8,
xxvi. 34
I Tim. v. viii
Assem.
341, A.
23
]j1
]iDQiD
I Thess. v.27;
;
*0
Ip
<o
call
upon
Gen.
Here
also belong
c)
e. g.
*iD riQl,
;
%a9|
and
;
a^aQj^ <o
prove against
Acts xxiv. 27
(also
xxv. 9
Rom.
ix.
17
;
7
1 Tim.
i.
^ >aiD
with
^^)
10
to testify
;
against
6?)
Deut. xxxi.
to
28.
ter
;
JD ^v2)
to
encoun(i.
27
;
xxii.
and *^ Ul
come with
e.
bring) something
Psalms
Ixvi. 13.
to
Rem.
*jk*^
Here
also belongs
^ \L
drink from
Gen.
xliv. 5.
OIQ |4A*J (ino the cup from which my Lord drinks. Some e.g. II Sam. xxiii. 10. times JD denotes a part of the object ^\c^o *a;jsA Ae mao?e a/i overthrow among the Philistines ;
;
to be placed
^o
labor at something;
2.
as a sign of
the dative
e. g.
a)
commending
;?2y
John
I
;
xiv.27.
;
^onL pi
Luke
*iDOl-ji kXA)
]Sn\
*Q2)|
pece
give
to
you
Matt, viii.21,31.
;
us
^ ul^
32
;
permit me
Mark v. 13
viii.
^ir^
198
K0
9,
loi^U
to
God ;
;
I Peter iv. 19
h) those
e. g.
John
viii.
29.
;
OtL \Z^y ^fio ^Acf^ which pleases him ; Rom. xv. 2, 3 or c ) those that denote likeness^ similarity; Heb. xiii. 16
;
e.g.
the
Luke xiii. 18. loi^j UonSV) llsoj ^isii^ to what is Kingdom of God like ? verses 9, 20 Heb. ii. 17 Barh.
;
137, 12.
Olli bS\
1q* thou
Rem.
Here
28,29
to
such as
;
e. g.
^ ]]o
Matt.
it is
iii.
fitting for^
and
;
^
II
Aa
equivalent to
to
have
Luke
xvi.
John
x. 16.
relation
^^sjv,
John
<rov
|)l)o
^JOl
uiov
and
Aa^
equivalent to
not
to
have
Matt.
xiii.
21
e.g.
Johnxiv.30.
4.
occurs also
looi
Barh. QQ,
Iljri
3.
With ^iD
flee,
are connected
oneself,
to
fear,
e.g.
guarding
xxiii. 40.
ix.
Luke
tj]
\Z'y
^
; ;
U''*2)f fearest
ii.3.
thou
Aj1>
not
God? John
oil-t>
^o;i2
^(jl^>
^^
;
that thou
shah escape
the judgment
of God;
oioijl]
I Cor. vi. 18
x.
14
Barh. 170, 4
;
Matt. x. 17.
l^i'lio
^SjD
beware of men
Xm^LOi
;
xvi. 6, 12
Luke
xii.
15; xx.
46
John
xvii. 15.
^
ii.
iii.
keep them
1
from
evil
I Peter
^>
abstain
from
Actsxv. 29
I Pet.
iv.l.
iN he ceasethfrom
3.
sin; Barh.102,9;
Assem.
42, 8; II Thess.
]a>n
^Qar:)iQaJ he
199
h)
failing
7
Luke xv.
;
16.
jCiOpM
;
^
;
ii.
Barh. 69,1
Tim.
fZoiiiCJi 18
;
^
^^^^i'
Ql4
II Tim.
c)
those of
askings
beseeching;
;
John
i v.
31.
OUiD 0001
11.
r-.*^^
besought him
Rem.
So
^So AaIo
^o c?tV
x. 1, 2.
With ^\l are construed verbs, which, in EngUsh, maj be followed by about, concerning, viz. a ) some which ex4.
;
me ;
xvii.
15
Eom.
^oAjI
;
^^^ji
xii.
\^ lio^
26.
ix.
15
xi.
82
Matt.vi.
why
raiment
Luke
^vi
;
]..>
to be
anxious
Matt.v.22.
^\k
^omoZ]
to rejoice
9,7 9?^
over
Eev.
xviii.20. ^o*l
to
p^ to weep
m>py
TmVpYYiii
Wv
.\Vn7|
ing
ty over
something
e. g.
Luke
xix. 14.
;
poi ^^iNs
^>>V7l>
;
that
this
Eom.
vi.
14
vii. 1
Barh. 40, 6
you
Luke
34
shall come
upon
i
.
Luke
c
)
i.
%a01q1Li
ASeu
those which
_7
Acts
vii. 58.
;
against
him
Matt. xxvi. 62
ivitness
viii.
;
John
i.
8.
iii.
^^
26
to
;
joifi^j
v. 31.
of,
of
the light
;
to
accuse
i.
John
;
46
^^ ^sAd
write
concerning,
John
46
v.
46
^^ paol
and
200
.* r
^5^
speak
of^
about
John
i.
e. g.
Matt.
|Oau^
Luke
i.
Ajik^l
-
|Z;aC3U
35.
>*^>
\^
^
;
the
power of
the
Most High
same
^"^^
e)
e.
signification
Jer.
xviii.
II
Sam.
xiii.
25.
And
finally;
;
command
or petition
^^
to
:
r^^
to
charge one
;
II
Chron. xxxvi.
xxii. 13.
23
^^ iiAD
to
I.
II
Kings
to
^^
;
plo
pray for
50,
6.
John
xvii. 9.
^ii ^|i
ask after
Assem.
Rem.
Here
also
;
e. g.
(Ol-^
5.
MJL O^s
0OtSi
V^j^
the
Lord
for
to
Barh. 77,
O^^^ [^xVn
i.
|Zo\ I
the
King
;
Isa.
14.
jl^JL
0001
me
Job
\\i.
20.
5.
With Aa^
Gen.
i.4.
ol iO and
po\
JJOIQJ ZujD
;
^/;ee?i light
and darkness
Euth
i.
17.
to see,
to
II
Sam.
xix.
35
Mai.
lii.
6.
With >Ao
to
after, are
to
go
(equivalent to
Ihey followed
follow
Matt.
iv. 25. x.
oijAo o^]]
Matt.
;
him;
xii.
;
15;
Mark
;
32;
iv. 19.
xix. 2
John viii. 12
>Ao ^ai>
Tim.
vi.
1 1
II Tim.
ii.
22.
PASSIVES
Rem.
AND THEIR
CONSTRUCTION".
the
201
find
More
;
in
accordance with
to
Hebrew idiom we
I
SAq
xiv.
Kings
10
General
Remarks.
as in
To
7
..
seern^
,
to appear^
are expressed,
Hebrew,
7 *?
bj
* 9
< *.KJLa
^*^
in
e. g.
Gen. xix.
sons-in-law
14.
;
11
iSn
JOOI
x, 3.
.aOlQjA** he seemed
to
his
II
Sam.
y^y. vo
(he)
seems
to thee.
When
>
by
the or had, 7 adjectives good **|!dZ( they are expressed either by ^7 iSO without ^ \SiM and \%'^% or
*
il
e. g.
;
Acts
vi.
5
P
Rom.
7-. 7
xv. 2. 3
1 1 f
Gen.
;
xxi.
11
Matt. xxi. 15
I. to
or in
connection with
^
N^)
e. g.
^
Ephr.
240, F.
loai
"
\i^% by
Vi;So
seem good
Sq-ksT
God f
In the trans-
lation of the
New Testament,
Matt. xvii. 25
is
usually expressed
12
;
^ lU*^
Luke
e. g.
xviii.
xxi.
28
7
xxii.17;
x. 36.
suffer,
7
To
by ^-oa
to
com;
mand, or
j^
;
eg.
that
Barh. 72, 12
manner
itself
III.
1.
The
e.g.
active cause
vi. 16.
viii.
usually expressed by
that they
^;
Matt.
]<
29.
>i^\ ^op^AJj
may
he
seen hy
msn ; Luke
was caught hy
202
him; Assem.
voice heard hy
39; 14,
;
and
16.
Uo
find
CJlL
M5^A1
there
was a
him
we
Rem.
Yet
also
^iO, Matt.
;
iii.
14.
>,ilV)>
flQlZ^ that
2.
I should
he baptized
of thee
v.
13
xx. 23.
Passives
whose
actives
govern
of
tliem
;
double
e. g.
accusai.
tive,
sometimes
retain
one
Luke
41.
\M^Qiy
ii.
filled v:ith
the
o^
Holy Ghost;
z(;a*
40
Bark
32, 14.
;
|Q^ ain\>
;
rr^yi
^^ ^^o
Assem.
I.
clad in Byssus
90. 14
108, 6
223, 15;
86,
A. 27, 28.
3.
When
;
passives,
especially in verbs
signification,
i.
relating
to the
I Thess.
2.
Rom.
to
ii.
^>oA|
;
to
iii.
recognize^
MSdA|
Tim.
ohey^
Eph.
vi. 1
Col.
22
*..;^^;2f to wish, I
vi. 10.
Rem.
Here
xi.
also
9)Q..Z(
to
chew the
cud, Lev.
3,5
and hence
may
be explained
why
participle*
( 21, 2
Gl.Z|
22. 2
24.2
58. A. a)
e. g.
John
;
viii. 6.
;
AxiA^
7
;
V^OA-i
verse 8
^hose
Mark
i.
Tim.
v. 14.
;
^y^o?P
iv.
4^? ^-^^T
to
who
marry
11
;
13
^ool>jZ1
wax
strong,
;
Acts
xxiii.
wkJL^Zl
to hide,
John
viii.
59
wuiaZ}
etc.
Rem.
Many neuters
e.
g.
pL^
to
203
to
Luke
xxi. 8.
fC^Z
|Sn\
1x^7
-rXavri^^TS
;
^iujk
hum,
iii.lO.
jQjLS ^i,ni
>\2LJ to fall,
12.
|>Q12 \\2^
^x3X*]&rjo'ovr(x
slg rr\jp
^aXksron
0L3
^0
^0
ot^, viii.
^GLQ2LJ
etc.
Upon
1.
Appendix
to
67.
Composites.
sitions,
belongs
also the
manner
of rendering
Greek Composites,
New
ed as follows
1.
By
the idea
xx.
of
the
Greek
is
included
e.
g.
Matt.
18.
2.
ij^
iONfO
viii. 1.
AmJ
fD xara/3avr<
;
iii.
Q^oZ
b
)
jxsravosrrs
QlL^ sifsXa^ovro
or
by verbs which
Greek verb
e. g.
Matt.
;
xi. 5.
^V*^
ava/3XsVou(j'
Acts
xxiii.
33.
;
Q^OU
x.31,32.
avaoovTsg
Rom.
14. 9.
;
^.js avs^yjCsv
5.
Luke
xv. 24,
32
r^^
avTi-jrctpr^X^sv
Acts xxvi.
^-^r^
"TTpo^jvwrfxovTS^
Rom.
2.
XV. 4.
dA2dZ|
^irposypacpYi.
By
verbs
e.g.
^noo\ = avTi
avrco
;
Luke
xiii.lY.
^
;
>
o^
01 avrixsj/xsvoi
Acts vi.lO
CTl-^
Rom.xiii.2.
iiti
andxara;
Matt.
Luke
x. 34.
u01QX^
^Osij^Z] xa;
iirsii.s'kyj^y]
ajTou
xxvj.62.
yI
^Cll
(j'Ov ;
Rom.
204
vi.8.
PECULIARITIES OF VERBS.
OlSni pjJ
;
(fo^rt(foiisv
avru),
Heb.
iv.
15
o''
II Tim.
i.
8.
^^O
fyjutwv
;
"TTpo
Acts
9
;
vii.
40.
)
>V)rO ^Q-^lp?
f^pofTopsCffovron
Matt.
tJLAyy
ii.
or
by an adverb of similar
Peter
i.3;
signification
e.
g.
So ==
avtt, I
Heb.
vi. 6.
^O*^^
Rom.
i.
^=
2
;
<po
i.
II Cor.
xiii.
ZjioV^Oi^
^
he-
flrpos/py)xa
Col.
5.
3.
By
stands
first,
particle,
e.
in the
same
( to
tense,
verb
g.
^^O
e,
come
vii.
==
iii.
-rrpo
Mark
35.
xiii.
23.
^^|
vitOfO
rrposiprixa,
Acts
52;
Rom.
xi.
g.
John
xx. 4.
4.
If the
it is
composite
is
verb,
usually resolved
components
4.
e.
g.
Mark
iv.
20.
>*^<Ti*
xap<7ro(popou(fiv
m.
* -*^^ Of
-*^(^^
^*^vVr>x
|J
ctyaSo'jroivjfl'ai
>;
xaxoiforf}(fai
Zo^OlfiO
lOlfioZ
I^QA
Rem.
oj
v]/Suoo/xap-ruprjfl'g'.
It
iv. 4.
^is'pp^stf&ai is
by ;*^M |i-H?*
68.
The Substantive
Verb,
and some
other
Peculiarities
of
the Verb,
A.
Use or looi
to
( 38).
Instead of looi
he (with
INDIRECT
also uses L^}
DISCOURSE.
205
LJ^
with
suffixes,
(looi),
e.g.
John
ix.24.
|OCfl %uOloAji1
he was;
were, etc.
preterit,
i.45.
is
without giving
it
e.g.
Mark
(OOl
^\M
he
began
Luke
i.
John
iii.
25.
It
sometimes omitted as present or imperfect, according to 54. a mere copula between the subor when it would be 2
;
ject
and
i.2'7.
object
It
e.
g.
Matt,
xxvii.
29
65.
III.
Rem.)
Luke
Philoxenian
John
vi. .32.
^0*^\
;
^QU IsQLo
11,
e.
(OOl
]j
xiii.
18
g.
Heb.
ii.5,16
xiii.
interrogations
jJ
with
not ?
,
jj
= nonne
;
Matt.
xi.
55.
xvii.
POI locn
17.
is this
xx. 13
Mark
vi.
Luke
40
Concerning fOOl
to
have
not
to
have,
compare 67.
II.
Rem.
B.
Indirect Discourse.
is
usually expressed
ot< ),
directly,
iv.
1
= ^^
;^
;
e.
g.
John
7.
IQ .^ A^> -^^
no husband ;
I have
;
verse 53
ii.
17
vi.
31
AlSoij
;k>1"
p as he said;
the
is
I {he)
ij
{I will)
Rem.
he
no King of
>
Sometimes
wanting
_p
)
;
e.g.
e. g-
443, 8
183,9
219,5
;:
206
243, 10
;
ELLIPSIS,
486, 5
1.
ZEUGMA,
ETC,
I.
543, 19
596, 11.
Compare Assem.
479, A.
The
e. g.
Barh.
]iy^
.OOlL
O'^Xihey
3
;
for
94, 1
97, 1.
e.
Sometimes the
276, 8
g.
10 and
vice versa
166, 19, 20
513,
5, 6.
C.
1.
Ellipsis
ZeugmaParonomasia,
and Puns.
When
it is
would proper-
ly be repeated
e. g.
Matt.i.22.
^>
IjOl
might be
;
fulfil-
xxi.
4;
Eom.
v.
20
QiCDJj
;
^^01)9
6.
may
obtain
II Cor. v. 13
iii.
Heb.
vii.
viii.
John
is
to
be supplied from
^\
as
it
{is written
in our
law.
Rem.
The
ellipsis
must be considered
riac language,
Greek words
;
e.
g.
Matt
i.
22.
LOCn
OL^ ^>
John
;
xx. 31.
Con-
^|
see
B. Rem. above
and concerning
Rem.
its signification,
2.
Sometimes a verb, by
can belong to
another
verb must
be mentally
suppHed;
207
Job
IV. 10.
^\CiLL\ 1jl0
(jiilj
of the lion
3.
{is stilled)
and
The former
Ps.
xi.
Hebrew
original in
^5S:"}^
3.
^Oj^o
see it
lU^
rejoice.
^ovmJj
( Ti^^^'i")
d^5-i
in
that
many
and
names
alteration to
{thy
e.g.
Gen.
xlix. 8.
fOjQJ
(joou Judah
CHAPTER THIRD.
The Noun.
69.
1.
Use of
the
Noun
in General.
place of adjectives
genitive
to
relation of
iii.
the
with
e. g.
Matt.
11.
!>;*>
'^vt
is
composed
Heb.
e. g.
John
ii.
6.
water-pots
ix. 4.
p30i>> l^^xio
208
4
;
II Tim.
7.
ii.
20
Barh. 11,
7,
10
88, 2
172, 8
228,
pillar.
Rem.
Adjectives
I;
e.g.
Barh. 59,4.
|!uZ\JkMJ
i^rnf a brazen
and
in the
same con-
jQ^^y
Abstract nouns with
place
of the
>
\Lf^M week of
in connection
predicate; e.g.
;
Rom.
vii.
p|
;fiQ^>
a) pf
Heb.
tAJf
but
I am
carnal
or
noun
is
to be supplied
e.
g.
1*7.
|Ol--^r^
one
in divine
things
;
) ;
Luke
viii.
49.
J^
tjLJ^y
of the household
even
with
suflSxes,
a010)(A9
(Jajjaovj^ofASvof.
Some
following,
g.
;
Barh.
195,16.
170,
20.
172, 4
178, 5
^D'JkSi
the
according to 55. B.
2.
Rem.
expressed bj
way
Z;q
by means
of
the nouns
\d son
^\lO and
y^
lord,
master;
and
LkJOi house.
;
to
be observed
designates
a)
Tit.
_P ._V
i.
'fCi
a)
e. g.
12.
"7
|iZ(
wkl^
;
oS svro'tioi
|Al.k^ >i1Q
;
citizens;
91, 2
(3)
kindred
;
e.g.
Rom.
xi.l4.
I'rlCLD 'r^
a kinsman
Deut. xxiii.2
I Cor. vii.22.
p^m jo
209
Michael.
..7
a freeman
Chr. 5.
John
1**7
ii.
xviii. 35.
.rft>cr>;m
^^ a
14,
heretic ;
Assem. 11.248.
^4^ r^
Eph.
iii.
l(>7
courtier ;
Eev.
20.
y) participation^
|ZoZ;-i
likeness^
(=
;
e.
g.
;
6.
;
^jJLO
tfu/xXyipovojxof
I Thess.
;
ii.
14
i.
Acts
10.
xviii. 3
XIX. 24.
(ZaiiOOf
;
\i
;
hixorsx^og
Dan.
14
;
temporaries
Phil. iv. 3
Gal.
i.
^) locality^ 1.
f
e.g. Isa.
xxvi.
jcm
\i^
a moat;
s
;D
a neck chain.
7
And
;
finally;
;
\ti forthwith^
immediately
Matt,
20
John
v. 9
xiii.
30
Acts x. 33
xxi. 32.
h)
L'f^ plur.
AuD forms
1>|a*
p>1 A;^
feminine;
circumcision;
e.
,^)
more frequently
7.
concretes
in the
g.
I Mace. xi.
or
it
denotes;
grapes^
?;ozce
;
e.
g.
\K% l/\^
h^
|ASQa L'^
gum
on sea-weed
and
tropically
]jo Z;i
Rom.
22
;
and in the
plural,
;
Acts
xii.
7) implements^ clothing^
;
1>^
xiii.
2;^
1
ring
^) descendants^
nations^
;
e.
g.
Luke
6.
^Ol'rOl ZjO
^Ae
Hebrews
Matt. xxi.
o.
^QaGl
L\Ci
Jeru-
^^^io denotes
a)
;
mostly concretes
Matt. v. 25
;
;
e. g.
Rom.
;
xi. 34.
]^V^ ^^^
xiv. 5.
counselor
xiii.
28,
39
II Chron.
;
^) sometimes nations
e. g.
n<^vr>
\vo an
Ethiopian.
vii.
In like manner
J)
V3^ Luke
;
41.
lioJ
1jk>
o?e6tor
Ephr.
II.
360,
e)
kOi forms
a) principally concretes
of masculine offices
210
e.
GENDER OF
Sam.
xviii. 1.
;
NOCJNS.
g. II
1^-^
Heb.
;
5>
14.
a chiliarch
1
Luke
Luke
xvi.
1.
\L^
*Q>
oixovo'fxof
iv.
^QD
;
;
^S
app^ispsuj
I Pet. V.
Luke
xix. 2
^) abstracts
e. g.
xvi. 2.
(ZoAx^ Asj
oixovo/xj'a.
In like manner
/
41.
akA)
a) concretes of
masculine
;
offices
ii.
e. g.
Luke
ii.
viii.
|AQlO iAa)
;
apx'C-^va/w/oj
John
8,
;
9;
e. g. it
Acts
29;
I Thess. iv. 16
6.
^)
more
rarely abstracts
Matt, xxiii.
;
^ZoilD ^MuS
'?rpwToxa^s(5pa.
Sometimes
pLoo^tt)!
the
denotes
y)
the extremity of a
thmg
e.
g.
**-) orz^ice
c/^^e
stomach
g)
P->A
<.aj9 aperture
;
of
mouth.
Finally
in
f
LmJ^ denotes
is
;
a)
which
thing
prison
found or kept;
Acts.
xii.
17.
;
r*.CD|
Clm^
19
Matt
xiv. 2.
lAlk) ZuT)
^rai;e
Acts
xvii.
olive
Luke
xix. 29.
fZui
AxS
;
gar
Heb.
ix. 4.
iv.
|^^"^*^
AjlQ censer
countries^
^^e
(literally,
house of in
e.g.
;
cense);
I.
II Tim.
13
/3)
cities, etc.
Assem
169, B. 7,
lliDoai) Aj-O
i?oma?i c?ommioy2-s
I
Michael
Chr. 10.
I^EM.
UcdI^
A^
Persia.
7
^>cnj Aa.2
Mesopotamia^
Ajl2
signifies between.
More
moth-
we
and
^|
Of
(Sol <Ae
croi^rz- o/"
^A^ head,
and
The Syriac also, though more rarely than the Hebrew, uses the names of countries and cities for nations and
SiDj Pib| hydraulics.
inhabitants
e. g.
*al'^1 Africans
248, 6.
A^r.alZ Tagritians.
70.
1.
Gender of Nouns,
the plural take the
Nouns which
in
termination of
GENDER OF NOUNS.
another gender
( 44.
211
Kem. 2 and
3),
rarely
had
to the
Here belong
in
Tnasculines
;
with a femiMatt.
is
nine
termination
the
plural
e. g.
xii.
43.
*OOlO Aa^
I Cor. X.
9.
(
m^>
(ZoOm
no water;
them;
OfOOf
ii.
VZoSlL from
IZojou (from
*.
i>
PU)
1>CJU)
Luke
Matt.
13
fALooI
from tool
xxi.
34;
l2cin^ (from
vii.
t^)
etc.
Luke
;
25, 26.,
;
h) ferainines
^QAa> >mr>vVn%
{4I* (from
..77
e. g.
John
xi. 35.
^^T
;
..y
^001
Matt.
^Ae ez/^5
of Jesus
\k^)
xiii.
30;
N*
2.
When
or
when
gender in both
cases,
is
regulated
by
the sense.
80.
g.
compare
e.
B
;
belongs
John
4.
ivas the
word; verse 14
or ]li
;
ZcLm
Barh.
of tooth)
avr/p^pjCTocr,
Eev.
;
xiii. 1
xvi. 2,13;
;
xvii. 7, 8.
ao>
;
Acts xxi. 20
65, 9,
iants
;
10
334, 6
395, 19.
;
U^J,
in the plural,
= inhabi'
is
3.
as of verbs,
e.
desig18.
66. 2
;
g.
Eom.
Assem.
vii.
I.
|Ao4
a^a^ov, IAajlQ
xaxov
in the plural,
218.
212
B. 11.
the
NUMBER.
IZZh^O lAOAAil n>\fr>|
they despised the old
and
new.
71. Number,
1.
Some
of as consisting of several
f^^IX)
;
barley^ plur.
barley-corns ;
iii.
in
vi.
like
manner
\^ from
;
|A4** wheat
|f^
Matt.
12
John
12.
13
I Cor. XV. 37
2.
and
^i7?26er ;
I Cor.
iii.
{col-
6. 2.
As
iv.
e. g.
John
on^uo
John
there
x. 3.
8.
sAeep
hear his
voice
verses 4
Rem.
occur,
1.
As
collective
plural forms,
the following
;
sometimes
l^iQO
63,11
79, 6.
lAiiD (proper-
ly />ar^) remainder^
members
102,
5, 8.
Rem.
2.
As
by im-
m.7
itation of the
Hebrew olJ)!
or
^0>|
i^lJ^
Pf po^
.feJ0>pO
72. Apposition
1.
A noun
more accu-
APPOSITION
AND DUPLICATION.
cities
|
,
213
IAli,!!},
example
Assem.
city.
its
I.
in
the
3.
names of
f
]Lk\0^ lAo),
>
349,
Aoi
lAju,iD
>
^n
^ i]
Antioch, a great
The
number and
case of
subject
;
e. g.
Matt
7.
x. 3.
fpft^Vn
^Alo
lican
Barh. 32,
image
12,
2.
PP7 filMn
of Baal
{of a) god of
-ni-r
Babylonians
11,
>
*ny\
Melchisedeck
{from
the)
Ca-
naanite.
Rem.
Sometimes
noun;
e.
stands before
'\LtS\
the
principal
Barh.
;
39,
11.
ai0;X
^f^mj
measure^
and
I
e.
g.
Rev.
vi. G.
,lDQn^CLD jA^Z
r^^>
2.
three
measures {of)
barley.
The
duplication of the
;
noun denotes
III. 154.
a)
ber or quantity
e. g.
Ephr.
_J|QJ ]ialo
;
^.iJQJ
^Aere are
many
h)
e. g.
the distributive
Matt. xx.
9,
by
;
each^ by
10.
pj9
;1aj
;
a penny each
424,
e. g.
Barh. 85,
6.
-^^
^-^^
Jy Aeap5
10
165, 19.
vi. 7.
;
Especially in respect to
^^<;o
numbers
Mark
^>Z ^>Z
eacA
c)
e. g.
verse 40.
It
)]iD
a hundred each
all^
II Cor. xi. 24
( 58. B. 2)
;
;
it
forms a
circumlocution for
7.
every
toVouj
Matt. xxiv.
Tit.
i.
5.
e.
yLk^
g.
U->n^^^
ii.
xara <6Xv
6? )
diversity^
;
variety
Mark
Acts
17
46.
;
John
;
v.
x.
^Vo
1.
xxi.
34
xxv. 19
Assem.
A.
6.
v.
E.
!>o^
;
!>o^o
^j
E
]]^]^
;
191,
A.
7. v.
280.
2 14
B. 13. V.
e.g.
( 77.
B. b)
John
vi. 7.
^^uu^ \V^\r^
very
little
II Thess. iii6.
tState,
The Emphatic
with
this
is
State
expresses the
article
less definiteness,
from the
fact,
many
nouns
form
which
also
it
no longer in use
e. g.
Matt. x.
9.
Sometimes
;
e. g.
John
iv. 7.
^"^^^ _Sd
; ix.
fZAjf
vii.
;
ZZ|
tJiere
maria
\f^
Acts
37
e.
xi.
24
fern,
appended
g.
Luke
Ir^yf
a man.
Rem.
From
is
this should
which r^
2.
used numerically
e. g.
Eph.
r
iv. 6.
Hence
to avoid
is
also
sometimes
it
as
noun
e. g.
001
it
;
mSo
e.
the
dumb spake
v.
9.
John
Ir^yi
xviii.
16
or
the
fol-
lows
g.
John
001
SoNnZf
man
became whole.
Rem.
In
the
first
7
case
;
the
g.
absolute
state
usually
occurs,
7
when
the
follows
001
e.
Luke
xxii.
27.
tASDiklD)
001
servant.
3.
Hence
also
following
xviii.
is
e.
g.
Rev.
2.
215
]Zpn4
devils
l**0'
^^? U>q4J0
all
I<^-??
U'A^
<^
habitation of
and a hold of
unclean
spirits.
and
the Genitive.
In
tlie
state
serves to denote
in the
where
it
special
form
e.g.
;
^><^
7.. p
,.feVoQ^
^i^
of
.
since the
the sea ;
7
days of John
xiii. 48.
(^
I. 2,
;
^<^rc\
the shores
I .
-57
B.
1.
Acts xxiv. 16
Assem.
first
|r^0
^A^Z
Al*
-i01
year
;
S7, 3, 4. ,rftn>\r%
AlV)n
clerus
40, 4.
the
.om/niVr>>m Zo;-i^
deficiency of their faith.
the
deficient
faiih^
literally,
Rem.
before
Yet
the
genitive
the
construct
the
state
;
e.
g.
Matt.
x.
41.
]i^1 y)an
<m
the shore
in the
name of
;
Prophet
xiii. 2.
of the sea
of
7
verse 50.
adjectives
etc.
;
supply
r
the place
69. 2
it
also
;
occurs
iii.
in
Q.. midst,
e.
g. Matt. xiii. 1
Gal.
19
^ju^h^ ^it^
Here
or
by which
7
e.
g.
3.
Luke
a
i.
28. |i1*^
7"
-
AHijO
of (among) women
;
Tim.
iii.
|A>i;^
Tim.
i.
10.
violator of
an oath
or
a.
more accurate
216
definition
or
participle
e.
g.
Luke
i.
Y,
18.
in their years ;
;
Rev. xiv. 4,
- < >
*^l
2.
a)
state as
e. g.
nomen
regens^
with a following
\**So\i
Matt. X.
5.
ys^i^y
into the
way
of the Gentiles;
;
verse 15.
xii. 42.
(J^jj
]!iDa*-Q at the
day of Judgment
;
verse 42;
11,
tliOuiZj
;
lAai^LD
;
the
xiii.
45;
xxiii.
35
xxiv. 3
h)
John
viii.
1oil^> ]JL0
the
word of
xii.
God
or
referring to the
g.
genitive
following,
55.
B.
e.
Matt.
8.
xi.2.
|>
laV)? .^mn ^v
of the Messiah
xu.
40.
P^Jlj
Ol^J^O
^^
heart
of the earth.
Rem.
Rarely,
state
and
chiefly
in foreign words,
>
construct
before
^^^
the
genitive
e.
g.
;
Matt.
xiii.
22.
23.
9ZqJL)
"^^C
or
deceitfulness
the jjorch
of
riches
John
it is
x.
iOV)>\> |n(^mf
used
of Solomon.
But
commonly
nomen
when one
more words
;
e.g.
Barh. 421.13,20.
;
that
is
of Jerusalem
other
;
or
itives
.
follow
each
e.
g.
Assem.
83,
B.
21.
i^iOfol?
the
V^
Ll^J
the
l*^)
Scythian
desert
Barh. 81,
is
2.
is
the genitive
7
then to be distinguished by j
e. g.
Rom.
xiv. 8.
_Lm t^>
genitive
;
the
Lords are we
Sometimes
is
Matt.
xii.
39.
|>*^1
^GU9
the prophet,
names
217
acquire a
more de
e. g.
1, 6.
|fOCrLi9
^QmJ^ L.k^
Bethlehem in Judea.
scriptions of
plies
some Psalms
e. g.
Ps.
iv, v, vi,
;
^
^^c)
(^ auctoris) sup-
e.g.
Barh. 17,
4.
T.
H;>r>\ [109Q)
346, A. 25, 26.
cated
;
iAe deliverance of
6y
Lord ; Assem.
is
indi-
e.g.
)1^U^
;
^ 1^1*^
when
1.
,^iV>/i nrni
is
he took fifty
of the Franks
or
there
indicated a
|Jmo.
e.g.
271,
*^G10,l1 ^Sd
|
one
q/*
his slaves ;
270,18.
[aDjOL ^LO
(i*-j^
3.
The
genitive
22.
is
e.g.
Markxi.
ii.
m) God
John
vii.
17.
j^AjlDJ Olll^
xi.
2^a?
of
(i.
13
Hebr.
26.
(i>iaV)>
ai,fni>i
reproach
of
him).
imitating the
;
Rem.
Other
I
turns
*^
of expression
cities
Hebrew
are
"
% p" .
Isa. xvii. 2.
;-t^0;^)
Pi9QO
of (about) Aroer
the
Exod.xxii.il.
Ez.
V;]^>
OlASDOSb an oath of
KiQik iniquity
is
{by)
Lord
;
xxxv.
5.
001^>
of
{at) their
downfall
object
Isa.liv.9., etc.
Not
unfrequently
this
genitive
of the
connected
is
with the
derived
;
e. g.
Barh. 53,
1.
1&.
t^SOO) fZoiV)>ai
the faith in
our Lord
Assem.
4.
347,20.
where apposition
g.
would be more
strictly
correct
e.
;
Acts
;
vii.
40.
xi.
A> ^isDj
8
;
Pk> I J5iD
13.
from
the
land of Egypt
xx. 6
Eom.
Barh. 114,
the whole
mountain
of Lebanon,
218
5.
adjectives,
the genitive
is
often used
merely
to define
them more
i\)
.
accurately; e.g.
Luke
xxiv. 25.
(l
>rr>>>
o|
Acts
vii.
51.
UrJO i
iT)
love.
0|
ye 5^yf necked
Cant.
ii.
5.
Rem.
Sometimes a noun
e.g.
in the genitive
fl *
of an
adjective;
xxi. 6
John,
xviii. 10.
;
V)i>
OUjf
his
right ear;
;
e.
( 54. B- 2.
iv.
Rem.)
and
nomen regens
John
ii.
g.
Luke
first
25.
|Aj^9|
(-^yeCI^
rroWai
x^p^'
12.
In the
>,
the explanae. g.
tory
TR.
OOl and
P 1 >
i-iOl,
equivalent
J
is
to
that
is,
namely
0U9|
A>
to
be understood
;
as a relative,
when
17. 55.
it
follows
with
suflBxes
e.
g.
Assem.
I.
30,
|<ysoorft,o^[^
the bishops.
Compare
B.
3.
75.
1.
Designation
other Cases,
The
for their
common
;
sign,
e.
g.
Matt.
cles ;
let ics
make
three
tdbema-
cution.
No
difficulty
is
when
21.
the
two
cases
stand
together
e. g.
;
Acts
xx. 32.
( 67.
I.
xiii.
^0U
2)
falls
away
in
both cases.
The same
the
is
also to
verb
( 55.
Usually
219
==
];^j}^ )
stands
;
before the
noun
in
the
emphatic state
JOI il\
e. g.
Barh. 14, 9
GILO
La
he built Nineveh.
J^j^
For
I.
this, in
Gen.i.
3,
=
ii.
(compare Ephr.
iii.
Eccl.
17
iv. 1
viii. 9,
17
Cant.
iii.
viii. 4.
2.
The
;
accusative
is
notes
vii.
a) direction
towards a place
;
e.
g.
John
Barh.58, 18,19;
6) in
indicating
time
6.
denotes
a) the question,
jocyi the
How
3, 15, 16.
^OIqSa o\^12t
;
a hundred years
18,
24, 7, 8
?
85, 19,
i.
20
195,
Assem.I.
]o(3\
it
A.]
to
/3)
When
Luke
59.
;
]IlV)Z?
i.
^all
came
pass on
;
the eighth
c)
day
Ps.
2.
f.4^^0
(Solna
hy
;
in reference to measure
etc.
;
and weight
How
]iiDl
long ?
How
it
high ?
e. g.
looi j^j]
179,
13.
lAliZ
loas
three
cubits
^^^
6;
^ICi
MO)
he
*qAji
Kr^
to,
deep;
d) concerning^ in relation
as
to ;
Barh. 37,16.
\a2xm
|001
A^QD
I.
ivas
beautiful
eyes
as
to
form
17.
>Q11
38, 4;
]S0Q2)0
(ijkl he
had small
;
Assem.
Rem.
74,
A. 30
77,
A. 22
86,
A.
25.
In
L*^
~
indicating time,
How
old ?
is
commonly expressed by
;
yd
or
I
e.
g.
John
viii.
57.
'^^^^^ *^
3.
Barh.
3, 20.
a) participial forms;
Heb.
220
xii. 2.
James
iv.6
forms
e.g.
Kirscli.Chr.136,1.
tln m V)
XX vi.
89, 42.
viii.
]naV>
;
.]
-
^jl^I
my
Father
;
if
it
he
possible
ii.
Rom.
15
partly
;
by
o], prefixed
;
e.
g.
;
Rom.
James
1.
M^'r^ o]
man
verse 3
I Tim.
vi.
11
V. 1.
Rem.-
imitates in
;
vocative termination
Luke
i.
3,
and Acts
5.
1.
Tim.
vi.20.
distinguishable
by the
preposi-
Rem.
ner
;
Time,
g.
I.
When
viii.
is
man9
;
e.
Gen.
11.
[a^^
Ir^^^
"^
eventide ; Prov.
vii.
Assem.
3Y, A. 11.
76.
meant a noun, which, at the beginning of a sentence, by itself and without connection with what follows, forms a clause, and is usually to be exthe case absolute
plained
By
by supplying,
especially
;
05
fe,
concerning^
and the
like.
Here
belong
1.
a)
e.
subject of
aG1 %S|
g.
Gen.
xxii. 24.
L^^O .
OlA209>0 and
his concubine
221
to
be rendered by an oblique
case,
wbich a
be
;
suffix
shows
to
a)
a gen-
e.g.
Ephr.
I.
242, E.
p Jaj]
man a
|A>y^\r^ i^ there be
found on
Matt.
;
body of a
blemish
I.
110,
iii.
sition indicates it as
^)
a dative
I
e. to
g.
I Cor. vii.
is
7.
Igu^
^^
\^
each one
given a
gift from
God
Acts xv. 21
/)
an accusative ;
13
e. g.
Ephr.I.
223, F.
lohat
ft)
^OUOOl Uk)
^l>j ^JLlr-^
;
1Qi)D
loe
hnovj not
17;
( 67. 1. c.
an
.^ and
e.g.
Heb.
x. 1.
is
the
shadow of
ll'rSjoi^
o/"
good things
come
1]'
Ephr.
I.
237,
|Ld>qo
oiisi ^aaflo2
lioj ^\oo
bring
;iV7>>
to
^
the
A.
ye
no gift
The
accusative
absolute;
e.
g.
Gren.
xlvii.
21.
\\Cl^ TpO ^So .Qj| .^is JSOI^O the people led he (literally led
he
it)
to the other.
2^'^'
3.
ivith
]]'
^positions
e.
g.
Gen.
ii.
Olli
0/
^/^e
^QofZ
ifree
VAjlilOJO^
l^i? l^U?
U^V
^
;:
17.
thou not
eat.
Rem.
Sometimes,
is
instead
;
of the
g.
suffix,
vi.
the
7
absolute
repeated
e.
Esth.
|;i:i.h^
^2uw^
%j>010.a
i*^\lO as for
;
the
man
thus
let
him
be clothed
e.
g. Jer. xxvii. 8.
222
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
77.
Comparison of
A.
Adjectives,
The
Comparative.
Tlie comparative
is
usually expressed
by the simple
ad-
jective,with^LD
pared
e. g.
John
53.
.obl
AjV
^y
Ajf
lioik
;
^0\\i\ art
81;
xiii.
Abraham
me
vii.
16; xiv. 12
xix. 11;
Assem.
is
I.
878, 19.
to
w^ioV
than the
(A^^D
queen
;
^So
372,
..A.^
pD^
^.y another
dearer
8. v.
fr^/.
^OOl!^
^O
zvas
Rem.
Besides
;
^Lo,
is
sometimes also
J^^
very,
or
\jAa more^
equivalent to by far,
the
in order to strengthen
meaning
^Ijif
e.
g.
kOOU)
is
\l^\}
^OIQ^Q^
receives;
^CQJ>
Heb.
iii.
^^happier by far
iv.
he
12.
The simple
adjective
;
used as a comparative
Ez. xvi.
61.
in stating the
age
of two persons
e.
g.
A^QJ>
sisters,
since
and
the
younger
Barh. 27,
to
6, 7.
e. g.
Job
xi. 1
more frequent
1
1
is
^Sd
too ;
g.
Deut.
xiv. 24.
<^ the
way
;
is too
e. g.
great
for
iv.
thee ; or before
an
infinitive
with
^=
than that
it
Gen.
13.
-<"^*^*^^
^!Ld
|Oj
can be forgiven.
;
e.
g.
Lam.
iv. 7.
]n\M
^d OjOiaO
Xy^^
The
^^
adverbial
more or
less^
in
expressed
^^^;
Barn,
166, 2
Assem.
I.
414, 3.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
223
The Superlative,
;
a)
by the
;
positive^
with
plural
e.g.
;
I Cor. xv.9.
.0019Q11
tlie
least
of
the Apostles
or with 0 in-
e. g.
Matt.ii.6.
|90aLi>
p\^*^
;
Ir'^^
among
the {princes)
;
towns in
Judah
or simply
the least
by
e.g.
Matt. v.l9.
1^^^
A.
Barh.
)x!^1> 1Aq>
;
]Al-,iD
wilO0> Rome^
;
of Italy
or
Assem.
1.
323' A. 20
335,
;
14. v.
in the
plural, ICor.vi.2.
]OrQy
sXa^jtfra
is
when a
preference
whole
species,
Ephr.I. 204, C.
h)
^^
;
e. g.
;
adjective or noun, so that the latter the relation of genitive in the plural e.g. Gen.ix.25. stands in
;
by doubling the
the
^^,Q\ r^l
530,
iest
meanest slave
i.
e.
<
the holiest
>
^>QO %M0fO
iii.
32
Barh.
|_nAV)
c)
\ .^sD
i.e.
the might;
king;
by <^4 ^^^
|
;-Aa
e. g. ;
To
;
is
made
of the words
and |jSD;
physician
Assem.
like the
335,
B.
4, 5.
pilM9> |;l0
;
the
most mercifJCL^
ful
more
the
Hebrew, by
laC^
I
7
e. g.
Ps. xxxvi. 6.
|0u^
mountains of God^
is
i.e.
In verbs,
a strengthening
denoted by
. (D much
;
e.g.
vmJ^iZI
c. (i)
;
I . (Y)
he was
6,
much
135,
disquieted
1.
or,
by 29 many
e.g.
Barh.
To be noted
(is
OlASjQQjaj,
literally,
whose wisdom
known) for
the wisest.
224
CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS.
78.
Construction
of Numerals ( 50).
A,
Cardinal Numbers.
The cardinals from three upwards, are connected with nouns in the following manner a) the object numbered pre;
e.g.
Luke
i.56.
lA^Z
"p^p-a
months
;
Barh. 133,
16.
^Z>Zo
4, 5.
it
or
b)
taV^nO ^Zl^D pJ- two hundred and five years; follows in the absolute state e. g. Matt. x. 29.
;
^^>,^
^Z>Z
^i^o
;
twelve baskets
John
^aXi^QO ^TQljZ Sparrows; xiv. 20. Acts xx. 3 Barh. 135, 10. v. 5
;
Rem.
Exceptions
;
however, occur, the object numthe number in the emphatic state e. g. Barh.
to this rule,
;
160,17.
164, 4
Ir^ ^A^iL
or
;
VilV>Z
Matt.
iv.
121,8;
ten cities^
.7
-R
e.
g.
25.
|Al-..*pLD
Z^Q1
as
of the
cities).
pDQj, \Lim
I.
also follow
the 77- X7 the singular *P77 numeral inOp^^? ivhen ^V^-. 22. (SdQu p>jO
>
'
e. g.
Assem.
213, A, 21,
^7^
fifty-one
by pD and L'^
;
7.7
I]k5
37*7, 1
;
Ephr.I.195,D
Barh.
5, 12.
Barh.
'^
.m^ktO
_iAsO
0)16
hundred and
sixty-five years
old.
For the
combination of numerals without any numbered object, compare 50; in respect to which it is to be noticed that, contrary to the He e. g. Num. iv. brew usage the smaller numbers follow the larger numbers, see 43; 1 Kings V. 11. Concerning suflSxes to cardinal 8 46. 2. b.iiem.
;
B.
1.
Ordinal Numbers.
in the
e. g.
(Z'^^Soo
CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS.
225
Eev.
iv.
|i\\> lA>v> A;
vi. 9.
iji
the fourth
|ia>V)>> \Li^
verse 12
xvii. 11.
as follows
cardinal numbers also supply the place of ordinals a) a) the units, especially in designating time noun standing before the numeral in the emphatic with the
2.
;
;
The
state plural
hour
state
/3)
John xix. 14. A |l-* y^\ about the sixth with the noun after the numeral, in the absolute
;
e. g.
e. g.
John
;
iv. 6.
,^aSi
A*
*jkOaiA^|
it
was
the
sixth
hour
h)
verse 52
Acts
iii.
x. 9,
30
in
construct state
teenth year ;
e.g.
Luke
2,
iii.
1.
|,fr>v^<^>.
AimO
in the fif-
in the
A.
1. 2,
v.E.
;
IrmLosb
p. 8,
>
^^ Alas
;
seventeenth year
;
388, 3
889,
state
1, 3, 5;
;
407, 10
or with
emphatic
e.g.
Barh.
4, 16.
t^^J
c)
"l^ilLj
J
the
e. g.
^S*-t
the second;
verse 39
Luke
xii.
88.
t^h
o]
^L^l^
second or the third ; especially in designating the years of the reign of a sovereign; e. g. Barh. lO, 14; 11, 1;
86,
n.
Rem. Sometimes also, in accordance with Hebrew usage, the object numbered is repeated after the numeral in the absolute state
plural
ijear;
;
e.g.
Gen.
vii.ll.
^1^
\y^ As AUlQ
^^J
with a
suffix
g.
00, 8.
is
In giving the days of the month, either *D without repeated after the numeral, before the name of the month
^Q^
;
e.
g.
Assem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E. ^ijA^ VrO^^^SAo on the ISth of san{Aprii); 272,B.31 or, reversely, after the 399,19,20 407,8,9 name of the month, before the numeral following it ; e. g. 397, 13.
; ; ;
M-
June
or
with
^OjbO
226
before
RELATIONS OF NCJMBERS.
the numeral and the
;
name
of the
month which
follows with
JD
repeated
e. g.
398,
7.
;
^cL-Q
y>Qx;0
g.
on the 21 tk of December
stands after the
14.
that
;
name
Oli ^ ^"rr\\n
Matt, xxviii.
I. 2,
^jl ^OuD
gust.
e.g.
^ ^m^^
e.
399,
[^O
v.
^m
the first
day of
the
week
John
xx.
19; A.ssem.
B. 12.
E!
C
numbers
1. Distributives are
formed
e.
a)
by doubling
40
;
the cardinal
;
( 72. 2. b)
g.
Mark
vi.
Barh. 19, 14
^ijD
;
b)
e.
g.
Barh.
r^
each
a) in
17.
Numerical adverbs
How
it
many
times f (Multiplicatives)
cardinal
number
following,
7 7
a) by which more
,**
and Q before a
defines
'clearly
IP
\^mn fj^ seven-fold; Luke viii.8; without ^>^ r** twofold /3) by the simple numeral
with *0, Luke xix.8. lio)]^) (i.e. ]^1) fourfold; b) in answer to the question How often f a) with the signification of a cardinal,
by means of
;
^\
tirae^
plural ^i.l01
tiines^
as in
Eng-
lish
e. g.
;
II Cor.
^\ ^^ once
Luke
1.
^->J.i
.aVJM
38
;
five times
Matt,
xviii.
22
xvii.
John
xiii.
by
sometimes
by .l^time, plural
^r^,
;
Barh.
in an
10,19;
ordinal
more rarely by
ordinal
num-
signification, in
of the cardinal
;
precedes
and
is
repeated after
it
in the plural
e.g.
A\2>
]li\
227
the
elliptically
or
by adverbs of the
Jude,
verse 12.
3.
LcLLL^Lfor
a)
g.
by
e.
;
Rev.
^A^oZ
one-
Heb.
vii.2
h)
;
by circumloEphr. 1.204,
cution
e.g.
Ez.
V. 2.
ASZ
I'rCQ^
^^
i-m one-tenth
1'h^
79.
Connection of the
is
Noun
ivith Adjectives,
The
related to the
noun
either as epithet or
it
follows the
1.
noun
^
in the
^
^0
number
e. g.
Matt. xvii.
pDj
|>Cl4
an high mountain
xvi. 4. lZv^y0
ation
;
xi.
8.
^ > (AmJ
^q/lf
raiment
is
John
xi. 47.
The same
true
in respect
e. g.
Matt. xv. 8.
8.
lioi
]^S
^7iw
people
door.
verse 12
xix. 1
Rev.
iii.
Collectives
in the singular
;
are followed
I.
;
by the
ad-
e.
g.
Assem.
78,
A.
4.
^r^ Koi
nouns
vii.
so also with
;
e. g.
John
M-M
(jLk)
;
Heb.
x.
24
or in the singular
-
ad sensura
e.
Num.
out.
iv. 5.
JDa*^> ]1>Z
"^1
the vail
The pronoun
tf
frequently
comes
:
first
e.
g.
John
xi.
47.
19
*f^\\
'A
pen
this
man
Matt,
xviii. 1
xvii. 18.
228
p^Q^
^Qa^^al the jnousEphraem; 11V,B.23.^1-mQli ^;iD "^Ajr^ the holy John; 286, A. 1. If an adjective is appended to the deraonstrati%'e pronoun for the sake of more particular designation, the pronoun usually stands between the noun and the adjective e. g. Ephr. 1.
;
124,E.
127,
er.
|>^^on
li^fc^l
001 pOIQJ
"[z^S
this
abroad;
D;
vJD occurs
Ipij
e.g.
Matt.
XV. 13.
o5.B.
(Ao^ ^\o this lohole planting^ (with suffix, compare A word, generally a particle, sometimes stands be2. Rem.).
;
e.
g.
Acts
xvii. 20.
jAiyt
(J.^
indeed. But very rarely the adjective fole. g. gender different from that required by the noun
;
)A.*r^
holy
cloister.
Or
several adjectives
g.
interchanged
e.
Michael. Chr.
As
with a
suffix
e. g.
Mark
xv. 23.
;
OlO
Matt.xv.
In like manner
is
the pronoun
the
e. g.
Mark
Rem.
viz.:
Sometimes the
several
adjective, as
predicate, follows
the noun,
signi-
when
g.*
Gen.
xix. 20.
to
e.
.
|*Hia;0
fjOl
lAa^O
Vr>A\ -(^'VVriX
bial
P
^01
.
this city is
nigh
;
flee
g.
.
unto
or an adver-
idea
7
is
9
embraced
'
^
in the preposition
.
Gen
xxix. 7.
vi^^
*
y>
r^
pjDQu
it is
i.
e.
Sometimes
229
noun
Old %2uA3
to
that
same were
the
;
words written;
e.g.
itself in
the singular
Assem.
I.
21,5, 6.
OIJ^
^^^^ (Z^aIdIO
But
Rev.
|AA...QflO songs
and
in the
e. g.
^;Lo|) m..<^
The predicate
(
>
{.alO
also
Barh. 88,
Cor.
v.
xii.
is
e. g.
27.
Eph.
30.
When
e.g.
Luke
;
i.
5, 6.
(OIJ^ >0,X) 0001 -j-Qujl tOOl^yL Zacharias and his wife Elizabeth both feared
God
verses 6,7
Rem.
2,
and 70. 3
e.g.
Assem.
I.
36, 6.
I.
li^Aoj
;
been written; 372, 19; Ephr. he did that which was evil.
241,B
^^
80.
Connection of the
in
Noun
ixisklj
In regard
to
Number.
1.
Here it should be remarked That collectives or those nouns which are regarded as
:
Wo 7 .k.1^;
Barh.
9-1,
e.g.
10.
o\nl
.IC*rll^
Roman army
230
96, 9
^to
e. g.
0001
>V)S>
M^
all
,
\r);e.g. Assem.L39,3
wrote
said
;
5.
Q)Ao"|
^m^S
all
^^V^\n
^yrSh
who
*aj1
^O;
oioiZ .lSn>
that every
a
V.
3.
|OUp>
; X7p7
e.g.
John
Tip
t\P
K'^VC^
in these [pools)
;
Assem.
I.
483, 19
Barh.
l^*,^
95,6,7;
227,8; 312,7;
;
Qu-i
to the
342, 19.
According
same
construction are
e.g.
I'AOQl
X
7
cloister;
Assem.I.411, Note B. 4
P ^'^Oik
6.
Rem.
1J.1-M,
also are
e.g.
e.g.
Barh.551, 13
e.g.
^^,
314,2
;
288,12, and
309,14; ^^V^Sn;
e.g.Acts xiv.4
;
Jul
its
compounds, ,\^
or
l\n;e.g.373,l;also|air>';
In like manner,
Ad;1 fZomj]
490, A. 31
;
OT-io
all
Assem.
1.
fZ^l
for con-
more remarkable is the construction same period with a singular and plu-
verb
e.g. )].k^,
Barh.212,1. tjiOIO^j^lo
took
him
captive ;
8.
388,3,
ISOl;
2.
e.g.
Acts
xxi.
36
Barh. 371,
tion
a singular significain
respect to form
; 1
'7
;
23
e.
;
g.
faf,
II Cor.
^
;
iii.
'^7
^ ^7
18.
I^^^J^yt
\^\^
y^ith
uncovered face
^.>j
;
Barh. 201, 1
|a-m;
e.g. Johniii.l5.
life ;
^^^>
eternal
V.26; Barh.219,12
the
^lio; e.g.
John
v.7.
Q^^fZZT?
;
\^
\^\D when
12; and]
i
Barh. 194, 3
268,
7, 8,
V);e.g.Mark
lO.PkiQ* OOjAflDI
o
oupavoj
(f-x^i^oixsvoi
James
v. 18.
or b)
more
e.
g.
i.
Luke
4.
xxiii. 45.
was rent
John
Oio
Am
it;aA
?^ ; Num.
water there
;
xxxin. 14.
(.jl-So
21.
^-^^
A^
there
was no
Luke
iii.
]iV) wmAs^Z]
iii.
5. ^Oa'^o
sxifaKai
3.
lar;
With the noun plural also is connected the verb singua) when the verb preceding is use! impersonally; a)
;
e. g.
John
vi. 9.
t^rii
-^>'
>nir>\v
A^j
;
^oJQJ
xxi. 25
^JLO
;
\^LDy he has
Jive oarley-loo.ves
;
and two
fishes
I Cor. xv.
40
Barh. 144, 8
A-i| there
2.
;
lOfcrnj IaSQaa
OIQ
;
(OOl
Assem.
e. g.
I.
852, 13
n. 13.
Luke
peared
many
^
;
wV^Z] there
* |
P 7
ap7
,*^\
p.^^
^Ae
133, 12.
there died
or
ft)
when
a)
Aal'^and AjJb^;
Barh. 148,
jive walls
;
10.
/3)
had
e.
g.
232
Barh.
iO.
IX KESPECT TO GENDER.
!->,
125, 14,15.
9.
190,
;
wil12
;
298, 17
Rem. Some have attempted to explain this singular of the verb as the third plural pret. defectively written ( 6 ; comp. Agrell a. a. O.p. 12,13) ; still it is remarkable that one and the same author, as
Barhebraeus, should employ interchangeably both ways of writing. On the contrary this constructioTi is found in Hebrew and more frequently in the Arabic and to both of these languages, such a
;
defective
is
form of the
pret. plur. is
unknown.
When
a plural
to
the Syriac uses not only the singular but the plural also, and marks
this
construction
e.g.
more accurately by
r^^^^O,
lOOUiO ^^
i>No
or
^^
^O
^-i^Ol;
them went
.
-K
...
Oil^
Matt.
;
one of
The
dual,
which
is
is
e. g.
xxiv. 40.
^>Z
two shall he
xviii. l9
xix. 5
--lOT-icjZ, w>r-)^0
and
Rem.
Sometimes,
is
also,
singular
01^^*1
found with
that
it
^'^^
e.g. Barh.396,12.
;
^'^^
AQ2L3J
is
^^
433,20.
Similar
^;aSO
B.
ZjZ. Zjj
In
respect to Gender.
1.
Nouns
when
not
i.b).
precede or follow, in the feminine they are masculine ia respect to the termination, but
to
a55
signification
(compare
43.
Eem.
2,
and
70.
233
It
must be considered
as
is
a solecism or
a designation of
;
the neuter
e.g.
when
^ when
was evening
compared
with Matt.
there
16
xiv.
;
15
V^^^ - ^0^1
;
arose
a quarrel
Acts
xxiii. 10.
2.
a)
when they
(compare
La);
h)
when
abstracts stand
for concretes
e. g.
^f
\LMZiy
thousand
men
ry
548, 20
585, 14.
]2pCQi army;
581, 12.
QmliZf
607, 20.
are also found with
Rem.
These nouns
is
e.
g.
^iaj
;
^AISd
there died
thousand men
to be considered
as impersonal
compared with
;
there
or
606, 19,
6.
20.
lA^j^J Oi2q!^
he
had fear
|al^ ^^
3.
the king.
not only,
a)
e.g.
Mark
v. 13. |a*0)
QQ2U
;
oVv n
but
b)
lAaJ-4 ^-^^^
these
e. g.
Barh.
268, 10.
QQ1>jZ|0
jl^21J
aOLZ>Z
;
they
both {mother
and
234
CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES.
C.
In
respect to both
1.
e. g.
Barh. 561,
;
6,
0001
57.
,^ I
n >'rl
l^OJj]
the inhabitants
had fled
Gen.
0L\ |i>1
32.
01^
I.
came
Matt.
viii.
;
olsj
whole herd
So
1.
perished
all the
Assem.
53, 17.
wept.
too the
names of
cities
e. g.
Assem.
I.
Note B.
to
QX^nAi^ AoaJ
sZam
580,
2.
;
he
Barh.
2-18, 6, 7.
1, 2.
noun
e.
g.
16.
;
tQ-^Olt
Aia
7.
haughty
Barh. 215,
Ol^Zo^^
Ephr.
^oilo
II.
\\il^ ^all
of his
145, A.
looi
*uLd
jiOliNs
there
them
Jer. xiv.5.
;
nn
|A^| Me
forsook
10, 9.
were three
Rem.
stands
masculine
e. g.
OlAlO
1*^*^*
>
^^*-\
there is
is
l.When
inative
is
compounded of a nom;
and
verb conforms
a) usually to the
CONNECTION' OF THE
nominative
VERB.
235
there
e. g.
Barh. 228,
was seen
Alk)As|
the
form of a
of
pillar
613, 14.
(lQfiQSD>
|Al..
h)
the cry
verb conforms to
principal idea
;
348,
20;
the
e. g.
Job
xxxii. 7.
y^v^So )1jl)
multitude of years shall teach; Barh 96,8,9. ^Al i,V)) rnjf .rTm
188, 7, 8.
oooi
^"^^ASo
]AaIo ^s^\ a
is
Rem.
Matt.
In the
34
;
last
found
e.
g.
viii.
Acts
30
Cor. xiv. 23
to
CFlAloZ
2.
When
a
)
it
A) when they
;
are of the
same gen-
in
the plural
thus
John
xxi. 2.
^^pAjO
Barh. 19,
slain
;
^AjQuO
78, 8
193, 17
I
Assem.
I.
30,
A.
1,
2.
^j>inlo
p
;
\Ml^ Ol^ibo
fcC0O|
;
No
when
1.
the clergy
and
/3)
were assembled
Ephr.
223,
A
is
after
the subjects
Exod.
xvii. 10.
noStio
JomO
Aaron
;
andHur^wentup.
in the singular
]l'r*A ^Q-i'rLDO
lene
;
found
b)
1.
e.g.
Matt, xxviii.
1A^_^
Assem.
Mary Magda;
and
the
other
Mary ; Barh.
I.
106, 4, 5
121, 19
159, 9;
pest-
160,13.
ilence
;
pZqLdo
193, 19
;
famine and
;
A.
35,
36
Ephr.
I.
216,B;
236
230,D
w;)Z*|
e.g. Jolinii.2.
^Qml
OCT
^V
;
and
A.
his disciples
5. v.
were invited
Barh. 1 11, lO
Assem.
I.
234,
E
it
conforms
;
a) to the
9.
e. g.
Barh. 106,
'^(^'^
(aJO
r^it
;
assembled together
192, 10.
;
pQ^ O i\yt2.[
6)
mountains
is
and
islands appeared
195, 4
or
the masculine
;
pre-
e.g.
Barh.
and
C)
tion
his sister
finally,
77, 7
78, 2
Ephr.I. 253, A;
used
e.g.
^axo'J^Q
fled
;
and
his
arose
and
155,
P-J
OlZO-^ t^ZU
00;PO
Rem.
(jlb^)O the judge and the elders went out and brought.
in the plural also follows,
;
The verb
by
when
several subjects
are united
XH with
e.g.
Barh. 197,5,6.
^OL 5Q2U.CUJ
the
different
^O
ni<^
|Vn r><^
Roman army
subjects,
When
g.
1
7
there
first
ii.
are
two
is
a pronoun of the
;
Sy
first
person phiral
!
e.
i^^
9
Luke
]2)jq4s
j^QTIilo
|j1
_^0G1
'
^*^
|pu.^n)
/ and
T.
with
much
sorroio ;
Assem.
173, B. 23
25.
Yet sometimes
is
when
the
first
in
person singular;
e.g.
Assem.
pf
^Lk\ Y
H^ I and
the
237
81.
Peculiarities relating to
Nouns.
A.
1.
Ellipsis.
If
would be repeated
in the
it
predicate, before
more
omitted,
tive is used;
g. Matt.
iii.
4. I^lfi09
Olscm^
was
John
greatv.
er
^LmGU) ^iO pD>J (LOjOl-fiO a witness which than that of John; x. 21; xi. 4; Heb. iii. 3
is
;
14.
]Z^;ji
]ALqo]^
r-klQ.t) to
those
who
iii.
22.
Rem.
with
This
;
VAli
Assem.
I.
394,
6, 7.
OIQ
ZoCJli
lAl*
for
iO^
yLXm
,
VAli
^^
1.
11.
lAl> oijAo
xiv. 9.
lAl*,
VAlij dljAo
(viz
:
Mark
IjOl
a2',jQQD
IpZij
]:auV
^^
my gospel
shall be preached.
is
2.
verb,
when
nification of the
J>
verb
e. g.
;Qj
to
plough^
literally to drive
;
(Pr2) the
,
yokeplough),
bring forth,
JQoaJ
to
V
;
* to
Aph. r-^0|
marry,
beget (pi.-lS),
to
Gen. xvi,
XXX. 1;
literally
;
ix. 2,
to cast
12
(in full,
lot)
^^j^ to cast
to
literally
(Ima a
I Sam. xiv. 42
;
also
^fiO
consider, literally
(in full,
to
lay
(Va!^
m the Heart)
Job xxxiv. 23
Acts
v.
288
(|V)>n upon
the sea)
Mark vi.
66.
1,
48
Luke
viii.
23.
Rem.
like
Here
^r^7
and
also
seem
to
2)
^
;
Aj)Sd to which
may
be supplied
[ikSii
or
Pm09
|*^N
To ^OlVvJ
it is clear,
and Aqaaj
dark,
it
is
forced
and unnecessary to
B.
Zeugma
the verb
the
;
Gen.
ii.
1.
^ooi1ju1
all
their host
or Hendiadys
Gen.
iii.
i.
16.
e.
%-kui4^0
the
>n>np
thy sorrow
;
conception,
Cases of Paronomasia are merely imitations of the Hebrew; and passages of accidental assone.g. Isa. XX viii. 10, 18
;
ance
e.g.
]LJi^
llY Icdlsii
If
not by
APPENDIX.
77ie
noun
as well as
(compare Appendix
manner
;
1)
of
e.
i.
g.
Tim.
18.
avayvwCi? U-J^;
'apaxXy](j'<j
(ZqIjO
9.
a(fs(3s7s
(IjUI)
avoVjoj
p^-^
ii.28.
Matt.
for
xviii. 28.
(fuMSovXog
IAio
or 2)
one
'rpo'/vwCij
|Alr-^
or
b)
dxapjCTOj
|Zcmx4^
*a,SiO
;; ;
239
John
xi.l6.
(fujmfxaSrjTa?
auTou ,>aiO,*lM
|,
iSo\il
by a
;
participle
g.
verb
or
e.
Acts
13.
aypa^iiaroi
(;f^ffl
^>-^r*
*.
by
participles
pre-
fixed;
e.g.
II Pet.
16.
5v<fv6rirog
;
P.3QQ^ n>fn\
g.
or
d)
e.
I Cor.
vii.
8.
a/ttjaoi
OOlJSk
A^9
,^>\il
;
re-
manner
genitive
Col.
ii.
as in cases
;
mentioned above
xvi. 14.
a) in the relation of
.,e.
g.
Mark
(fxMpoxapdia
'r^9
/
\o^ ZoiaO
xxiv.
24.
14.
p^jpo7pa(pov
-o^Om
;
Matt.
4/gu(^o<rpo(p93Taj
IZo^rOj ]>*^i
ii.
b)
by
the
noun and
;
adjec-
tive
13.
e. g.
Phil.
3.
xsvo(5o|ia
ysu^CQ (m^oos
;
II Cor. xi.
^su^a-jroVroXoi
B-ii? t.i\^
;
4) sometimes we can
a) nouns, adjectives,
and
22.
*af,
take
^^
b)
e. g.
Luke
xi.
\Xa\
CiSd
xxiii. 18.
-rafjo-rXig^s/
\mlD
Ol^
Sap.
xviii. 15.
iravTodivoLixog
la^So
^^j
when they
is
are com-
pounded with a
B'and Bj
i.
;
privative, the
latter
represented
]]';
by
e. g.
a^avatfia
iii.
12o2q1so
a(f(3s(frog
,
Eph.
4.
ctfAWfAOff
Xx::^
Matt.
12.
tfOv
|nij ]]n
often ren-
Finally, in
this
is
dered by Xll
fjoou
e.
g.
Philem. verse
xvi.
9.
o
23.
Cuvsp/o^
(fwcciy^^ixaXuros
Aiai>
r
llni
Rom.
^fAwv
1m.L2)
CHAPTER FOURTH.
PARTICLES.
82.
1.
Construction
by
same
tense,
them numIn
r
ber,
finite verb,
a)
^
y2i(J\ to return^
;
;
and
J2iflD0( to con-
e. g.
C\S^Q again
^VV^\
,7
7
he
sent
her
out
Ps.
;
20.
yZiOXL
Job
wJDQ2)0lZ U
kfiOo]
iv.
Luke xx.
203,
11, 12.
Assem.
I.
;
A.
7,
8
;
Gen.
also
2.
AaCDol
Barh. 152, 3
;
by
ad|J
Gen.
viii.
21.
the
2kD0|
earth
-
ai4^Ls^^ JDoZ
will
no more curse
; e.
h)
i
ro I to
make
g.
^^ f
241
II Cor. viii.l5
II Kings xxi.
;
Aa^> ,n\V)^
I .t
rt)
he did
much
evil
c)
^Cu^m
to
\i
endjfoTwhoU2/^completeli/;e.g.Gen.xxivA5.
oSSVoV^N %o\9
to
;
;
d)
e. g.
^^
iii.
precede (always
before
Acts
11
;
ii.
31
vii.
ii.
52
Rom.
iii.
25;
viii.
28,30; xi.
35
xii.
I Cor.
7;
Gal.
8.
Rem.
in Hos.
More according
vi.
to the
Hebrew, seems
to be the expression
\^0 WJ^^^i
is
which early
scattered
Gen. xxxvii. 7
or
11
Kings
ii.
10.
t^^^M ^
'
"^1
I.
too great
a thing;com.-
pare Ephr.
519, D.
{^i^SH
^^ nChron.xxvi.l5,is expressed
finite
by
jk.wfiD(
it
verb already
precede,
I
.
may
I7
e.
g. I
^7
fir>|
>
j^oj
^'^ . Q22
they
mourned
but
David
the
most.
2.
Adverbs
;
and stand
Xt^}iDj\
before
them
e.
g.
Luke
iv. 25.
-*-\v^
ii.
12.
;
1ASocL.a
^k\o few
30, 15,
days
270,
V. E.
105, 3;
106, 8
Assem.
I.
21
A.
;
h)
more seldom
little
noun
e. g.
ii.
I Cor. v.
9.
6.
^^Ln
iytrn
l;V>i a
leaven
II
Chron.
]fn
much wood
L^ti^
placed under.
Rem.
tive
;
e.
Ephr.
I.
219,
IllLj
the
|>qSQ10
they
had continually
242
larly
\
^^
v>
iNoO
almost
or
_Sd
^^
>
Vr>
i\0
3.
etc.
The
a) a strength-
e. g.
Gen.
vii.
19.
-^l
vi.
y
quite
ready
Matt.
iv. 24.
-^ "*^
(i
lO
i;er?/
6ac? ;
John
7
7
9
^\^o ^iSnn
diversity
40.
and
is
84,
17.
>Ao >Ao
Z)^
h) sometimes a
e. g.
expressed
Kings xx.
pLo
^a^
here
83.
and Negation,
it
interrogation,
should
a)
direct question
is
distinguished
either
by being preceded by an
;
interrogatory pronoun or
is
particle
e.g.
_
Luke xxii.27.
^
the greatest f
S7
;
^0
fi:^
(iSo
ylCijL}
1.
to thee ?
verse
10.
' < -
w-KA2)Z.|
how
33, 15
verse 19
i.\
**' m
;
vii.
35
Assem.
179, B. 25.
.
jii^V^
h)
OOCJI
know
they thisi
or
-JIT by the
;
position of the
g.
MjOOUj [n\V>
I.
the
king of
^*^
Jews?
Assem.
33,
l7.
'\^l
^ ^1
%
e.g.
IJ
wish ?
2.
A question with
iv. 35.
]]
John
1?^
fZf
say ye
notf that
after four
243
v.
but with
1j1
pQ^
x.
it
embraces a negation;
^oAjI ^\cJs) \i^
xviii.35
is it I.
;
e.
g.John
^Oal
^..^QiD
?
]j!\i
believe ye that
;
I shall
so
also
'
accuse you
21
or a doubt
e.g.
Matt.
xxvi. 22.
^'r^ Ul
with olO
;
\^ Lord
e. g.
If John
240, P,
?
ix. 27;
xviii.25;
Ephr.
wO
xviii.
fOOl
\aS1m
xxiv.
\k'^
18
;
'^ '^*^
vii.
Ood
Luke
John
Rem.
The
;
direct
also
found with
f>|
(apa), Barh.
131, 12
3.
t^
119, 10.
is
The
question
indicated
by
t]
= whether
J
e.g.
whether
or {utruman)
Matt.
xi. 3.
The
disjunctive {whether
;
is
marked by d]
we
e.
g.
art thou
ix.
he
2;
look
for another
John
The
I.
usually expres;
Assem.
375,
7.
O'^l
iii^oT?
^^
*1*1V ^oAlSos
heard,
10.
and
^.1^)
is it
not
e.
yes
Z;1d1
t^
thou hast
;
yes
same
repetition
e.
e.
g.
Assem. Assem.
I.
3*78, 7, 11.
Sometimes only
]]
|J
==
not, appears
g.
I.
33,19.
%^.d\
r^|0 and
he said^
No^
my father.
)
B.
The negative
particles
are
by
this latter
244
to A-jil,
PREPOSITIONS.
adjectives,
2), it
and
participles ( 58.
I Cor.
repeated in the latter of two negative clauses e. g. (but the negative sense is lost when the particle is to be taken affirmatively as in Matt. v. 25 Luke xxi. 34). To adjectives and participles it gives a negative or privative signifiJj is
;
Rem.
xi.
11, 16
cation
(
i.
;
j]
e.
g.
Eph.
i.
4.
>OQSid
|J
spotless ;
it
Rom.
23.
less
\\^.^>Avr>
imperishable.
Before nouns
i
signifies
nothing
than
e.g.
Deut. xxxii.21.
V)\ U nothing
B, and 62.
less
than
my
(God^s) people.
it is
an imper3.
ative)
prohibitory
or ]Jo
compare 61.
), it
3.
Doubviii.
Ied(lJo
. |Jo
3.
.. U
signifies neither
nor
John
19;
ix.
84.
1.
Prepositions,
When
prepositions
tt
come
a)
together, in
is
many
instances
a) the signification of
one of them
;
only apparently
prepositions,
is
lost.
Thus
for example,
^So
before
denotes
closely
46, 21.
/3)
more
I.
defined
by those which
Zu-mZ
it
follow
e. g.
Assem.
87,19
IpM
lap
under a
rock, 1.
after
prepositions
defined
e. g.
Assem.
1.
54, 7.
;
\LfL Id AxA2^
Barh. 200,
66, 18.
16.
iW,!^
\Ci^ before
below,
the city;
e.
(i.
(lO)09 ,oaLlo
is
;
^liO
b)
merely pleonastic
Eccl. X. 14.
OIjAq
after hira ;
Assem.
I.
36, 22.
^ ;
PREPOSITIONS.
245
uOlQl^fQ _Sd
King.
be-
yLQLik
^J^from
;
thee; 37,
9.
Dan.v. 24.
fore
2.
him
Barh. 65,
]n\V)\ iol
to the
tion
e.g. hetivlxt
and
between^ \iQ
1 1 1
*^;
e.g.Matt.xx.lT.
frequently withg.
^ A^
;
e.
^CTJoll
tW A^^
;
between
75, 17,18
;
83,
15
146, 13
rarely
^^
Barh. 60,8
from to
|iD^k.^;e.g.Matt.i.l7.
to e.
from.
Khrokam
out to^^;
3.
also with-
Besides the cases mentioned in 55. B. 3. b) prepositions are repeated with several nouns which follow after one another, and depend upon one and the same preposition but the preposition is quite e. g. Barh. 82, 10; 104, 11, 13 frequently omitted after the first noun ; e. g. Barh. 6, 1 as
;
;
40, 12
Q^, 6.
special idioms, are
for
Rem.
As
to be regarded
slg)
;
the following
ii.
a)
sometimes stands
^ (sv ==
e. g.
Luke
city ;
3.
looi \\\
;
(SxhlJkJ^Df^
to his
own
iii.
Barh. QQ,
16 17
lent to for
Barh. 64,
6.
,^isV)
149,
8,
two
hundred and
fifty oholi ;
191,
1,
193, 19
;
h)
denotes direction
1. b. ^)
with numerals,
with
]!^^
preceding
= about
to ;
c)
Lcuik and
penes)
;
Job
d\
XV. 9.
23,
14;
anybody
same
^^ forms
3. a)
expresses
the
*
pronouns
di-
rection to a place
e. g.
Assem.
I.
485, 28.
(mJ,^
towards
246
morning
;
1.
CONJUNCTIONS.
29
;
e)
( 67. II. 4. b)
Ezra
It
may
/) W
be considered as a preposition
.J
without
e.
g.
Barb. 22Y,5.
pjO
(jr'l
% 85.
Conjunctions.
Tlie Syriac language, in common witb. the other Semitic very deficient in conjunctions ; but affluence of periodic diction in all languages arises from this class of words. Hence in syriac, upon the one hand, the periods are wanting in variety and continuance and on the other hand the connective particles which do exist have many significations. In general the following may be observdialects, is
;
ed
1.
Those conjunctions
(e. g.
luhen^
then)
are frequently
Gen.
xix. 23,
^ 4^ *^^
;
e. g.
liiQJi
when O
the
Sun had
arisen^
Lot came
xliv. 4.
fall
Rem.
away
1
a)
{asyndeton) after
;
verbs of motion
e.
g. Matt. ix. 7.
;
^1
^dO
Barb. 25,
XV. 6
;
1;
197, 19
;
e. g.
Sam.
h)
oVor
e.g. II
Kings
ix.
32.
in
^xlkxicfliD
1^2
_J>Z
I* ^ more
accordance with
Hebrew
usage
e. g. Isa.
1.
2.
^mS\
Aa^O
there.
came, {when
I came),
no one
;
e.
On
is
often
repeated (polysyndeton)
g.
;-^oZlo AaIdo
and went
to
f^Knm\
heaven
2.
;
r^Xrrn ^Q}0 he
82, 17;
died,
was
buried, arose,
38, 5, 6.
As
correlatives, conjunctions
are
used doubled in a
CONJUNCTIONS.
sentence
as well
a) the
247
as^ both
and
I.
same word
;
e. g. I.
e. g.
Assam.
;
Q^ ^6\\itheror ;
er
Barb. 112, 4
223, 4, 5
^V ^1 ^whethflOOl
words
e.g.
^|
with
yet;
likeas; Assem.
>
^f although
or
|J>
The
I.
conjunctions j
that^ therehy^
= thai
;
not^
e. g.
As-
sem.
515, B.32
Barh. 213, 6
the signification of
e.g.
Matt.
ix. 8.
r^ou)
;
rt^^^m
13, 11
;
12,
41
Barh. 24,
4.
9.
fol-
lowing
a)
may
I
be noted
sometimes used in comparisons (=^ ^^) e. g. and likewise h) yjk\ in comparing xix. 24 Matt, xi.22
is
; ;
e. g.
Isa.
;
i.
Job
xxiv. 14;
it
)
Assem.
I.
75,
^
A.
1.
;
v.
168, B. 29
;
with
if^
numerals
(
Barh.104,13
cases, the
c)
Q-i^
=
is
:|^
iav
denotes, in doubtful
;
relation of the
subjunctive
^1
Qjj^
s<
in cases of certainty,
denotes
Hebrew
/{,
with a negative U
Qjs^
U ] or ^ U ],
affirmative(compare
;
and
^*i
t]i^)
Gesenius Lehrg.
p.
844)
e. g.
Cant. 2. 7.
248
(\o
CONJUNCTIONS.
rouse not
;
^^^1
69.1
it
73. 8
74.
2.;
78.B. 2)
from
g.
J
particles
which
follows,
34,
;
forms conjunctions
so
I.
yjk\just as,
yz^5^ as,
Assem.
viii.
I.
17
thai,
Matt.
;
ii.
13
Uiul
John
28
Ephr.
;
214,
>
^Aif
As-
>
w*ai^
since, because^
Barh. 112,
sem.
I.
7,
160, 12
y j5\L, 89,7,
;
and
j2^
^,
as,
213,
A.
25, afterwards
oiAls;^ as soon
;
1.218
27
? liiO J ^^ii,
>
Vy^,
until,
;
Barh.160, 16,
i/ia^including
and
158,12, since,hecause
\^t^
Ephr.
II. 125,
;
242,
]Lo^
;
mwc^
^/la^,
Barh.193,2
is
i0^^ 6e/bre,150,l3
jS)
future*
e.g.
John
xxi. 3.
,
t'oJ ?Otl
v. 7.
.(
W
|Z|
;
^if/^o
p| ^L
thati may
John
pf
;
i^n/i7 that
I
.j
come
or
it is
pleonastic after
e.
g. Matt. x. 13.
OOl
;
|Aa^ |as>
vi.
tdj^ew
viii.
Me
;
Aowse
after
is
v)orthy
Mark
21
;
viii.
Luke
John
;
36
^f. Matt.
ix.
U'oiS^
Mark
13,
20
e)
denotes
a) that^ especially
;
after
e.
g.
Assem.
221,2;
is
77, 23,
24
/3)
Barh. 11, 18
the apodosis
;
;
97, 8; 105,
e.g.
152, 5;
forms
y)
equivalent to hut
e. g.
Barh.
S)
it
e. g.
Job
v. 7.
db^ii< is translated
by the
fre-
yet, nevertheless.
INTERJECTIONS.
249
86.
1.
Interjections.
The
Interjection
distress, is
^ following
^.
e. g.
to
Eccl.
X.
6.
i*^\
;
^O
woe
to thee
I
;
ii.
^on\
;
aO woe
you !
E.
Matt, xviii. 7
xxiii.
13-16
xxiv. 19
Ephr.
II. 135,
l)Oai-^> ]n\VlS
^o
with
woe
to the
to those
king of Judah
274, D.
who meditate
e.g.
deceit ! 351, C.
^>Vnnio\
Ez. XXX.
2.
(jO; or
appended;
M
to
^^J^woe
to
mel
ISoCLiJi cnol
1.
woe for
the
^oA
e. g.
Jer.
27.
|jOl
fOOL-i
As
wkO woe
or ^!^,
Amira
p. 449.
to this
generation.
Without an intervening preposition, they are the usual expressions of grief and mourning, and the noun is then to be
taken in the accusative e. g. Judges alaSj my daughter ! Eev. xviii. 10, 16, 19.
;
xi. 35.
^L\Si 01 Of
Rem.
Sometimes
e.
g.
Barh. 333,
3, 4.
As
a particle of
exclamation
a|
compare Amira
2.
the following
Ephr. III.
body
is
IZOilD 001 XUj^OI Vrs^ the mortal thus dependent upon the soul ; or at the beginning of
\m*^\n
it
(JZ (01
a period
separated
Aa;) our brother (member) in designations of time, like the Greek ^<^>), it
e.
is
7^7 ^^?01
e. g.
^0 |oi lo !
signifies
now^ already ;
\'x^^
v.ik the
g.
Matt.
iii.
10.
^CUJD }..p
|01
(iNif?
axe
tree ;
Num. xxu.
sem.
I.
28.
;
^^>mi tj^L
with
i
369, 30
As-
e.g.
Acts
250
X. 30.
PECULIAKITIES
pi
IN"
THE
POSITION"
OF WORDS.
Col.
i.
^li?
by
|J
^^
I have fasted ;
*2)1
preceded
(\oi
ovx',
nonnef
e.g.Matt.v.46.
^r^il
IjOl
^01 |aSD
xiii.
}o\
j]
27
%Ci^far be
it,
with
;
^'^^
>0<^ni>
;
^^Om
J 01 ^iL^
to
fOOlZj far
be it from thee,
1.
my
should hap-
pen
thee ;
it
Assem
-<^m
far be
from
N^
God
375, 13.
Some-
e.
g.
Assem.
that
ijj^^j
it
from us
^f
we should deny
(==Q5ji^
preceding
;
com-
pare 85.
4. c)
e. g.
I Sam. xxiv. 7
or in the infinitive
with
e.
g.
Gen.
xliv. 7
c) jlOQl4
hail!
{=
intlJi^) \n\h.
suffix plural,
and the
relates;
to
Matt. V.8.
^^Q\^ llnnn^S ^ou^o^ hail to the peer with a word interposed; e.g. Assem.
;
95, A. 3, 6,
V.
E.
;
to
thee,
Simon
Peter
.
B.
3. v.
E.
Uli^ti 61
ininCL^
;j^5 is,
Sichem
The Hebrew
I
by
]-J
e. g.
Kings
xxii. 12.
APPENDIX.
Peculiarities in the Position of Words.
In the position of words, which, as in the Hebrew, is very ea^y and natural, besides the peculiarities referred to in the
preceding chapters, the following deviations from the usual
collocations, occur
;
a) the
25l
cannot be separated
.
e. g.
Exod.
vii. 7.
;-S |*QSo
;
><^ fOCn
Luke
v.
Exod.v.l6. Q109|
ye.
^ ^r^l
is
|1*^No and
The same
true
;
h)
001
are Abraham's seed
I
e.g.John viii.83.^0l^(j
37
;
^Uj
.
oil>l
we
verse
f^i
i<^
JflDOSOJ
,iOQ2
^lOV)
;
(OLi rO 001
t7 is
feeble
e. g.
men
c)
1.
more
^QJ|
rarely the
Matt. XVI.
IOmJj (tV)#
|Z|
^Aey
besought
him
that he
it
d)
45.
more frequently
lAl^r^D^
e. g.
Mark
into
^QUj
the city.
( 86. 2. a).
EXERCISES
IN
SYRIAC GRAMIAE,
AND
CHRESTOMATHY,
rREPARED WITH REFERENCE TO
THE TRANSLATION OF
BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON.
NEW YORK:
1855.
Entered according?
to Act of C'-ngr ss
.
in the- }vai
1855,
By E
n U T C in N
<f
N
tli
iurt for
Suuthe
ti
District
New
Yo!k.
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
The
who
the
same
time,
something
into
a thorough knowledge of
se-
the import-
phenomena of the language. Every peculiarity in resPerhaps pect to each word should be critically examined. the best course would be to trace one peculiarity throughout then the page, searching the grammar and other helps
ant
;
trace another,
and so
on, until
will be
The
is,
that
many
subjects at once
There
is
fre-
Hence,
many
the un-
di-
are presented
to
aid
the
learner in
making
his
254:
INTROD QCTORY
REMARKS.
mar, has not been followed, but they have been so arranged,
it is
nomena necessary
to be attended to
by the
learner.
may
literature
studied
which must be
should consult
an-
committed
it
memory. The
student, at
as
an aid in analvzinor.
At
the
commencement of the
and that
alysis,
he
need of
assistance,
assistance
When
it
he there discovers a
its
and perceives
in
his
application in
tomathy through, he
mar committed
no
plication
to
jneinonj^
and
and
principles,
whose ap-
may
recite
it
it
will
The
in the
marked by
the character
to distinguish
them from
similar divisions
I.
Letters
on page
1.
first
of the Chrestomathy.
Vid. Gram.
II.
Rem.
3, 4.
"
" Aspirates, or on
are found.
what
letters
1.
Yid. Gram.
Rem. 4
5.
III.
"
" Diacritical Points, for which the vowels are designed to compensate, formerly used instead of
Yid.
2, 3, 4,
and Rem.
IV.
"
" "
Vowels.
Yid.
3.
Rem.
3.
V.
VI.
A
13
48.
A.
Yid.
3.
VII.
"
Rem. 4
VIII.
"
14.
IX.
"
Lima
Occultans.
Yid.
8.
X. Find on what
syllables the
Tom
is
to be found.
Vid.
9.
Yid. 10.
XIY.
Translate.
XY. Examine
the
Changes of Consonants
assimilated
tra,ns-
posed
12.
droppedadded
and exchanged.
Vid.
256
XYI. Find
XYII. Find
Vowels
thrown backexchanged
Yid. 15.
46.
transposed
matives.
Yid. 16
36
XVIII.
Parse.
In respect to Verhs
Simple or Compound
lar or Irregular
Their Conjugation
Mood, Tense,
19., etc.;
etc.,
ReguNeuter Number
Voice
them
to the Case,
fonnd Rule.
Nouns
Yid.
59., etc.
Adjective
or Substantive Derivation and Formation Declension Person Number Gender State Case Yid 43;
or Prefix
.
Signification Suffix
44;
10;
n;
48; 50;
Pronouns
77.,
etc.
Case SuffixRule.
Participles
17
54., etc.
DerivationActive or
or Derivative
Passive
Conjugation
qualify.
Rule.
Adverbs
51
Primitive
;
What they
Yid.
82.
Numerals
Cardinal
Suffixes
or
Ordinal
GenderDeclineTo
84.
they
connect.
Interjections
Yid. 53.
1,
85.
Prhnitive or
Derivative.
EXERCISE FIRST.
YiD. Gram.
1.
Rem.
3, 4.
ir
1.
Find
1.
the
Select
those letters
as
Gutturals; thus:
lloiioilloioiloilloillililioiliH
01
1
01
I )
1 01*
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
are
all
all
used as such
guttural
258
1 has always
like
iJ^
a feeble sound.
the Hebrews.
of
a sort of vowel
sound Uke
a.
The Greeks
express *j^
well
as
^y sometimes
*** is
Usually
sounded
hh with a
01 before a vowel
is
a vowel,
softer,
it
as in ah
oh !
;
It is difficult
still it is
to
upon a
2.
Find those
letters
oi2^j^oioiGicriGiGioioioicnoioi
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Verse
3.
word
3., 01 is
a guttural, as
it
would
its
in
Hebrew
(Some
it
has no vowel of
own.
to call 01 a regular
as quiescing
h)
c)
Verse Verse
3.
word
word
4.,
is
3.
6., ** is
d)
Verse 4. word
6., Ol is
be-
vowel
15. 4. d).
The
other cases
may be
similarly explained.
Rem.
letters
on the
EXERCISE FIRST
GUTTURAL
LETTERS.
259
and might be said to be movable consonants (compare Gesen. Heb. Gram., transl. by Conant, 23.2). Still we prefer make a difference between gutturals and regular movable conto sonants. The latter, though guttural letters on page first, are the
following
:
3.
letters
raovable consonants
loil1oioiloiGnilloioiloioi>^js*loi
GIaxGIj^IoiIoIOImOIIOIIGIOIOIIOI
EXPLANATIONS
a)
is
Verse
1.
word 2.,
is
in
vowel.
melts in-
to the
J5^
vowel
melts into
vowel.
power
as a
movable
consonant.
ter to take a
It is
very
common
would have a
(vid.Ges-
Kem.
2).
Y.
w.
5.,
01 is movable, as
not otiant.
c)
V.
1.
w.
8.,
(not a guttural)
is
ceding letter
quiescent.
d) V.
its
1.
is
not sounded,
and the
one
is
w.lO., 1 should
that
260
e)
w.
11.,
1 is
not movable, as
it
quiesces, thougli
seldom, in
( 13. 1.
Eem).
is
/) Y.
1.
w. 11.,
01
movable
it,
for the
same reasons as
others above.
ble (comp.
g)
preceding
5. 1. f;
2.,
t
w.
15. 4. d).
Y.
3.
01 is
movable as
it is
suffix,
and
j:|
of
the
Hebrew
V.
9.
it
( 13. Rem.).
9.,
h)
w.
is
movable
1. 1. b).
as
it
though
so flows
into the
scarcely perceptible (T
Rem. It should be remarked that two of the guttural and Ol are sometimes used as quiescents and sometimes letters ( 12. A. B. and Rem.; 13; 14).
letters
as
otiant
EXERCISE SECOND.
1
Find
ening,
the
2.
letters
Aspirates or in what
1.
Rem.
3).
Find those, which are aspirated on page (5. and Eem. by Tr.).
2.
first
AAAAAZAAAoAZr^
r^
L rt^y
^ ^o
EXERCISE
SECONDASPIRATES.
261
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Verse 1. word
1.,
is
aspirated as
it
(5. 2.
Rem.
c. a).
b) V.l. W.2., A is aspirated as it follows an ple syllable ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c., and 15. 4. d).
c)
open or sim-
V.l. W.4.,
is
wbich would
2.
in
it ( 5.
Rem.
c.b).
V.
2.
w.
4.,
^
r
is
word ends
with
e)
1 (5. 2.
Rem.a).
is
V.3. W.2.,
aspirated as
it
( 5. 2.
Rem.
c. c).
/) V.3. W.4., Q is aspirated because it follows a letter which would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva, (5.2. Rem.
c. b).
which would
g) V.3. W.4., in
of course be vocal
( 5. 2.
(5. 2.
Rem.
c. b).
an open syllable
Rem.
c. c).
as
the preceding
it
word ends
k) V.4. W.7.,
is
aspirated as aspirated as
Rem.
I)
c. a).
V.7. W.4.,
c. a).
y is
it
Rem.
m
ble
V.lO. w.
4.,
r is
aspirated as
( 5. 2.
Rem.
c. c).
3.
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Verse
1.
word
( 5. 2.
is
not aspirated as
it
begins a
262
h)
EXERCISES IN SYRIAC
GRAMMAR
it is
V.4. W.I., f^ is not aspirated though (^5. 2. Kem.fl), because it begins a verse.
c)
ter,
preceded by
Y.6 W.3., A is not aspirated as it is preceded by a letwhich, in Hebrew, would not take a vocal Sheva, and which has no vowel ( 5.2. Note by Tr.).
d)
abet,
Rem.
)
D when aspirated
;
is
sounded
like
like v,
aspira-
ted like b
f like th in that,
is
when
in
;
;
when L when
is
aspirated
sounded
tk
aspirated
like
like
pk
sounded
g hard whether
is
be
aspirated
or
not *
O when
palate
;
aspirated
in
sounded
like
hh
k.
pronounced like the corresponding letters in Hebrew (vid. references above and Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar by Conant, 6. 2. 3. and
Note by
Tr.).
EXEKOISE THIED.
1
(
3.
4 and Rem),
Find the
001 li\^ ^^IL looi 'Zooi looii looi ooio 001 looi VZlj looi J\i looi*
J\^
* The aspiration of
palate.
.t
rolling of the
EXERCISE THIRD
DIACRITICAL
POINTS.
263
EXPLANATIONS.
Rem.
1.
Diacritical points
4.
persons of verbs (
Rem.).
Rem.
2.
in the time of
after the
completed by introrlucing characters from the ancient diacritical points were used to some extent by
many
writers.
They
are
now
diacritical points here presented and others, appear Syriac writings, perhaps from the fact that they have been copied from more ancient editions, and in some cases doubtThe several less, directly from the oldest edition'^ of the Peshito. editions have been copied with so much care, that even after the
Rem.
3.
The
in ancient
vowel system came into use, the diacritical points, which had been used long before, were copied as well as the more recent vowels. Thus appear sometimes two characters to represent one vowel sound. As later editions have appeared, however, those points have gradually been omitted and vowels substituted, though, some remnants of the old system are still left (2; 3; 4).
a)
Verse
1.
word
4.,
"jAL*
The
diacritical point
under L,
down byLudov.
deDieu,indi-
vowel
have then here the vowel and the point for which the vowel compensates
We
V.l. w.
5.,
0010.
01,
according to
Amira, indicates
c)
(4,Rem.).
wft|o*
V.8. w.
2.,
wk indicates, ac-
(f 4.
Rem.).
under and over the radical letters of verbs, sometimes to distinguish particular persons and sometimes to indicate vowels In the imperative and infinitive it may (vid. T 3. Rem. 1). omitted or inserted underneath (vid. 4.Rem.; albe wholly
so compare Hoffmann's Syriac Gram. 14).
264
EXEECISE FOUKTH. 1 4
Find
I.
the
( 3.
Rem.
3).
*pppipix
9i.'np-t,09
^OP-UPPP** PPi>sPPP'>PPK
*4v
pp9pi>99
PPP
px-npp
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 1., _!. _JL are both long lowed by *a quiescent ( 3. Rem. 3. b).
h) Y.l. W.5.,
c)
as
thej are
fol-
_!
is
it.
Y.
1.
w.
11.,
long as
it
1.
Bern.).
The
2.
J
y
J
'K777ryj97r
EXERCISE FIFTH
SIMPLE SYLLABLES.
is
265
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Verse
V.
1.
1.
word
10.,
2.,
_L
is
short as
it is
a regular short
vowel.
b)
w.
^
is
7
short as Olaph
is
movable, not
it
quiescing.
c)
(8.
V. 8. w. Kem.3).
1.,
-1
short as
it
several other short vowels on page form dipthongs with O and ^* These quiescent letters do not fully coalesce with their respective vowels but melt into them to a greater extent than they would do in Hebrew, under similar cir-; cumstances. They can scarcely, therefore, be considered as movStill the vowels in able consonants, as they would be in Hebrew. these cases are heterogeneous and the quiescents do not sufficiently coalesce, in our estimation, to make the vowels long (vid. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant, 8. 4 ; Uhlemann l.Rem.4).
v.l. w.2.,
first,
;
Rem.
In
.. and
EXERCISE FIFTH.
1
Find
I.
5.
4).
(he
J^ o\ Iboi '{\
]j
loi
1o 1^ loi
!^
^f O^
J(o\ loOl
.
S\i \
|0l
(^ |0G1
20 i^
^A QJ
U
(0CF1
|)01 ^xl 1
QA
266
10
V^
\ t-
EXPLANATIONS.
Rem.A simple syllable tjerminates in a vowel sound, and that vowel sometimes has a vowel letter quiescing in it. A mixed syllable terminates in one or more movable consonants. Every vowel stands in a simple syllable when the following consonant takes a
vowel.
X
a)
Yerse
1.
word
1.,
-;:Q is
vowel sound, although it has a quiescent m. lias a vowel of its own and is of course sounded with the following syllable (vid. 1 5. 1. Rem., and 15. 4. d).
simple for the same reason as last, the syllable ending with ^ and not with A (vid. 15. 4.d).
b)
Y.l. W.2.,
w*f
is
V.l. W.2., oA is a dipthong and should be considered, think, as a simple syllable because O coalesces in the we vowel to such an extent that the syllable ends in a vowel sound, though the coalescence is not so perfect as in a regular case of quiescence. Some may regard o as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew^, under similar circumstances, but we incline to the former opinion (vid. ^"4:. 2.
c)
Rem.
8.4).
Y.l.w.
4.,
lA^
is
simple, 1 quiescing in
is
/) Y.l.
a vowel of
it
W.5.,
0010
O quiescing.
own.
h) Y.l. w.ll., (o is simple, Olaph quiescing in seldom quiesces in that vowel (vid 13.1 Rem.
1. 3. e).
i)
though compare
,
Y.
3. W.2.,
]^
is
simple, 1 quiescing in
and
*^
being
otiant
EXERCISE FIFTH
Jc)
267
2) be-
V.4. W.5., aA is a diptbong and ends in a vowel sound melts into the vowel to such an extent that it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant as it would be in Hebrew. choose then to place the syllable among
as
We
maple ones
word
8,
-J. in verse 4. word 7., and -01 in verse ; are similar instances (vid.T4.2.Eem. TTS.l.c).
;
7.
m) Y.4. W.6., QJ is simple as O quiesces in makhig it a long vowel, and 01 belongs to the next syllable (l5.4.d).
syllable
2. d).
n) V.7. W.3., qL is simple as 01 belongs to the penult and follows a long vowel (15.4. d. compare 1.
;
2.
Zu.jL
^
)|
oih
'Zooi
^*
oiSos
^j...
oii
ouQ
m.j>
^001
>oi
01
'^o jj
901
^
\y^
01 r a-J9
>oi
^> i.k))
EXPLANATIONS.
Verse 1. word 1., Llm. is mixed as sonant sound (vid. T[ 5.1. Rem.).
a)
it
is
j:^
in
Hebrew and
is
of
^?
3.
not quiesce in
(vid. 15.4,
it,
is short when o does is mixed as and the following consonant has no vowel
and
Rem.3).
268
EXEKCISE SIXTH.
t
Find
the
6.
Pure^ Impure^
( 45.
Mutable
and Immutable
vowels
48. A).
1.
EXPLANATIONS.
An
Rem. a pure vowel, is one with which no consonant impure vowel is one with which a consonant coalesces.
a)
colesces.
7.
is
:
is
also Palfrey's
Gram.
2),
and O
does not fully quiesce in _!_, though it so far coalesces that Still it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant. as the vowel is a heterogeneous one and O does not fully coalesce in it, we scarcely feel authorized to place the vowel among the impure ones, though some may prefer to do so, Gesenius' Heb. Gram(vid. T" 4. 2. Rem. T5. 1. c. and 1 mar by Conant, 8.4 compare 15. 4. d; also ^ 6.2. Rem., and T' 6.1. Rem.).
;
b)
Y.l. W.9.,
is
mutable
[ 6. 4.
).
EXERCISE SIXTH
c)
IMPURE
VOWELS.
269
is pure as Olapli does not quiesce in V.l. w. 10., Olaph is here a movable consonant according that vowel. to the analogy of the Hebrew (vid.l. Eem.4.;also Gesenius' Heb. Grram. by Conant, 23.2).
d) V.3. W.5.,
ces).
e)
(the first
one)
is
pure f as
_.
being a
ed as
pure as O is movable, cri being soundhad Sheva, and forming a part of the syllable.
is
f) V.3.
quiesce in
W.9.,
it,
is
g) Y.4. W.5.,
above).
h) V.7. W.3.,
^) y.7. W.9.,
pure as oi is ^ in Hebrew and is of course a movable consonant (vid. 13. Rem. JL is also mutable according to the general rule (^[6. 2. Rem.).
is
is
pure as
^k
is
is
a dipthong (vid. a
is
pure as 01
a guttural.
2.
<>
<
"
*k
*k
>
>.
Tl
t>
EXPLANATIONS.
Yerse 1. word 1., and are both impure vowels as they have ^ quiescing in them.
a)
f j_
is
also
immutable
6.
).
270
h)
6. 1. e).
it
c) Y.l. w.ll., is impure asOlaph quiesces it, though does not often quiesce in that vowel ( 18. 1 and Eem.). The other cases are similarly explained.
is
impure
as 1 quiesces in
it
(compare
Rem. As a general thing, those vowels, which are pure are mutable and those which are impure are immutable but there are as in Hebrew many exceptions (vid. 6. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i).
;
3.
Find
:
tlie
T" 6. 2
Rem.)
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Yerse
1.
word
10.,
*["
is
mutable
c
)
(also pure,
6. 1.
as
it is
Y.3. W.2.,
long.
c)
Y.4. W.2.,
is
mutable as
it
is
is
mutable as
it
is
in a simple sylla-
ble.
4.
*^
7? .
O70700'^700^00
S
0^0^7
P077*.0XP>'7
SEVENTH
EXPL
Rem.
A.N
ATIONS.
Hebrew
;
Those vowels
mixed
are immutable,as in
in
which
either
a vowel
letter quiesces; or
letter
short vowels in
forte;
syllables
V.l. W.2., is in a simple syllable, is pure, and cannot properly be considered as immutable though O coalesces with it to some extent (vid. T4.2.Rem. ^5.1.c; fB.l.a).
;
''
c)
y.l.w.4.,
is
over So
is
immutable by position as
IALs^
reality
Ml
verb,
and the
1^ is in
doubled and the first would, if expressed, take Linea This is similar to Daghesh forte in Hebrew, and makes, as in that language, the preceding vowel impure and immutable (compare 48.B.Feminines).
occultans.
d) y.l. w.lO.,
1
is
^["5.
g)
e)
Y.l. w.lO., (the first one) is immutable by nature it is sometimes, however, like all the (48. A. Masculines) other vowels, mutable (vid. 15.1.b 45.2.b) as in Hebrew
;
(vid. Stuarts'
/) Y.l. w.ll,
2. c).
is
immutable as
quiesces in
it
6.
is
immutable as
it is
in a short
mixed
272
EXEKCISE SEVENTH.
t
Find
the
7.
;
I.
Palfrey's
Gram. 2)
0_
0._
O...
0.^m
O..
ji.-
jk.. a...
Oi_
EXPLANATIONS:
<z) Yerse 1. word 2., O is a dipthong as o is in tlie same syllable with _L without fully quiescing in it, though O so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending in a vowel sound (vid. T"4.2.Eem.; ^"5. 1. c and
1;
Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,
b) V-3. W.4.,
8. 4).
^
.
is
last.
.
is a dipthong as a unites with Y.4. W.5., a does not fully quiesce in it (vid. references above).
c)
'
but
Rem. It will be observed that dipthongs in Syriac as well as in Hebrew, are quiescent letters with heterogeneous vowels but in Hebrew the quiescent letters are movable while the reverse is true in
;
Syriac.
2.
Find the
Quiescenis
innu-oaUoQiaiann]
EXERCISE SEVENTH
OTIANTS.
1
273
]1
lal
al
Ul-
aniUn
it
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 1. word 1., wi is a quiescent as sound of the preceding vowel (13.3).
but does not b) V.l. W.2., O is a regular quiescent letter forms it dipthong and here fully quiesce, though a so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered as ending with a vowel sound (vid. TfT.l.a).
;
c)
Y.l. W.3., O
is
movable
as
the second
it would o quiesces
e)
Y.l. W.9.,
Q
I
does not
quiesce in
as
it is
movable
(vid.
16. l.b).
w.ll.,
f) Y.l.
quiesces in
though
it is
rather un-
3.
a)
Yerse
is
1.
word
2.,
is
otiant as
it is
fix
and
h) Y.3, W.2.,
is
otiant because
it
follows a quiescent.
^74
EXERCISE EIGHTH.
1
Sheva, where there
is
8.
((ijL..OlSD),
and
no accumulation of consonants,
1.
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 5. word 7., >? Here is an accumulation of consonants, and to indicate that they could not all be sounded conveniently, Marhetdno (or a horizontal line) would regularly be placed over j In this case the j would in Hebrew take
silent
Sheva.
(vid.7).
Sheva
Rem.
first
1.
as
an
it
instance.
(vid.
7).
The
js
is
to he
followed
2. It appears that Marhetono indicates silent Sheva when an accumulation of vowelless consonants,but under no other circumstances, though silent Sheva, in reality, frequently occurs as
Rem.
there
is
in
is is
Hebrew. So Mehagyono represents vocal Sheva only a similar accumulation of vowelless consonants,though
no accumulation vocal Sheva often occurs.
when when
there there
2.
EXERCISE EIGHTH
VOCAL
SHEVA.
275
EXPLANATIONS.
Yerse 1. word 1., Q would, in Ilebrew, take a vocal Sheva, and as it cannot well be pronounced without the aid This canof a vowel or half vowel we must use the Sheva. not be considered as an instance of Mehagydno, for there is no accumulation of consonants which are destitute of vowels According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the (vid. 7). Syrians did icse the Sheva and pronounced consonants aca)
cordingly, as in
b)
Hebrew
(vid. 5.1).
V.
1.
W.4.,
va like
Rem.
to
under a
find
We
Marhetono and Mehagyoiio, still we are to pronounce the consonants where those characters would regularly occur, as we should if they had actually appeared.
indicate
c)
y.3. W.5., 2)
is
The
presyll-
d) y.3. W.9., Oi
syllable of the
word and should not be pronounced with vocal Sheva. e) N.^. W.3., is pronounced with a vocal Sheva
( 15.4).
by a long vowel
/) V.9.
W.9., Ji
3. Find the silent Shevas, where there is no ac cumulation of consonants destitute of vowels
:
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse
1.
word
1.,
A would
regularly in
Hebrew take a
276
silent
2. a.
also T8.
h) Y.l. W.2., o would in Hebrew take a silent Sbeva, being a movable consonant at the end of a syllable but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel, that the syllable may be considered as terminating in a vowel sound, and O does not take silent Sheva (vid. ^ 4. 2. Rem. comp. references
;
above).
c)
Y.3. W.I.,
^ takes
silent
Sheva as
it
closes a sylla-
ble.
d) Y.3. W.2., Ol is a movable consonant at the end of a syllable being equivalent to jtj in Hebrew and takes silent
Sheva.
01 is at the end of a mixed syllable with a vowel, and takes silent Sheva though a guttural (vid. short ^8.4.d; ^6.1.f comp. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant, 22.
e)
Y.3. W.9.,
8).
a dipthong. It f) Y.4. W.5., A forms with the vowel would in Hebrew be pronounced as a movable consonant and take a silent Sheva but in Syriac it so melts into its vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable con;
tiike
2.
Rem.;
Sheva
as
it is
preceded by a
4.
OlAACnOIGIGIOIOlOIOIOIOIOIOIOI*
.
.
Yerse 3. word.3., Ol would in Hebrew take a composite Sheva and is pronounced as though it did here (vid. Gesen. Heb. Grammar by Conant, 22. 3 ^1.2.a).
a)
;
h) Yerse 3. w.6., a* takes composite sheva for similar reasons as in the case above.
EXERCISE NINTH
c)
LINEA
OCCULTANS.
277
Sheva but silent Sheva simple as in Hebrew. The Gutturals take simple Sheva where other consonants would take silent Sheva (Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,22.3).
Y.8.W.9.,
01 does not take composite
d)YA.
W.6., 01 takes
EXERCISE NINTH.
1
9.
0101G10101010101C710101
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 2., 01 is an instance of Linea occultans, indicating that the oi is not sounded (vid. 8; 12.1. A. and
B., also Rem.).
Y.l. W.3., is another instance of Linea occultans. horizontal line under 01 shows that the letter is not to be pronounced. In this case o begins the syllable. The othe cases are similarly explained.
h)
The
278
EXERCISE TENTH.
1
10.
tlie
Tone
ZcA
rests ( 9)
'i^
^X
loOT
oaio So
^X
looi
'!ik
^X ]oai
f
001 So 01 ^1 looi
ZUa Zo^ ^ \0
(001
Olr
*
fOOl 1
f^A*
*
>j
ja
a*
U 01.2 (001
9)
^^
oiSos
1
^1
QJ A1 -SO Olr
;a.y.
(J
001 (001 QJ
lli
^( |001
tm
o-j
)0i ^A.1 ])
12
(001
10
oi, (001
10 U
OLA
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Yerse
2).
1.
word
it
1.,
Aim is the final syllable and takes ends with a movable consonant ( 9.1
tone, as
2.
and
b)
y
Y.l. W.2.,
^( takes the
oA
01
is
and
c)
Rem.; ^8.
9.1
and
2).
the penultimate syllable ilnd has the tone according to the general rule (9.1).
V.l. W.4., So
d) Y.8. W.2.,
01,.
is
because 01
is
movable.
EXEKCISE ELEVENTH
e)
MARKS
OF PUNCTUATION.
279
S)
is
tlie tone.
ends with a
g) Y.5. W.3., Qm is inserted above as receiving the tone according to the general rule, though it is somewhat doubtful whether, in such cases the tone was on the penultimate or Euphony would seem to ultimate syllable (9. 1. Rem.). favor the former opinion there is another instance of the
;
same kind in
v. 7.
w.3.
EXERCISE ELEVENTH.
1.
11.
V* EXPLANATION'S.
4.,
*
:
a)
Yerse
word
is
erally used to denote the end of a period, but sometimes used in the middle to denote a slight pause similar perhaps to our comma. It is used so here (l0.d).
b)
c)
Y.L
w.l5.,
Y.5. W.4.,
(10.a).
d) Y.5. W.7.,
of any
e)
mark
of punctuation. It
(10.c).
280
EXEECISE TWELFTH.
t
12.
(6)
EXPLANATIONS.
Yerse 3. word 4., " over the word is an instance of Ribui indicating that the preposition has a plural suffix (
a)
e.l.Rem.; 16.C). J) y.4. W.2., here Ribui indicates that the noun over which it is placed is in the plural number though it is rendered as if it were in the singular. This word occurs only in the plural form (44.Rem.6). The same is true in respect to V.4. W.4. c) Y.4.W.7., Ribui indicates simply the plural form of the noun as above.
EXERCISE THIRTEENTH.
t
Read the Syriac
Yerse
aithau
1..
13.
B^rishith
aithau
vo meletho vhu
m^lHho
vo l^voth
vo hu melHho.
281
V.
V.
2.,
bono aithau vo
/
'
8.,
medhem dahhvo,
/ f /
f
ft
V.
4.,
beh
"
bbaye bb*vo.
v^bbaye
aitbaybun
nub^^ro
dbavnaynosbo.
V.
5.,
adbr^keb^
f
V.
6., bb^'vo
varnosbo dbesbtadbar
men
alobo
sbm6b
yubbanon.
..
..
V.
7.,
/
bono
etbo
-
l^'sob^dbntbo db^nasbedb
.. ..
al
..
nub*ro.
.,
V.
8.
lo
bu b^vo nub^ro.
elo
~
db^nasbedb
al nubro.
_
/
detbo poPmo.
f
iff
lo
yadheb.
EXPLANATIONS.
X
^\^
Tbe
is
tbe
not
mak-
brew, and
b)
is
Y.
1.
w.
is
like ai,
In oA, o bavtbongb tbe a sound is scarcely perceivable. ing a beterogeneous vowel, does not fully quiesce, still it so melts into tbe vowel tbat it can bardly be considered as a
282
movable consonant (vid T4.2.Rem.). it takes Linea occultans (8) and the
c)
not sounded as
V.l. W.3., loqi CIl is not sounded on account of Linea occultans, and O becomes vocal by beginning a syllable.
Olaph so unites with, a, scarcely "perceivable in pronunciation, though being at the beginning of a syllable it is a It is at the same time a gutregular movable consonant. tural letter and must have the sound of the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks (vid. Tl.2.Rem.).
the a
d) Y.l. w.lO., I sound that
is
pronounced
is
it
e) V.l. w.ll., lo^ _L is pronounced broad and long as has a quiescent (13.1. Rem.).
it
/) y.3.
W.I.,
^^
is
pronounced thus
Jcul^
u taking the
it
The _L
3).
is
short here as
has no
Rem.
Olpilo bidheh.
is
Ol
is
letter.
K) Y.3.W.4.,
as well as oi
{s otiant.
In ooij
ced with the sound.
y
)
dahhvo.
syllable.
CJl
is
first
is
it
has
no quiescent though
*^ so melts into the vowel that it hardly be considered as a movable consonant (vid. ^ 4. can 2. Rem.).
k) Y.6. W.I.,
is
vocal and
is
pronounced
witli
Sheva.
EXEECISE FOUKTEENTH
TRANSLATION.
283
EXEECISE FOUKTEENTH.
t 14
Translate
LiiefraUy
:
Verse
lie
1.
In
(the)
(or it
it
the)
Word
beginning was (the) Word and was with God and God was he
or
(the)
Word.
2.
Every (thing) by (the) hand of him was without him also not anything was which was.
3.
and
4.
lives
5.
In him life (lit. lives) was, and life was were) (the) light of (the) sons of man.
(lit.
And
(lit.
he
(or
it)
(There)
the
name
This (man) came for a witness, who shall (should) bear witness concerning (the) light, that every man might believe through (the) hand of him.
but not he was) (the) light (came for a witness) who might bear witness concern8.
He was
not
(lit.
284
9.
shineth world.
10.
For (that light) was (the) light of truth, which upon every man, who cometh into (the)
(lie)
and
not
(the)
was in (the) world (lit. in the world was) world was by his hand and (the) world did
him.
know
EXPLANATIONS:
In translating this word, no distinct character in Syriac for It was originally expressed by the the definite article. noun in the emphatic state but this is by no means uniThere are many cases, as in Uebrew. versal in laterSyriac. in which the definite and indefinite articles have no word nor character to represent them, and they must be supplied
a)
Yerse
1.
word
1.,
Ai.ii.>;n>
the is
supplied.
There
is
in translating (45.1).
b) y.].
The
substan-
verb La]
001 IS a pronoun of the masculine Y.l. W.5.. 001 gender. It is pleonastic nd need not be rendered (55). As the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine
c)
X
_
and feminine oqi might be considered either masculine and may mean he or it (43).
d) y.3. W.3.,
1
as neuter or
001
is
rendered
z^a5,
and
is
in the imperfect
without
e)
.-oioA.1
(vid. 65.B.a).
Y.3. W.7.,
is
^001
is
last.
The
same
true
m respect to
first
/) Y.3.
together.
W.6., I'U*
The
and io^-ii (v.3. w.8) should be taken means any and the second something or
EXERCISE FIFTEENTH
thing.
CHANGES
OF CONSONANTS. 285
Ifiing,
g) V.4. W.2.,
is
rendered
life.
takes the plural form though it usually takes a singular m<^aning and has sometimes a :-^ingular and sometimes a pluHere it takes a verb singular and in v.4. w.4., a ral verb.
verb plural.
,
J'
a participle but it is used instead of the present tense of the verb (64.2. A. andKem. also
h) V.5. W.4.,
is
;
9aulD
^
it
18.5).
(lit.) is
sent;
EXEECISE FIFTEENTH.
1
Find
the
15.
Changes of Consonants
Dropped
1.
^
AddedExchanged
Assimilated Transposed
(12).
tion
All of those letters which take Linea occultans, are in reality assimilated (vid. 12. and ^9).
2.
:
t/ransposir
tion
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Terse
6.
word
3.,
ij'Aslj
is
in the
Ethpa. conjugation
286
A be
Find dropped :
3.
those
Consonants
wbich have
been
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse dropped.
1.
word
4.,
'{t^^
is
from
]]2i, const.
A^^*
] is
for
the suffix.
Y.3, W.7., Zooi (37 Table).
c)
1
7
is
7\-r
m^O
'
im>
(
m.
is
J.
is
preforma-
tive So
/) Y.7.
fore 1^
\v.7.,
and
f
v.9.
7
w.
7.,
*i\n>
is
dropped be-
is
dropped before
2jD
4.
^oio
1
1
^oio
? 1
.*ou
Gl
Ol
? 1
wiOlO
Ijlj^olji^l-ilollD
Ol
EXPL AN ATIONS.
a)
Yerse
1.
word
I.,
A-ijl*'^
is
added
as a prefix.
EXERCISE FIFTEENTH
h)
CHANGES
1
is
OF CONSONANTS. 287
is
suffix.
c)
y.l. W.4.,
1 is
lAl^* A
is
state
and
d)
YA.
is
added
end
to
form the
emphatic
e)
to
is
to
YA.
W.2.,
"^-
(118.;).
i)
YA.
W.5.,
inflection
and
*)
is is
k) Y.4.W.6., jjOiOJ*
is
(118.
I)
.y).
y.5.
tr.3.,
PQAA*a
is
added
to
state.
m) Y.5.
W.4.,
jouIjd* Sd
is
a preformative occurring in
is
added
in the
Aphel conjuga-
A and
!>
p) Y.l.
W.4., >oi
J IS a preformative.
288
q)
in-
flection.
r)
is
tion.
s)
\%S>
is
to
state.
5.
is
often
exchanged
exchange
Other
letters also
EXERCISE SIXTEENTH.
t
Find
the changes
16.
trans-
of vowels
jposed
thrown bachexchanged
( 15).
:
1.
a)
^
EXPLANATIONS:
2.,
Yersel. word
wOioAji|^
JL
is
same as above.
exercish: sixrKKM'ir
changes of vowels.
is
289
to 0
ili
c)
V.l. w.ll.,
(oi^o* _L
is
to
on
account of the
e)
suffix.
ped and
vowel -^
1).
falls
participle k? (23.
/) V.6.
W.3., yjL3\y*
JL
is
to y*
back from
to *j (36;
18.37), as the vowel JL of the original form ^r-a is and a suffix appended (Tl6.2. e, and4.Z ; |[18.37).
dropped
2.
Find those
wliicli
are
exchanged
for
a)
for
for
EXPLANATIONS:
Yerse 3. word 2., oirpo is derived from f^* is dropped and JL added in the course of inflection and _f. is thrown back from 1 to s (^16.1.d) the word here being in
the suffix
state.
,
Some would
and
is
chang-
ed into
b)
(iri6.4. c
5. d).
into
in the con-
c)
*
is
changed
as the third radical of the verb into derived, is Resh (23 1).
,
'
is
7
^
c?)
Y.7. W.8.,
^SCaOU
is
ischangis
ed into
and
>
passing from
Peal to Aphel.
But
is
dropped
290
and
added
and
in
Y.lO. W.8., OUlr-^ is derived from ^r-*j and has the appearance of being changed into _L on 'account of the suffix (36.A.Rem.) but _L is dropped and JL thrown back upon a (ll6.1.^ and 4.6; ^18.37).
e)
;
3.
EXPLANATIONS.
>00tJ with transposed in the emphatic state from the last to the part of the word {vid.^lS.y).
SoiQJ from
JOU or
is
first
The
all
similarly explained.
4.
:
7
f7QTP7ypyi*f\i*7JP
T
P
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Verse
;
1.
word
2.,
wiOiO
is
not dropped as
;
%ia
quiesces in
h)
_L. is
making
IALSo
it
immutable (vid.l5.8
derived from
|J!sO,
48. A).
V.l
W.4.,
is
construct A^Lo*
state
struct state
EXERCISE SIXTEENTH
CHANGES
OF VOWELS.
291
V.8. W.2.,
Oi,-Uo
*
is
derived from
r^*
is
dropped
state,
c?).
is
-I
^ 1.6.5.
the
|r>* is
femimne form of
^a**
is
drop-
ped
e)
(vid.
116.5.7).
is
ab-
suffix pro-
In taking the
suffix,
of the verb
;
is
dropped and
is
118.7).
emphatic
state,
no
from the noun ^OlCD, and, in the course of inflection dropped (vid.ti6.5.^; 118.17).
h) V.7. W.8.,
f>
^SiQaOU
is
a verb from
7
^^sDf,
and
is
in the
in the
Aphel conjugation.
first
In the course of
is
inflection,
part of the
word
dropped and
in the
7
last part,
and
is
compounded of ? and
p'fM*
The latter
is
falls away in a noun in the emphatic state from ; taking an additional syllable (^15. 3) to form the emphatic
stxite (vid.
16. 5.
.s;
1
is
18.32).
k) V.9.W.9.,
JV^NnN
compounded of
-^
is dropped in forming the emphatic state from ^a^ phatic state (15.3"^ as an additional syllable is received 16.5.^; 118.36).
*
I)
is
a verb with a
suffix,
derived from
292
is dropped and ^r> In taking the suffix, upon the first radical (36 ^18. 87).
;
falls
back
5.
Find
tliose
yppyrpp7i*7pr'i7kPF7
P707^p^7^P^P7PF*I>Pf
9
10
Oi-np*
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Yerse
1.
word
2.,
%^GrioA^f^
is
IAaSd
*
is
is
dropped and
added (compare ^
state,
11^.
d),
Y.l. w.lO.,
foC^
is
in the
it is
emphatic
but as
it al-
ways appears in
(at
perhaps better not to place the end of the word) among the vowels added.
this state
-R
is
is
dropped
state
added.
Jl
is
dropped to give place to the suffix with which added (vid. 46. 1. a compare [[ 16. 4. c 1" 18.
is
;
3.
m).
e)
Y.
w.
4.J
w>Oio, \Np o
is
from fS\n
is
added
with the
suffix.
>
f)
V.3. W.6.,
ped and
1rM
is
t***
is
drop
added.
EXEKCISE SIXTEENTH
0) y.3. W.9., \ooij* pronunciation (vid-^flS.^).
CHANGES
OF VOWELS.
j to
293
IS
assumed over
aid in the
h)
YA.
W.6.,
(ioiQJ
"
is
is
state (vid.T18.?/).
7
i)
V.4. W.7.,
fai
iinn
Jaj]
is
assumed
(vid. 15.4.6).
The former
is
in the construct
is
dopped and
added
(vid. 15.3
and 4
^[16. 4. e;
18.1).
Tc)
Y.5. W.3.,
pqamJD*
This
is
emphatic
1)
state is the
added.
from 5au*
The
first
is
preformative (vid.^l8.5).
m)
from
is
a verb in the
Aphel conjugation
*^>j
is
is
also
(ai;)
and
is
ad-
ded (vid.ll8.9).
o)
is
compounded of
is
is
formative. in Ethpaal.
The first _L
is
p) Y.7.
W.3.,
lAojOimL
compounded of the
and
294
the verb
Aphel of
joifio^
is
assumed in Apbel
^Sfi-iOU
is
a verb in the
inflection,
7
Aphel conjugation
from ^iD(
of the
In the course of
is
word
of the word,
22).
ft
is
I[l8.
i;*j
latter is a
is
compounded of
>
and
7
ih'fM*
9
The
If
ac-
noun
in
dropped on
>
takes the
new vowel _L
(15. 4. b),
T 16.4.
i]
is
compounded of
is
is
added
and -L
is
assumed
EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH.
1
Find
1.
the
Suffioces
and
lives
Prefixes^ Sufformatives
EXERCISE SEVENTEENTH
295
>
L O
EXPLANATIONS.
a)
Yerse
1.
word
1.,
is
a prefix preposition.
b) V.3. W.2.,
ID is
it.
a prefix preposition
c) V.3. W.9., J is a relative pronoun prefixed to the verb, and, two vowelless consonants occurring together, JL is assumed to aid in pronunciation. The other instances need
>
no explanation
2.
OL
01-
Ol
01..
01
EXPLANATIONS:
ft
a)
Yerse
3.
word
2.,
oi
is
its
union vowel.
h)
Y.3. W.4.,
%jiOiO-., is
sition,
a suf-
formative.
Rem.
We use
words as neces-
Such
are mero formative letters and properly constito wiiich they are attached, while suffixes
word
and
appendages which have more distinct significations of themselves, and do not necessarily compose a part of the word to
prefixes are
which they
are attached.
296
3.
EXERCISES
IN"
SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
:
Find
tlie
Preformatwes
So
A1
-J
^ou
.J
So
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 2., 1 is, strictly speaking,a preformative but the letter seems to constitute a part of the word through all of its changes and does not so properly come under this head as it does under "consonants added" (^15.4.6).
7
h)
Y.5. W.4.,
Sd
_7
is
inflection.
is
Aphel con-
d) Y.Q, W.8.,
A
7
'\
added in the
Ethpaal conjugation.
e)
Y.7. W.8.,
^OIJ
is
Aphel
future.
4.
Mil
a)
^cno
11
EXPLANATIONS:
Yerse
1.
word
2.,
%jqiO
is
a sufformative as
it
forms,
according to the inflection, the third person singular masculine preterite, though it is in reality a noun suffix attached
to the original
h)
tic
noun A^
is
being.
Y.l. W.4., lA
state,
or rather 1
the
state
EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH
PAESE.
emphatic
297
ia
and A
formed.
c)
of
Y.3. W.6.,
is
d) Y.3. W.7.,
and
is
a formative
feminine gender.
a sufformative found in the course
^OGU
is
is
of inflection.
/) V.4.
W.7.,
g) Y.6. W.2.,
is
an emphatic ending.
EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH.
1
18.
Fanrse
a) Yerse
1.
word
1.,
Ajus-i^s
is
compounded of the
pre-
position ;0 in
is
a pre;
52
84).
LkM^j
is
a denominative
noun
MjA principal^
chief,
head (Hebrew
its
tU'S^'"!
Chaldee "^J^n
formed by adding to
A^ (39.2).
(15.4;
The vowel
13.3).
is
Aa^9
is
declension as
its
it is
somewhat
irregular in
298
The two
points over
to
in the plural
compose Ribui.
and
at the
y still
belongs to
same time
it is
feminine
gender as
transferred from
state,
In the
(
is
Aa.mj>,
emphatic lA.ui^9
45;
and governed by
b)
verbfrom A-a]
to
be
(vid. Lexicon).
being, v'ith
a prosthetic
(
it is
^OloAa]
irregular
suffix
is
^OlO-., as
17.2.
Rem.)neuter (
digm)
66.2
(38.1.Para-
third
person (38.
Paradigm)
masculine gender
;
compare
(18.4)
found.
First person
second masculine
{thou
art),
y^Lk] {thou
masculine
second feminine
{he
is)
> i
^ hLk]
third
*aaioA.*'|
(vid.38.1. Inflection).
It agrees
with
B.2).
c)
its
is
to
be
(38.1) a ]]'verb(38.
third person
1)irregular (32)neuter
number.
19)
singular
effect of
When
verb
it
has the
Yau
conversive in Hebre
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
PARSING.
as a lielping
299
verb
lA^So loord
is
from
39.
viio
2. h.
to
speak^
]^^
(vid.
third
example
emphatic
]Aj^V)
first
A;
48. B. feminines;
6. 4. c).
^!^,
]ooi
e)
son singular
feminine emphatic
0010
is
state
nominative case
perto
wiOioLf (80.B.2).
y.l. W.5.,
a prefix
may
is
(53. 1. Rem.).
001
be translated by he or
as
Syriac
43)
sing-
ular.
in transla-
ting (55).
supra.
f) V.l.
(52
;
W.9.,
2q^
wiih^
a preposition governing
(Oli^
84).
God
nib^
a de-
God.
nibb^
is
is
in the
em-
45.1.Rem.).
300
the
EXERCISES
IN"
SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
emphatic
state.
It is a substantive
1.
45. masculines
A)
singular-masculine-emphatic state
third person
erned by
iol (75.5).
faC^o O
]oi-!L
anc?,
h) y.l. w.ll.,
God,
nominative to
vid. supra,
y) y.l. w. 15.,
Ibqi
|ALSd word,
\\l8.b),
this,
it
^qioLf (80;
poi
k) y.2. W.I.,
same.
It has the
The forms
as
it
(vid.17).
I)
y.3. W.I.,
^^
allj
a pronoun
1.
of nouns
plied
third person-masculine-absolute
as a collective
declined
according to decl.
state.
The im^o^
itself
noun would be
might be considered
noun and
in the
nomi
m) y.3.
,
W.2.,
Olr^lo by
the
hand of him or hy
his
hand
O is a prefix preposition governing rA^^* The whole word is compounded of the preposition a hy, the noun ^a empha^
rk\
him or
his,
i^ (. is
a de"Ti
and takes a
suffix
(Hebrew
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
PARSING.
801
emphatic
|a,
|
j-i],
plural absolute^r^ I,
construct
^hI, emphatic
B)
abla-
(45. masculines
01
|
tive case
(75.5).
is
a suffix pro-
noun attached
emphatic
state
and
falls
away
(46.1.
(54.
genitive case
It agrees
by
to
^i]! (16
be is
16. B; 74).
n) Y.3.W.3., |001
with ^i^a
^Olo,sNoo
o and^
a7id without
htm
compounded
i%\o
suffix
its
of the conjunction
O, the preposition
is
pronoun %jOio^*
without
7
a conjunction as above.
It
is
governs
is
ablative
case
and governed by
jili
jp)
(75.5).
not^ neither
compounded of U
one, certain,
not^
and
2)( is
sense.
q)
U
7
,
not is
an adverb and
lrA one,
Y.3. W.6.,
rM, is a
any
one,
a certain
b)
cLi^y't
from
or a numerical adjecindefinite
tive (50.2).
pronoun
V.3.W.7., Zooi
to
be
from looi^
] is
changed into Z to
302
5)
that of
1,-M
above
It is
It is
it,
,-M
belongs to
as
OOT and
tance
^r-iD
is
(^
ll.c;
V.3.
is
"W.9.,
fOpij which
was
which
compounded of the
is
jo 01
and
>
in
third singu-
lar
nominative
.,
lopi
in him,
v) Y.4. w. 1
01-^
compounded of
in
and 01-
him.
01is
is
a suffix
pronoun
singular
in
( 75.5.
compare 54.3.1).
v)
YA.
W.2.,
life,
is
ble A). It occurs always in the plural form(44.Eem.6), generally with a singular signification (vid.Lexicon; 80.2)-deriv-
ed from |a-M
to
its
usual form.
It
is
(80.2.6).
w) YA.
tion
W.4., t.4.A*0
and
life
O and, and
it
^i-m
is
life.
This
above, only
2. a).
in the
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
x) Y.4. W.5., ^oOLiAu]
PARSING.
303
third person
plural masculine,
and
d.
.
supra).
is
>OlQJ U^ht,
'
to
shine
an
infinitive
(^
like
U^QO
The So
one in
from
^^^
40.Table, II. A.
you
pOU,
(jOU, pGIQJ*
infinitive is here
dropped (compare
is
the
usually appears-declensionIV.(45.masculines,D)-
nominative case after ^oouA-i], but used as the construct before J of the
1)
next word
(74.2.a),
noun
(41.1)-compounded
the
genitive
'f^ son,
of
>,
jAd and
]mS\*
"
of
in
7..
Si
sign of
is
case,
which follows
(74.8).
aJjD sons,
from
7
primitive
"y
anomalous.
|;1D,
Singular absolute
;iD.
^''
^uAd, emphatic
t-a-lfD
in the
in
the construct
state, as
(vid. Stuart's
Hebrew
is
Grammar,
-ftj"!,
governed by
> (74).
]mJ man,
from
the
word
1,
';25^5j^
man (Chaldee
it
"ilDJSsVa
primitive noun-declension
(vid.
Lexicon)
it
^third
person
singular as
804
lute
'
and construct
..7
"
aj1,
emphatic taj],
absolute
plural
^M
by the preceding
noun
2) Y.5. W.I.,
opio {Yid.supra
e),
word
vid.
y above.
Z7i(^/ie)c:?ar^ne55,is
compounded of the
preposition 15
stantive
z/i,
poaM
is
a sub-
noun
(the
(
Hebrew form
is 'n'n)
^ verbal noun)
declension fourth
lar
45. masculines
D)
third
person singu-
( 75.5).
"...
7
7
to
to
shine (33)
an active participle
(19. B. 4; 23.1).
used here
for
as
though
it
were a verb
(vid. Trans.
to the place
where
it is
iouZf ( l9.Table
II,
1
and
and
22.1),
and Eem.),
preterite
Aphel h6u\
(19.
future
Aphel
ioilJ
Aphel
23.1), infinitive
9;
Aphel
oioiii (19.Table
II;
19.B.3 and
23.1)participle active
EXEKCf.S'':
EIGHTEENTH
PARSING.
805
Aphel iouSo (19.Table II 19.B.4; 23.1). It is found in the Aphel conjugation-active participle masculine gen;
'
jOlQJ ( 64.
1.
A), or
is
absolute with
it.
6) y.5. W.5.,
pOA-jaO and
k
^he darkness.
is
a conjunc-
-x
-n
tion as
is
in
Ol-Oj>1
supra.
is
....
it^
an irregular
*
ac-
(TL Irregular-
-Aphel
is
preterite.
yhyx*
When
is
the suffix
* CTL.^
appended, the
dropped (15.3)
and the
last consona,nt
It is in the 3rd.person
*^>>^I,
its
Pael
^jj,
nom-
mative poJUA^* The suffix OU is a personal pronoun third masculine singular-accusative case (54.B.l) and governed by ySi\*
19 OOl
vjas^ is a
Peal
(42.
is
a composite
noun
%mj\
man
;^
(vid.
is
a primitive
noun
ma-sculines)
singular, construct
to fOOl*
itive
paradigm 49.
declension
1).
masculine-em7
;Q
(74;
118
806
10) Y.6
>
whoj
and yjLa]
culine, a
loas sent,
prefix,
2; %oQ).
sive
>>Af
voice
regularthird
>
singular masculine
indicative
Eth-
pas-
mood
its
preterit
nominative
Pael >>,
paal J>A|
is
transposed (vid.T"15.2.a).
W.4:.,
11) Y.Q.
^iOfrom,
of, is
a preposition
noun
state
singular masculine
emphatic
It
declension ablative
first
third
case,
and gov-
erned bj
(75.5; ^18.^).
GdOs
is
his
and
Clhis.
iQ
anomalous third
in the emphatic
suffix state
singular masculine.
phatic
lines).
state,
po*
suffix state
falls
away
is
formed the
by
dropping
and adding 01
case to
OU
;
his, is
and gov-
erned by ln (16
16.B
74).
noun proper-anomalous-
loci ^01oAji|#
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
15)
PARSING.
307
y.
7.
w.
1.,
poi same,
this
a demonstrative pronoun,
Olaph
(]])
16) V.
7.
w.
2.,
1Z1
came
Lomath
active
mood and
17) V.
7.
w.
3.,
iZojCJiroii/or a witness
is
compounded of
*
p
The form
?CJlfiD
appears as a noun
jcnro, emj)h.
of the 2d declension.
\t>
IjolfiD (45.
In many nouns Z is inserted before the final ] in the feminine O with Z is also sometimes inserted (45. 3 and Rem. 3) as in this word. It has the form here of the emph. feminine. That indeed seems to be the usual form in which the word appears 3d pers. singular, dative case and governed by i^ (75. 1).
as the
same form
emphatic masc.
viz. IjCiro^
18) V.
ness
7.
w.
4.,
)01..m
of
>
li
compounded
witness,
shall (should)
(23.
2.
bear
ai.
or
cause
hear
witness
a)
is
conjugation-active
sing.
(26)-intransitive.
3d
Peal
>C71CD,
Ethpe.
Aph.
pret. ?C7lCD|,
Aph.
masc. gender.
last sylla-
(23.2,
with in the last syllable. Compare 19, Tables I and II). The future tense is here used in the sense of the subjunctive mood imperfect tense (61. 3. A. b) and
amples,
agrees with
its
nominative
? is
a relative pronoun-3d
308
pers.
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
singular,
PARSING.
case
masculine-a prefix-nominative
t)
,
to
position governing
poiQJ
20) V.
7.
w.
6.,
(jOIGJ Zi'^A^-verbal
sAzTie-declension fourth,
3d
^^
(1[18. y).
21) Y.
every,
7.
w.
e
7.,
**Aoj-compounded
is
...
of j that,
all,
connecting joimj and ^-ifi^ou -^ every, noun, but here used as an adjective (58. B.
belongs to -*!
is
2. b.
1.
a proa) and
For declension,
etc. vid.
^18.
*-*! rnan,
a noun from *-*JJ declension first, but is somewhat irregular-3d pers. singular, masc. absolute state, nom. case to
^M
.
Nl iOTj.
vid.
18. 1.
22) V.
w.
8.,
^ SD aOU
irregular, ]si
and
c).
^,
and
is
placed
among the
defective
verbs (35. 2.
^1,
Aph. ^^Q-iOi, future Aph.^2^GfU-activevoice-intransitive3d pers. singular masc.-future tense and used in the sense of the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, and agrees with
its
nominative
7.
t-JU.
9.,
23) V. 24) V.
w.
hand of him.
For parsing,
8.
vid.
w.
1.,
not, is
qualifies looi
25) V. 8. w.
2.,
001 he,
3d
1[18.
26) V.
8.
w.
3.,
with
001 for
its
nominative
EXBRCISE EIGHTEENTH
27) V.
8.
PARSING.
309
w.
(
4.,
fjOlOJ light-SL
vid.
^18.
y).
28) V.
8.
w.
conjunction, a contraction of
|J
no^, and \\if', it continues the sense. Following this and preceding the next word, there is something implied;
supply IZojOim-!^ "IZl came for a witness, the same which is expressed in verse 7. For the remaining three
after
|j]
V.
9.
w. 1 and
2.,
verb and
agrees with poiQ-J understood, pOlO-j poi ^/^a^ light, being implied. For parsing this verb fully, vid. ^18.h.& c.
9.
w.
3., ja-
/or,
is
a conjunction continuing
9.
w.
4.,
pOiQ-J
(vid.
light-Si
noun-nominative case
^oioL]
9.
^18.
y),
j of,
32) V.
w.
5.,
p;*j of ^ri^^A-compounded of
and
\i\ truth.
\S\M is a
coTivmcec^-declension
singular. Construct
noun derived from the verb >; to he first (vid. 48. A. decl. 1. Kem.)absolute, J* or >J, emphatic
p^Ji
and
forming the emphatic state, from \m* falls away on account of the addition at the end (15. 3), then > pre7
senting two vowelless consonants, ? takes the new vowel (15. 4. 5)-3d pers. singular, masc.-genitive case after
_^
P
.P
-X
(74. 2. a).
The
is
an instance
noun
is
33) V.
w.
6.,
,7
7
7
compounded of ^OLJ^Ld
which,
Soujl-Sd
is
shineth, or
>
310
with
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH
> (1[18. 5). >
PARSING.
nomina
;
which,
is
a relative pronoun,
(76. 1
^18.
3).
34) V.
9.
w.
7.,
A^-^^
every and
uioon every
^^J-
man, compoundis
ed of
upon,
-^
man.
^
is
I).
a preposition
-^
18.
a pronoun used *!
is
in the accusative
a noun
(1[18. 1, 9, 21).
j
35) V.
12] comes.
9.
8.,
is
who, and
its
9.,
nominative
]V)
>
(1[18. 16).
w.
NnN
the
into
the t^;or?(i-compounded
-^
is
into,
and
l ^n\s
world.
.
a preposition
(V^
Ns
is
iQ^^ emphatic
final vowel falls away in the emphatic state as a syllable is added (15. 3)-3d pers. singular, masc. accusative case and governed by ^ 37) V. 10. w. 8., (the seven preceding words are ex-
In Sn\\ the
Am-compounded
of 01- him,
^r* is a verb with a suffix pronoun attached to it-derived from the Hebrew 3? i^ to know, doubly
--2)
and ^i^-Peal
preterit
-3d
pers. singular,
By taking masc. indicative mood and agrees with |i^^ form is changed. The common form of a suffix the usual
T
is
^r*
radical
when
- falls away and -- falls back upon the verb takes a suffix (vid. 36).
its
01-
1\
CHRESTOMATHY.
CHRESTOMATHY.
FIEST LESSONS IN TKANSLATINa.
John
MaioA^t
i.
10.
lA!^
ooio
I'AlSo Ibai
^oio'AjV Aa^*)
Ibi!^
2cA
Iboi
ZoL ZuA^o
^OlOpl-^OO
looi
wkOio'A^V l^oi 2
^^
ZOOI
lrA
|J)|
(001
OlpilO
\0
|001>
(.ft^o
012>)1
*
|J
PQmO
-X
-K
P 7
p7
^ijaCLk
oiSa
*
loi^
^
-^
,77
'^
pp
'?^f? l^*r^
(Z]
*
iooi 6
^IOaOU .ai\n>
poi 7
.1-
Ijoicis
^
*
jdimij
P's
fZT)
^<V*^V
)aiisb)
Q' lioLio
looi
oi^l- V^><^o
looi
V)\sn
'^
10
7
Ollpk
314 CHRESTOMATHY
FIRST LESSONS
ii.
IN TRANSLATING.
Matthew
10.
001)
|>00U> (^\Vr>^
u01CU.l;j
V CD>0>01
^(,CLi1
iV)S\
1*)
lin^i
|L^
^OOUk)
%2llLiO
^C^^SdS
aIUa^
]Sdo AI13^uAm
'^
o.n-n,\ oAl
^ooil
jQ.1^1
9 iblO
^H Ml ^1?
ollT
*jJo(aM oZ *^oujoA*j.ns]j
QlSns
1^^^
p ^J
^QJOl*
oili
]i.1,^nn
OW?
OOI V^iDOO
CHRESTOMATHYFIRST LESSONS
IN TRANSLATING.
315
Mark
xiv.
3242.
.o novA n
(2)]::iX
OlLQl '^JO*
p|
P^
r^
pjOl QQZ 33
o'rAiZZlo ]a>oi
]..<^^Vr>
j, "jooi
U^O *\lV\
\>-1 \>.2L30
\uXo
^TD'^OO* 35
'^TilZ 36
A-J I
'r^^lO*
(Al OUSD
^qLiZ
\illo*
7'
jjj
ol.o
O'^aiZZl*
(]
38
VmO> tjauCGll39
x
nl .jDoZ
1.
Ul j^oio* ^1
7
?
P'^77
I
7
7'TP'n
^
I7
-x
*soZ
7
.>
io
^.aAr^ |J0
v
^001
^r>LLi
^001
1 1 >
S>
^^LO ^aOV)>
-ft+k
-I.
I..
797P-R
A^Zj (Zlo*
7
p .Qj]
9
,-dLirDi
f>
41
I*
loio
OAi*
cuxxjZZIo ^inV)
Qrik)>
ji^
y)\aV>> 001
Jli\Ci
Luke
^*ro poij^ >,fcOiiNon
P
xxiii.
18
27.
17*7
^;Solo ^aio
oi^ ^) qio*
7
i8
X7X'^
P7
777
316
2o^ooiSqi >SiLD
21
^> ^oZ*
^QJOI^
*
Or^JaDl
0001 ^^iSO
^^ i
^>
^9
-Tt
v&nai\
(o
,isq4^^i^
22
mi
A^Z>
001^
10
'^''
n*-nppr
^unnL ^>
*
23
*.
|k))|jar^ 0001
^cuoi^
^^O
^0LiJQLOp>
24 ftrriV 25
17*
^>
k'''
Q^U?
*
001 Ih^cd]
r
77
*.
A^^
looi
*>
*p-n
I
^) U^^o
n
\^
.mifnfciol ^^^4^?
'^7'^x>
^<Asl
v^oi\
'6
oil^
^^AnoSo fOO*
.oou
^oicAi qSqdo
lA^'pO
.-"p
P-X
""P?
f
^
y
Vlo*
Q
*7'>*
,^i\il IJUO
or
]iai9
^Oiolkl ^12^0
.IaOOI
r^^?
Luke
33
xxiii.
33
42.
9
9.
^Z ^oiQar^i
*p*
1^
>
P7
9.7
ryp7-*>0
.
''5'
lAi5'rO
^
V*voASdj
^
7
|r>j
.
fADOy!^ oZ(
I
po*
'1.^
xf
p
"7
*.
'^
'^
*p
.**
34
^.
]]
.OOUi
^Qi*
l^l
looi
'^l ^QA^
*
^J
001*
OOulLl
35
CLiil))lo
^G10AmJ CXyv^O
^
^r^^ H^ C^f*
(OOI
Ip^o ]SQ1
^J
^JO*
(0^
CHRESTOMATHYFIRST LESSONS
IN TRANSLATING.
SH
i>
-n
17
7
7
%)]
012
oil
Q
0001
^^A^ir^Soo*
*P.
I
7
n"!^''
|oi^>
P
^JcO'r>
>.
*Uja
X
^o;nV>o oiZcA
7
ff
A^l^i*
^A2D
-X
\jj]
r*Ol l*^3t>
-n
>.
^0
t^
oiik
-R-h-n
*
i700
\cibD
^'r^lo*
II
70
70^
-n
-XO
^,"nS .QJOI
t'
^ ^>
-n
*
*
'P'X,,
^
*.
ip7
''
)!
^> looi
xo'^
39
7
70
I
:p
r^"^ ^^
'U>OOU> ]o\V)
''
QJOl *Aa')-rm0
0,,
**^')0^01q1i1001 *^rMr^
07
] po*
OlSOl 0001 ^a
7 7
OifD
^] X^o
y^mSi^
\^
*2)1
i>i
4o
Aj]
1
*2)1 j
7
^ I0I77
(j
oil jSolo
01*r^A
7
01
;^.
n
10*7
^^0"^
tjCl
7
*>
-HOO
" 7
7T>77
fi
.oil
H^^ 0-X7
U UfiD?
^r^ ^?
yZon\V)o
7T<
r^lo'^^ 42
^^k) jj^p>Zl
^qaA
Luke
loOlZ
*jiXil
xxiii.
43
53,
piD^?
^
f
A V\
-""O
riol
tt''^'*'*'
*n^
IS
7*
yuil
,;^1
..7
077
7
,
As \Lm
-ft
^>
..10
^001
7
A^l'f'
7
]fr>>^ <y>^ ^^
t^
771
wi^l
-R
^J^r-i^lo
Y'^*^ JiSQSO*
(
^aJL
^Al |k5ji
07
p^>1
Olio 45
,*rSDlo ]Sd>
Pao^Qm^p^o*
7
IS
oiAi^
77
^
7
Uiuoi j p.jZ 46
T^
T 7
''>0-X
2>o,Sd
poi A^Vh;*
rlsolo
loilU n .looij
Ijoj^io
318
48 00C71
^-^1
]ald ooLb^O'^
*
*loGfi \o^y\
Vr^t
49
pi
**U->-\
^
..
^Uo
^
^X
-n
Ti
-n
-A. .-A
>
oiSQi
^001 ^Z1)
^^iSil ]ajo
^aAji>
ep
kp
pi7
'
PPP
P7
-X
IPX
P
f*
P9
l*"* ^^
loOl
]limk)0
s7 P .OOU'rlOm^O
t^ff
^0C7U.>^Jl
|001
"" * l' ?'**' ^2*rO ]joi^ f^^'^? UonNv>\ -^7 '^7 '7 ppi> -n *9 53 01SQCDO *IjAd> 1* >.M>n OlD'fDO GltaSio'^ V^QAa> Ol*,.^ I ^i 7 -^ ^' p ^ P P locn ULtSall] ^\a^r^ ^AjI JJ) OOI 1'H-^^ l^OCLO LkS^^
It*'
"/^
'f'
^^v^l^o
'.^coQ^Xk^
997
ZcA
t"*
3:
x"*
5v
012
Acts
I..pi7
'^.
xvii.
2232.
22*.]ju2Z'|
7
^t^
*"
JlfioLo^) V>QO
pO*
i^7'i
*^P'^
*^
XI7
"W
n'X7
-ftp
P*
*
-Tl
P
ocji
*
-X
17
^nuAoj
|J
p9
looi
^
pp
ip
^Am>)
IPP7
*
|
I^m
IAIa ip
)j01Jik 01-^
.oil
^AjI
^oAjI ^->^r
P? ^^U^Ol
24
Aa|> |V^\^o
]]
p
(Sa^ r^^?
7
'rKy |oi-L*
PP7IP7^..
Ur^
a
P7
*U>1?0
..7
97rPP
*
^Qnl p ;nmV) p]
v*^
r^Hl) IJIUGIO
*
Ol3
'^-T\
PP7
77p
25
319
*"7
0,
-Loo*
..
rr
^x2)l
^
.
^^.^^
>n 1
7
m 26
7
op
7
""7
^m
p P
-X
oi^
-ft
]soai
J
^m ^>
n*...
-ftP^
*.
*"7
\ici\
I^OmZ
n
:>afioo
X7 7PPV
011^00210
^'fSiO
^
oi^
P 7 ?
(i^l
-X
'^?.
^!i30
^-i^iaiSOO loiiy
^Sn ^OOOUJ*
laliin? VrSOOlJ
27
^i ^^A^lo
7
-X
^IiSqZASOO ^1>
->
x>
7
*rk..
001 OlO*
I
7
^^Ik)
pM28
p
-X
-K
^*
*^aia^
7
>
ooi oiiSO)
O'^Lo]
P
^q:^^> ]v?>n>j
P
7ip7
>
^
-n
p ..p
|aj1
^]y
ipp.-p
"
ooiloi-L^^oiQ^j^\u^oi|mjl*29 pl7 P'XP %" ^m '^t *' 1Zqj1oo|o ]g^i\>.> ]))ii^ ol ]SD]mL ol t^oij^Lj n-n.. 97 x P'XP7 77P'X PP7
P
iX
;nmV^\^iini
'
P^
-X
P P
-X
>^t
'*'
* P
^P Pt7
.o^Jj
\
p*x
'p-X^?
p
QiSoA
7
po*
^I
17
n
t
01^ in]
Tt^ax
32
*ooai
*>?
1)01
^^
7P7IP
V^V)
^ooulo
^
\lZulo Zujd
^>
1AScu.d
i\
7P
I'P-X
^^1iSV> ^'r^l
^1^
vi.
-<
Romans
10.
t^oZ 010
T,
'i7
^AjlSo?
-fA..
\ il
.^fiOLM*''^
320
IN TRANSLATING.
PyyO
R-KO
h-n
el* w2)
pi-X
-^7^
7-^
-h-n
^y*..
(>
^P7
.
!>
><
P-X
f>
^\4^Ajj
*7
f>
pi
7 7
ip.*
pi
*
.
rt
air:)
^AaId
77T7P
.*
'
|]
.^
P IZg^o
Z]^
I
^^^oZo
71 r-^
.iZulo Zu!D
I
CoLossiANs
iii.
15.
19
P 7
77-R
"^t^
^"^
.lcn!L>
PI7
]iV)
2.U>ti? Do ^pO.7^P
,
Qi)Z1
I
*
7
^\il>*
>
^^
'*>1a
7
.-)Zu
"^
X..77
-x -x
*^t
^ I
.p
..
7 7
-n
* *
.oAj] ^1 ^r^Cl
X..
**^.a-i-isi
QjiOOl)
7P7
IP
17
T>
-X
*P
"K
"^
'P
-X
>
-!>
*"
OIU.OJ 1Z1
'piu..
t'
IN TRANSLATING.
321
-X
-X
->
-X
17
-X
-X
"^
*P
ouii:}> *
P-X
7P7T77*
07
*
/liA>
p*
IZh^*
oan\o* n
P
^t'lft
'
'^
"fl
-fix..
It
X..7
p> 7
'Iri.tJlLMO
m.0%
-X
^P*.,
.'X
17
7
^^^->-301
X7
I1
X
^P7
I
7
9
71
f
9
-X
X77
7
7 P
^7
'K
77
^Pi
-!>7
^rJ
^''t'^
x7PP
lb\j^
-x
-X-X
(m^aaSo>
criV)\o *
7
7
|Zo;>^..>
aoai)
*7
X77
.oZuocfio
.xx-n*
.oAa;)Z1 ol^)
P7*
X
^>qSo
'r>v>
^m^
^.qdZqjq!^
P
#7
Revelations
OP
fi
v.
7
10.
-hp
*i7
7x7
I7p
Voo
^o
00
Q.A
7
^
f\
17
*^Ar)>
X7
2
aOioAal QilD
*.V=^)
322
IN
TRANSLATING
(Jo*
oilaj
fsn^
|;aV>\o
JaAn^
^**A2iiQl ]aj
4/uoai
P5P7
(J
poo*
ouiV)\ Po
ItjAtl^
^
^Asild
*}i>'|
"*
**'*
"
"2
)j9
^
17
"loi
-X*
(Jo l^^Aii^
^'^y^^
*^\t^
dPiDZ
^wA
1*1^=^
*rSo|
IaIjlO ^QJOI
^
P
^^0* .m>^..Vr>V
001 .ro??
001
.^^
*
T
'^^'^^..^
^t^
^P^7
711
PP7
lAj'rO
pi
*P
l70vp
\]a>iiin .ajoi>
'
oi^ /ul)
7
]m*ni ^1
y:>])> I'r^ol
a""^
PP7*-X
1>7i
9*
7
^.7
*Mi
up
"^
f
op
tt
77
7
P7
90
#^*^
""^y
^Aoi
'H17
PP7
^*p2AaL
'^P
po* .^fioojoSZ^
7
X7P
^
-cts^^o
'h
^01
7P
7x..ppi*,
77'X
X7
up
*
IP797
^
'>.
"^
177
^
hr7
*
lAiij'^
f>..
^^ 7lpp7v*
loii^]]
*>^? P^r^
loi^lJ
V7
p7
7
^ P-X
X
AiTDio
AmojZlj
P7
7
10
]^Vvo ^\> ^
^qjI ZfTiiio*
lASoolo ]Soio
U^o
-^..
p
PP*
IN TRANSLATING.
323
Revelations
9 y
xxii.
-?
10.
1
17
pi
Ilia
p
^
,.Aj
-x
^
-x
!>
t\
X7
^^ym:>
n^
7
rfiaijZ
"
''
^oou iM>
-ft
-ft.>7
U-m?
\
1)Aj
7>
^o*
oio
-X
-x
i>.pp-n
n X
7
!>>
7.7PP7
-n
PP7
P
-X
-x
-ft
""J^
.looTJ
-ft
*Oll^)
R
])0**r)
-ft
^VkiJO'*'
1^
"[''ovn 4
^
7
P7
.,r:)oZ
oiLij ISiaso^
(Jo
ky*?
loou
n^XVnirt
^^OOli^
/^JtSOsj
>lZ'pi'ySol^iSnoiSDUSo^^oi
-ft
l^\s>lV)\\\Q
P P
^ Jy^
.^
''
oi^a>
77?
pUS^
-ft
A^ wkJ^r^ U^^?
'^P
Nob
|0L^
t"'*
^>1> ^-Aoi OIAaJ Ir^i^ ^,^0 X 7p 7 7PP 7 7 P p J loAoj 1Zqjl:ijj (JSqL 'r^J? 001 ljAr:)Q^ *^V^ ^^ ^^1 loio* 7 "P 7P 7P70.p-ft ft->7 P PP i\lSlS PO :^-Aoi IVmO ^1SQJ OOI^J-mOiIjI^O* poi8
loOlSfl^
-X
t^^*''t
-ft"
-X
-ft
-ftp
'*>%^
7-ft
-ft
001
p|j^? /?xpP
'
"1*
*^oiQ-i..>
P
5>o^^
y,.mV)\ A\^i
-ftp
t"^*
x7pi>
vA->i.js*o
t\
I7-ft
J^
'rlolo*
.^.L>>
" "
lAia ^U
"*^t
jiVm
^^Ol^loOl 1CU*1DJ9
-".x
IP
-A..
W
y
If
-ft"
-X
J>
^P7
^-Aoi>o
P
ox
0^
l^Ao)
p
*^
|JSq^ ^*r4J?
7-ft
lim
7
-ft
7x
^%
-^
'^
jOy^loilu poii'
7^
'7 P
P y
X 7
-ftp
^oioAal
^f:LA*rO> *p>..
324:
IX TRANSLATING.
Revelations
11,^5Q^
a.
xxii.
11
21.
i^Ict'''
.^OOZ ^QU .^Qlk)> OCT* X*'>!>'X I7PIT 2o2 ^r)Aj (aj^co jdo2 r^^u IZona)! Inu^io
1^^
>
77^<)I7
,11. J
0010
^1 yiAii
lal^Vn
^-,^1
..^
wA^? I^lo
.^
-
Ij1_i2i
r^
OCT
CT^) \f^^
\MjkJ
*uCT0Zu1j
pci^Q* OCTO
U^HjiI
OCT
Vr^l 0^10
..OCT^)
15
P^C^
^^20
P-K
loOU)
1<^V^ ;*^V*
rTIlO ^Om?)
lAia;^ .<Au
1,bA)
lijAso
l-u^j
1m lO
^
t"^
t M> >'<y)0
16
.n^V 0?CTmV)\
7
17 .r0??
^1
17
I0P7
ImtgO
P-X
PP7
.1^
W UA ^r^ PI7
p
p p..
"
^-Act
7 'T
OCFl
71
^7
-r,
-7
OCTO OZIj iCTt > OCTO ^ ^.. " *P 7P t isVsq^ M1q9 ^^y^ IjI )CTfiD*
li::).>
'^
,]l
7
-n
7..
*rv^
k*
^-"-^
P
1-^ ^nou
P 7
y>iffi1
19
^y *PCT (TDAO) 1/ri>^i% P-X7?!>.. 7 7 7 P PP7 ^1o* Ijct lal^nfD ^j^ijktoy 1ZoM.Sn\ ^ctqIi IctIL -^p 17 pP7'^ 77 7 PP7 77 -"P P-X <^Ai\r>V Ict!^ i^nj .IjCT IZoini) loAoj Uso j^nj
AJ|
*.^GU.^ yixQJ
1.^
P*
^P
.0*
-x
^
9..
PPPP
i7
pi7
.ppl
fi
^XLftAD)
7
**lAA^r^ ^CT
t
lAl^r^
^O
7 7
-h
^..7
**U-**'i
l^-t-O ^SO
PPPP7
^IjCT
ItdZoS
i.
.^-li^l
^
*,
7P
21
iy
"^
-"'X
.x-nppp
x7-n_I7
> ^-liiOl
^CIl
]i^ ^QAji
^*rk)>
ctZo^i
^* .^QJI^ ]a*^ 1Z
IjlUrO
^OUiD
IN TRANSLATING.
325
Psalm
-'<^V :]nSV)\
xlv. 1
10.
l^iA^)
.
^^
*r^1o
.Iri^
in\
\lol*
]SD>1*
j^Zq2iD
fcawi
lAlj^r^
..imnV)!
oLjbfiD^Qr)^
]n\V)> .>nir>^o'\v^%
Z;!:)*
^Oah^ ^ZqL
^o
'Uju9 Ucugi
^^L^sonS^
xnj>l
^tO $^wo
^Z'^TD
Psalm
li.
110.
y-^r^
]LMlciO
:LL^
yi^jo^k\n
y\* ^^niSnn
.qj')4
326
CHRESTOMATHYFIRST LESSONS
IN TRANSLATING.
6^>
Aj]=^
t^^lol
^jljAi^ loi^M^o
Al^^I
]lQSn>
7jx>09^
:
Zu^. lA^onn
,
yoL] lyA^
^o
c'l^
ii
i\\>i
\d}1]o \ziO\Ci
As
10
^Q.^
Oc^^ ^^
^'r^
l^? Ull^*
Psalm
civ.
10.
imnZ]o*
2*^]
]-^* o^ASd
,mn\
^jlSql5 J
Co ^o
^-i^'A ^Z|r)
^*
^o
8AiidZj1)ZIo
lAina
oZujjo \ja^
j]>
on\m*
:^-i^oi>ASd
9:'liil]auQinajo .o'^nu
JO
..6oi^ASiflD]k)aMZ* :.6oii^
U^i^^
^>r*
CHRESTOMATHY.
NOTES ON THE READING LESSONS-
the
first
will
will
be induced,
EXPLANATIONS.
Matthew
1) Verse
1.
ii.
10.
word
3.,
r^^l
is
is
from r-^*
2) Y.
1.
w.t.,
fi^O>*^
.klOCLa a
^Q^
3) V.
1.
4) Y.
6) Y.
6) Y.
2.
2.
w.
5.,
^V*^
is
w. 10., f,tfnV) w.
5.,
a verb in the
in
infin. pret.,
from ryv^*
3.
^l2Z|
i>
is
a verb
or ^1
y
7)
Y.
4.
w.
1.,
A12
is
328
8) Y.
4.
NirrES
ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.
w.
2.,
tOOl-^-from
snffix-3d
masc. plural.
9) Y. 4. w.
3.,
JDJ *
^
10) Y. 11) Y.
ciple
(
4. 4.
w.
1.,
^U^-is
11.,
a part, from
^]**
w. 8 and
looi
B.a;
65. B. a).
is
12) Y.
w.
6.,
*-iAj001
13) Y.
w.
12.,
*5QaJ-third, masc.
from
%naj*
14) Y.
w. 15.,
^010
\*p3 is
a verb
m the
fut.
15) Y. Lexicon).
1.
w.
8.,
M-iK^
is
(vid.
16) Y.
T.
w. w.
10., -*V**Z1 is
6.,
17) Y.
8.
Q-^l
is
->
18) Y.
19) Y.
8. 8.
w.
t.,
w. 12., -fcOUJOA**^|j
suflBx,
composed of
7
^OU-meaning
|
him-Sd. masc.
in
>
Aph. conjugation,2d.
20) Y.
8.
plural,
is
>T
masc. (vid. 28.
2.
w. 13.,
o2
a verb 2d.
pi.
Rem.)-
21) Y.
8.
w.
14.,
^^0|CLm
suflBx
is
2d. masc.
plural, imperative,
with a
pronoun
with suffixes
37. 3).
5.,
7.,
22) Y. 10. w.
23) Y. 10. w.
7
lAl^)
is
sing, construct,
from ^9
In
PO,
it
meaning when.
85. 4. d. a).
329
Mark
24) y. 32. w.
4.,
xiv.
3242.
composed of |l;DAk) and
}
]l*rOASDj
is
The
a)-X^'ftit^
an Ethpe. pass,
participle,
from
25) y. 32. w.
8.,
29.
2.
Rem).
26) y. 32. w.
21) y. 33. w.
tion
11.,
7.,
1^lLD-Pa.
act. participle
is
from ].\.
o;SQOASa^
infinitive
8., 9.,
Ethpe.
is
28) y. 33. w.
the prep.
nosZASQ^O
verb in the
^ and the
11.,
9.,
infinitive
from
*OQl
or
%Q1
29) y. 34. w.
ioior;^*
(M>'^V>-Aph. fem.
participle,
from ^
10.,
5.,
'r^*
y^^^y and
^^>
bviZASO-infinitive, Ethpe. from
34) y. 37. w.
15.,
2.,
)Q1
.
or \L^
|^f
4.,
^ollZ
(je)shallenter-Pe.
fut.
^orV\l.
37) y. 38. w. 38) y. 40. w.
suffix
8.,
9.,
f.
Pa. from
7
*Sq4*
<jP
*0G1i1
p..
rom
|l
\ with a plural
pronoun.
I
7
39) y. 40. w.
10.,
13.,
8.,
-aIJ k7iw-fvom ^^
o^QJ
330
42) y. 41. w.
participle
from
2.,
^iIj future of
^
7
>ill to go.
6.,
^Oi^M^ betraT/ing-A-ph.
participle
from
^o\
Luke
45) Y. 18. w.
46) Y. 18. w.
1.,
xxiii.
18
27.
0\n
cried out-Sd.
(lO
6.,
wi01i\on
table of suffixes).
8.,
6.,'
to rekase.
-x
-*0ljL2)aoi
^
^
c/-wci/i!/
from JZia]
49) Y. 22. w.
IP
,
.
19.,
1st. sing.
Pe.
50) Y. 22. w.
1st. singular,
^OlOiO.nH-/
pronoun, fi'om
P
7
willlet
7
with a
3.,
suffix
X
Q^s *
2irged-a part, from
51) Y. 23. w.
52) Y. 23. w.
^^OZ with
with
0001
JQ2L*
him7
10.,
^^OUJOaop
(that)
suffix
36. Table).
4., 5.,
loofZ
X
should ie-future
t
of
looi
*
7*
-n
tOOlA^J* (accordingto)^Mr6^re-a
suffix
feminine,
with a plural
16.,
(16. Table).
their
55) Y. 25. w.
plural from
>oan
>*^
will~Si
noun with a
suffix
^^*0
2.,
56) Y. 26. w.
part, plural from
^iNqqSo
leading or causing
to lead
away-Ajph,
Nn*
4., 0,-ial /aic?
57) Y. 26. w.
Ao/^ o/-from
r*A
331
13.,
8.,
^^^
^^
*
69) Y. 21. w.
\r^r^
Luke
60) y. 33. w.
61) Y. 34. w. 62) Y. 34. w.
5.,
t.,
xxiii.
33
42.
dOQ^* /or^ire-imperative,
from tO*^
16.,
1.,
63) Y. 35. w.
64) Y. 35. w.
prefix prep.
^\o staTiding-psLTtmipie
*
9
from
^QO*
^'Hal-with the
9
7
i^o
12.,
Ijh^jU
X 7
o^/^r^-plural from
Lomad.
13., .A.xl
65) Y. 35. w.
66) Y. 35. w.
14.,
1*0
17
mre-Aph.
7
future,
from ^-m*
1., ^^ I >
n V)
7nocking-i^3iYt
from
Q *^
8.,|1( ^arg-imperat.
3.,
Aph. from
]--m
.feJUp>Z|
suf.
from
JiiJ
Luke
TO) Y. 45. w.
3.,
xxiii.
43
53.
^'r^A^wasrent-'Eih^e.
part,
from
l^*
i IS
( 12.
2.
Rem.).
iV
3.,
1.,
^^(3 zWo
pronoun.
^^3/
ImTids-^om
r<*
with a prefix
and a
suffix
13) Y. 46. w.
8.,
^\SD co7ifiding-VQ.
117
>
act. participle
from ^QflD
14) Y. 48. w.
4., ,^ i
332
75) Y. 48. w.
plural.
16.,
their
breasts-from
(-Ai-*^
^th
suf.
76) Y. 49. w.
1.,
^^
V) I
77) Y. 49. w.
suffix.
6.,
%AG1Q10pi
(10 ^a with
78) Y. 51. w.
79) Y. 53. w.
7.,
1.,
pret.
from
AmJ*
7
;ini ^w^
81) Y. 53. w.
13.,
is
doubled
(vid. 12. 2.
Rem
31. 2).
Acts
82) Y. 23. w.
3.,
xvii.
2232.
^^pAi
^p
83) Y. 23. w.
9.,
AwJD*] I fovMd-A.^\i.
from
84) Y. 23. w.
85) Y. 23. w.
14.,
CfuJLl wi
ii^
Vi^ with a
suffix.
29.,
2.,
;nmV)
86) Y. 25. w.
87) Y. 26. w.
fut. 3d. plural
aS^s.
8.,
.OOOU
shall he,
88) Y. 27 w.
,^iS*^
1^ I
17
17
1
5<'Z:i7io--participle
7
from
P^
89) Y. 27. w.
i
4.,
*^nsV)
seeking,
from
^n\
7
90) Y. 28. w.
^^
4.,
our
life--p\.
suf.
from
91) Y. 28. w.
suffix
5.,
^JuXftlZAlD
*
our
from
^01
or ^1
333
92) V. 28. w,
93) Y. 28. w.
6.,
12.,
tO^^? who
^Sd01Q4
'-
with you-Qom^o^td. of
tOO
you,
\ with
tiuffix
and
J who.
16.,
95) Y. 29. w.
96) Y. 29. w. 9t) Y. 29. w.
.7
8.,
9.,
^ '^^-^
;QCnV>
our
debt,
from
ni n
with a
suffix.
to
15.,
Pe. from
98) Y. 29. w.
99) Y. 30. w.
or joZ
16.,
VZqiSdoIo
J^oAj
by art, from
VZoiiDol*
Pe.
15.,
shall
repe^i^-future
from
*Oo2
100) Y. 31. w.
the prefix j
6.,
% 7
fl?i<^
101) Y. 31. w.
14.,
il^fO
X
showed,
102) Y. 32.
8.,
7
I
KoMANs
103) Y.
104) Y. 105) Y. 106) Y.
vi.
10.
1.
w.
w. w.
w.
4.,
(QQJ
from |C10
J tiA*
1.
8.,
t., 6.,
2.
3.
7
\x^*
Pe.
1st.
pi.
tr^C^> who
^*
7
7
'^
were baptized-^ret
lot) Y.
7
4.
w.
1.,
t^^oZ]
ttre
Jwriei-Ethpe. pret.
1st.
pi.
com,
from ;i^)
108) Y.
4.
w. 14.,
334
*0 1
109) Y.
110) y.
111) y. 112) y.
4. 5.
5.
w. 20.,
w.
4.,
^OU
6.
w.
1.,
>Sr>
k7iowing--'p3LTtm-p\e,
with a
suffix
from
113) y. 114) y.
6.
6.
w.
5.,
Y.,
*2iDjl1
i^
w.
^i^AJ>
^SQaGU
k ff5^rM/e6?-Ethpa. from
^^|
^^4^
115) y.
w.
6.,
116) y. 8 w.
117) y.
9.
10., 13,,
iiU
5^^?/Z
w.
^4^AjdD
from
4-^ *
9.,
118) y. 10. w.
^.m
CoLossiAXs
iii.
15.
119) y.
120) y.
perative,
1.
w.
w.
t.,
QIS
Wv-imperative of
let
llQ^
im
2.
2.,
QI9Z]
*.
your
affections he j?/flca^-Ethpe.
from ^1>
7 7
>
121) y.
3.
w.
4.,
tO^i
>
2/owr /z/g-from
|i
with a
suffix
122) y.
4.
w,
9.,
tO^. ZZ
from
123) y.
124) y.
plural from
5. 5.
w. w.
p
1.,
p 7
3.,
7
0^iV)>01
^
V5j01
335
5.
12.,
126) Y.
Y.
w.
8.,
A-Q2)OTA2iD
Om>>
1|
127) V. 128) V.
8.
w.
w.
w.
3.,
9.
2.,
^OOOlZ
129) y.
9.
3.,
^^i\.r^
^yi'>ig,
Pa.,
from
*.
9.
w.
7.,
*^01Q.^Q< put
off,
cast
away-\mpersitiYe Pe.,
It takes a suffix.
9.
w. 12., i-fcCno^aoOl
*"
^w
deeds-svLf[. state,
plural from
(02)001
Zr rAASD> w^o
sive
5ei?i^
133) Y. 10. w.
au;^> wA^
|*^iOtO
>
created
suf.
134) Y. 12. w.
with the prefix
7.,
a?i^
bdoved-iplural
from (*^>*^>'
O
7
135) Y. 13. w.
termination-2nd.
1.,
tOA^OOlO
X
7
arid
i/e-from
#
pi,
2.,
1.,
^.j; *^
>
m V) forbmring-Psi. part,
a,nd his peace, fr'om
from ;nro
suf.
OlV>\0
*
(lQ^ with
138) Y. 15. w.
139) Y. 15. w,
4.,
from
6.,
140) Y. 15. w.
10.,
^a>QSo
7
thankful-psLTt active
Aph. from
336
Revelations
141) Y.
w.
v.
10.
1.
1.,
A^VmO and I
saw-Aj^h.. pret.
1st.
sing,
from
0
opcTir-Fe.
infinitive
142) Y.
2.
w. 10., kj>jA^kl^ to
from %jaA)
with prefix !^
143) Y.
IV**
3.
w. It., 0L>1V)\
to look
on
i^-infin.
^
A^OOI
it
144) Y.
dropped.
following,
w.
2.,
w-formed from
Ajif
and 001,
*)
being
The phrase, including the word preceding and the one means literally, it is weeping much.
4.
145) Y.
w.
Y.,
>
146) Y. 5. w. 8., t^oZ literally thou shall weej>-2nd. masc-put for the imperative (vid. 61. B. a).
147) Y.
6.
per.
fut.
(vid. 64. 3.
to stand.
^]o
is
a participle from
^OO
JHQJ*
plural,
148) Y.
149) Y.
6.
w.
8.,
|mim
from
f.
6.
w. 21.,
^9>As|> who
were
sentSd. per.
,77
Ethpa. from
>>
Revelations
xxii.
10.
160) Y.
a
suffix,
2.
and
prefix
P
-X
151) Y. 152) Y.
plural,
3.
w. w.
4.,
3.
3d.
masa
*
suffix.
153) Y.
w. 16.,
,7 y JOUiD
JOU*
33t
6.
w.
15.,
OiOV>N
to
8.
156) V.
11. w.
1.,
Ethpa. from
1L#
151) V. 14. w.
from ^^il 158) Y. It. w.
15.,
4., 3.,
(Z cw7i-imperative of fZ|#
159) Y. 19. w.
y^JDJ
shall take
>^^
338
POETRY.
We
in
1826.
rhythmical form,
Peshito or
literal
nor are
version
there
any
divisions
into
close
verses.
The
first,
of the
thirteenth century.
Points, in
Psalm
1
xlv.
10.
Yerse
2.
word
9.,
poiNf^V)
therefore.
This
is
composed of the
Conjunctions as
poi*
2) Y.
3.
w.
1.,
]iO>1
cast
Psalm
3) Y.
2.
li.
110.
Aph. from
w.
1.,
lyv^l
7WM/^i}>/3/-imperative,
kv^
used
4) Y.
2.
w.
2.,
i 1
.1
wash
(
??i-imperative,
with a
suffix
pronoun.
339
w.
7.,
pj
with a
pronoun.
3.
6) Y.
time
w.
8.,
,^*^l\nn
in
all
turn,
always-irom
^D
all,
^}
and the
prefix preposition,
in.
The preformative
falls
away
as the con-
w.
7.,
to
pronoun.
Psalm
10) Y. 11) Y.
5.
civ.
10.
w.
1.,
^^Af
prepared, laid-EthpeAvom
ylO*
pronoun from
6.
w.
4.,
OlAloASO-participle with a
suffix
12) Y.
7.,
7.
w.
7.,
participle,
from
13) Y.
plural,
9.
w.
6.,
OUOrftmo and
suffix
precedmg.
SYRIAC
LEXICON.
^jJd\ a father,
parents.
pi.
VoSs^ol
^ll
Jerusalem.
\Cl^^a\
LOIS I
to go, to
go away.
|0|
to perish,
Aph. to cause
to
]-m1 brother.
fjj\
perish, to destroy.
to
hold,
of.
to
seize,
to
lay
^\ol
to be sad, to be disturbed.
idol).
hold
U*r^\ the
last,
the end.
^01 ^s]
IZ^.*! a
fJjl
Abraham.
^i > >l,
|1 i;*l
another;
fem.
U I m. a reward.
letter,
lA-a*^**l,
pi.
m.
^'r^l,
a writing.
an
ear.
or.
I
tj.4^ayv-| an Egyptian.
- *p
Of
Aal42)ayv^|
Egyptians.
1,^1
Adverb,
like
the
hand-in Hebrew ^^
fpAf
(l-l
li^ol^f.
a nation.
^1
Mesopotamia
(secundum) nearly, J
as, therewith.
^|
if
just
a0190| Edessa
in
(a proper name).
Pi.^1 where?
where
;
|0
there,
Vm>0| a way.
|^-.^>0| the law book of Moses,
the Pentateuch.
a]j
whither?
P-a]
^So whence ?
QDu\
where.
842
SYEIAC LEXICON.
^V.
^1, U^l
that.
how?
>
Uo^l
**^ vv to learn,
Aph. to cause to
learn, to teach.
I*^
^^iSil
pi.
they.
\\ a ship.
vv to constrain,
to compel,
i
^(
to
Ns>
JLil who,
what-P-iji
op-
at what.
pressed.
nrn>|
M ^-^
^^');CLk| Israel (a proper name).
\\Ojk\
I
oppressed.
honor, a
7
mark
X
pol mother.
of esteem,
,
a solemn procession.
aV)(
X
7
Amida
*
|1
in
Mesopotamia
(a proper name).
I
A-^l
Mr^l
it is,
^Lk\
am,
et.
7
17
*
^jkLol,
serpent
at the
(^'p^6va).
*>
fut.
rM^l
^^^1
]
same time-together.
^1 Aph. ^Saoi,
to believe.
Iff
^iOftOU
to eat, to consume.
,
17
>V)| Adv. constantly.
to speak.
A,>]l
So
nV just
as,
>
^.of
of
P
;!k5| to say,
7
irn
0| a stranger, a guest
V^l
7
IS
a lamb.
(f^'vo^).
^A!^l
yet
Bl
but,
(aXXa),
if
not
Oif.
(=V 0)]j
I
IjI I, pi.
^Lm
we.
^^^^ (a
to lament.
Q]1 m. ^^>
1
ill fv
(^ ^cc.)
proper
Voil^ God.
J 5
mctl^
01
gorily.
f.
()J|
Antinum
name).
fZooi!^
divinity, the
godhead.
-W
Ethpa. to sigh.
(,>>,im^ Vv an Alexandrian.
1
man, a certain
X
p
man, pL
SuL
Olaph, the
first
letter
of
..
P..P
the alphal^et.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
343
IZqajI
humanity,
as
concrete,
^i>
lion.
mankind.
J3DQa9 I Arius.
i\
f.
AjV
m.
*jiA
thou
pi.
;
^oAaVm.
ruler,
a chief man.
^tS(l
you.
wife.
(o^^l
a Syrian, a Gentile.
^ZAjI a woman, a
|ZaD| a heaUng.
IjjfcXbVa bound, pi
]^0
rr>>l
I
^
>
an
errorist,
a heretic.
.miro?! heresy
{oCi^sdig).
tU^l
^^
a prison.
ijJQ^flOl styUte
wxDs I
(according to
to find, Eth'pe. to
six
be found.
days work,
Assem.)
17
"W
|Z|
to come, Aph.
7
to
lead,
to
.fy>,rr>^cQl sedition.
bring, to conduct.
7 7
^o4^1
p
.X
^il
of cinnamon.
soldier.
lZQl4'r4^1 a
pi*
ISOxncol external
dress, (c^^jxa).
appearance,
y^lo,
4^1
also,
ISso'Ui
y
a pulpit
(^^fAa).
|ja( neither.
face,
-L^l'
over,
U-2)V
^^ -^T
to,
^Q.1
pO
hence.
<.k2)M
accordmg
make ashamed.
P
7
towards.
IZZoiQ shame,
|)QOCU^( a
7
'^
disgrace.
'^
bishop.
-x
-X
-x
1 to
be anxious, uneasy.
(So
MaiflLcijffour.
a
-X
OOP
*^
agreeableness,
amiableness.
Ioji-4'1 heterodox.
1)Q2 awkward,
uneducated.
BU
|lb
to
SYRUC LEXICON.
P
tX
17
deride,
to
]l'
17 |ZoV)amn
per name.
f.
joy, benignity.
finally.
V;4^
P
T>
m. back.
^^4^
to cease, to destroy.
^QfiClQ to perfume.
^4^
y
to conceive.
|V)mn
Jio
to
p
odors.
U4^ pregnant.
y
to seek, with
^Ld to
entreat,
til
demand.
t
>
>
^
y
to take away.
IlqmjlJD malice.
,iQa>*^ Besoe (a monk-proper name).
'r^^
m. small-t>2 feminine.
a between, by tuLO = t -1
>
Aj
^...2
out
^JOU
Ethpa. with
JD
to contemplate.
AaID Mesopotamia.
|oo
^,
fO
a gnat, a midge.
Lm^,
|AaA
the
a house, V>-^09
dominion.
(a proper
l;r> sou.
lAi^^o ^aJL2 an ^
Aa^
Roman
^CUj^AjLq Bethlehem
name).
l^];^L^
name).
P
P
Barabbas
(a proper
Ipo to weep.
iVS"^ mthout.
Q
|^;^;2 a Barbarian.
7
(iin
pi.
m.
sons,
pul
r 1*^
yf^y^
name).
X
Bardesanes
(a proper
C6>7i5^.
lalalO men,
7
lit.
sons
of men. '^d
is
lA^iio houses,
7
pi.
feminine.
^\
to
fall
lanD
to despise. Far6. P.
|ai2
despised.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
345
y>;3 but,
r
T
jnet.
>ai;o
^ ^
Guria (proper name of
Ethjpa. to
become man.
(i;0
mB^S
man.
the lightning, brightness.
pi.
a woman).
circumcision.
Al5
iJoAo,
a maiden.
jAq
after,
for.
to
uncover,
to
discover,
^>So
5A0
Ethjpe. to
be discovered, to be
shortly thereupon.
made known.
V^yi to rob, Eth^e. to be robbed.
^*
Aa^J^..
fjLi,
(;,
public, free.
an arrow, dart.
(1 i \yt .P P vC^
0^ 7 (1^.
|1 1
^.t
\^
a revelation.
side,
a part,
V^^sx
i.
.7
^P
2L^yi to engrave.
-X
e.
an
^r
an
accomplishment,
|Zo;j^Q-t
perfection.
7
enemy.
(i*^.> the choice.
;5Li to
fulfill,
to
finish.
fA\an. a
7
formation, a creature.
^3^7
(^\\ ^ ^^^, a person,
*
I
Ir^V mighty. ^
unknown.
VJ-y% to lend.
*P
r^-\\,
p
*mi.,
(rcxi-i race,
*2)-\to blaspheme.
ofi'spring.
family (/svo^)^
to
*QfiCl.t A'ph.
<^i
to
lie
down.
happen to any
Quy
in the midst,
^7
7
Q%v^
within.
Pa^^t
p
the north.
^
a lunb.
||Q^ a
troop, a multitude.
|io;-i a bone,
346
SYEIAC LEXICON.
Ji9>
>
tive
Pronoun ;
to offer,
^^)
P
7
of a river).
!;->
M^>
;i>
a
7
cloister.
*P
^P
i**^y an
ofifering.
m;^) a monk.
Os
|LQu;-j monastic I 17 1
life.
injiAA> testament
{^la^^xvi),
VJ. ?
to
lie.
Pa.
^K^*
P>, tl^)
*
P
pure, clean.
^lo^ty
(OG1>
a falsehood.
Pj pj
7
to remember.
gold.
];^0>
P0>
behavior.
>oau>
k
lliO>
similar.
]lib9 Constr.
5^Sd> to sleep.
X
7
St.
ukib> value.
y k V>> sleeping
Matt.
viii.
24, pi.
"jA^j
Qa) an
fear, terror,
]y\,
A^>
7
superstition.
evil spirit,
^1Sd> to weep.
the Devil.
;S;D>
Ethpa. to wonder
at, to
be
pQ^>
to be possessed of an evil
p
astonished,
^>
spirit.
*^-jj
who
7
to
judge,
Pass. Part.
^J
judged.
Possessive Pron.
is
i\i>
JaiJj the feast of the appearance
my, or my.
of Christ
^lXi> thy, or
who
Epiphany.
is
thy.
*9
J
^>
KLft>
fi-ij
^>J
judgment.
is
P^JJ an arm.
* This
^yy
^
Vid.
reference above.
any one.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
347
.minioj *
kO
Vol lo
(>01 Pa. a)01 to lead, to guide.
^ft)01 to
return,
Aph.
to
lead
back.
*fiD90901
IjCn
7
this, she,
Pr(m.{Chal.,
)i^X\)T
P901
h01,
here, hither. ^0
>OjOl members.
(>J01 honor, glory.
7
0G1 m. ^01
f.
0*.
f.
>
001 who;
7
a0LO
to be
since.
lb 01
^1
to redeem, Fut.
*
7
^P
]Ie)1
>
*
,
P^.
oou*
QiaOOI he,
1
she.
^1,
p y
]loi
time, pi.
I
Acts
*.. 7
001 them.
customs, deeds.
xvii. 26.
*.. 7
7
(aaooi
^fuOl
'
there, then.
'
il*^!
-
A^Z
7
thrice
;
3>0,)
^ ^1
be
just,
before.
yZo-lV)
trine,
iOl faith,
belief,
docsay-
Ul
P
to
grow dumb,
to put to
silence.
17
7
-hS
ing faith.
ZqDOI
M-i^Ol
^.201,
T>
manner.
*..jO>1 to
it is
therefore.
|1
i^P.
10\
SO, in this
manner.
\^
0>1
pondence.
for, there.
lAo)l
alms.
^^01 Fa.
to walk.
to wander, to
go
forth,
^^iNoi they,
^Ol,
I
f.
-x
!01 m.
*
f.
plur.
tOJOl
.m.^ir>^
name).
Zenobius
(a proper
m. ^xJOl
348
BYRIAC LEXICON.
^ov
^01, ^1 to move, to be
restless.
10
17
;>yt
><
lame.
f.
rM m. (pM
honor, splendor.
PI
Ir-AA,
any one
\^m^
to
^^
Sunday.
of
%u,-.A
rejoice
|Ao>
PVl
a weed.
LO pKi to rejoice
'*
very much.
^1
to arm.
Vr^
-^
\LOfXt rejoicmg.
P
...
a conqueror.
];.i^l a song.
species, kind.
J.J1
Mr^ joy.
^ifAA the breast, pi.
xxiii.
,
U.J1,
m. fornication.
suflf.
Luke,
IlOaJI
fornication.
7
48.
>ai1, IjQII
small.
little,
JQll to
|*^i01
7
cry, to call.
ji9rAj
around.
cross.
LpM
p
to renew.
f>..
1Z,-M new,
Qa*, Pa;.
dicate.
II
7
pi.
l^r^
7
^Qlm
to show, to in^
IjV*^ free,
I^Vm^
quiet,
free.
<^i ought.
|A^Q*^i
dence.
.>
(liQja love.
concealed
I
..
resi-
P;XSQ>4
I
7
injury.
X 7
|o,o...
I
7
7
beloved,
pi.
,^i*^i*^i
I^TILm
7
vision,
pi.
p^P*^ &n
any one.
p
apparition.
I
7
t
tani
to enclose.
feast,
;^pa June.
to bind.
L^ a
feast day.
OVm
SYRIAC LEXICON.
349
*9
y^^M
t*^N>
pi.
to dream,
Ethpe.
to re-
\l\^ a
view.
sin.
cover.
for,
14^
to err, to
sin,
instead
of.
fOl^A* m.
foil^AA
crime,
|a!4^>
and
sin.
^Ol^Ai*
VAo^**
sigh.
9
IS
f.
7^
pi.
1A4a* wheat,
HLA* to
tk.-A>
live,
]4>*
^i-M we,
1*^1 i
us, pi. c.
from \l\*
Aph. t^-Ml
t
a heathen, an idolater.
-x
and
(>
M life.
(It always
it.
^*mt
vehement, strong.
<*^i
P.-X
n
7
m. a debtor,
pi.
^^i^a n
an animal,
1^0 *>
I
living creature,
a monster.
7
Aa|^i^>
7
diligently.
an army.
^2Uj
tI^A. to blush, to
be ashamed.
^^.Lm
to strengthen.
i
\^^
strong.
>^S>
and |Ji^\a
17
>
jQaj to be white.
\j^ to see, to look out.
17
X I
ii7
wise,
plural
^>j, ^r*^|
,77
>;>*
m.9
to curse, to detest.
Pa. to
?
Q>
liberate.
]AV)^M
wisdom.
\\*^
magician, a sorcerer.
|]aj vinegar.
'(L\L
fly.
f.
from 12'^1
finally,
the
]h^0
Nm
Nt
a gnat, a
to
end, enough.
<^
mingle,
to
Ethpa. to
with
f*ja endurance,
suffering.
take part,
associate
^Q,
pOAj^
Eph.
darkness,
iv.
pi
any one.
^Ioqaaj
healthy.
18.
^Aja
to mark, to seal.
seal.
uLm
to wash.
jScAja a
850
ff*
-
SYRIAC LEXICON.
^IL^ to
carry.
*n\(f Etkpa. to be
dispersed.
12)4
a rumor, a report.
-^^j-
^4
W
12LL4 unclean.
n ^ Fart.
seal.
IZq^U^
uncleanness.
Iln^
^a^
be
willing.
p^Q^
(jAaci4 bappy,
]LOh\(f
error, heresy.
^010-4, and
ofiFspring.
hDO^ kind,
NOS^
^L^
to
|Ai (^O^
vine, branch.
i^a4 readiness.
|fnV)Q^ a part
SiCL^,
(j2:i2Li= *iQ4)
run.
*Sl4 to over-
(tomus.)
Aph,
*S1^1 to overflow,
^4
to
to
fill.
thing, to overflow.
ac-
fjQ^
a mountain.
distress, misfortune.
^9Q4
I
90^
cealed,
y 7
I*
that which
secret.
is
con-
*2)'r4 to strike,
Ethpe.
^'ril]
jl^O^^O
(j
t^'p^ a
leaf.
0*^i
ft
(^,
|Zo*^i
goodness, excel-
|mn(^ an
arrangement,
order,
Pi,
state (Tafij).
]j^,
the same.
|i\^
tAi\(^ a
girl,
a maiden.
to dry up.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
351
^,
now
9
9 7
^O
No daily. 19
7
on account
V>-9Q- a Greek,
Aa|JQ^ Adverb.
],_u Ay*,
'
t-ijo] to
thank, with
in
*3 to
beUeve
in something, to
confess,
]v>^
m. acknowledged, known.
knowledge.
,.0 9
]Alr^
f.
,N
to
;
^r^
know,
to be acquainted to
be born.
'with
Ethjpe.
be known
to
19
in-
p-Xi birth. #7 rP
-X
IjQ
^
*
7
Ni
a teacher, a learned
man.
t*^\
*
9
fV)
.1
the sea.
to swear, Apk. to cause to
to.
r^m
-
^9
to
;
I
a
give,
Imjperative
fV)
^^
one's
I
-X
with
I
1m2J
to
give
*9
I
|1
swear, to swear
I
7
up
9
9
life.
v
*?*.
right.
Vijoauj
^9
Jews.
>i<^r>> Jovmian (a proper
7
^rr>r>i
name).
9
-X
<
^-'^^
rapidly.
(a proper name).
care.
rOji to burn.
19
proper
illustrious,
honored,
(l*^\ni a
.
doctrine, teaching.
^Q--i, pbou
^^'
day,
^991 (SnV)in
to day,
great.
JD;u
respectability).
352
*p
SYETAC LEXICON.
U^'r^ a month.
(la*rj,
^.fiO^CO a throne.
7
1^1^;^ a
Jesus.
tent.
O
-x
Ethpa.
-X
p.
^Zl
laying the
to
^QA^
JuLa
-So
blush.
7
X X
1
A- being, essence.
110
or
^O'^^JD
the
of
7
on
extending
hand
*,
to
remain,
to
dwell,
to
(X^J^o-rov/a).
settle, to sit.
;iAji
^-D
X
-x
all,
every,
N O each.
more than.
]*^\o
abound.
a dog.
P
|Zo;-Aa superfluity.
)xLi to win, to
Uo^^i^ every
2.
thing,
any thing.
VAIo
7
a bride.
IP
I>
to prevent, to rebuke.
pQ2 how
lA |o,
X
l^p
passion.
LuUId justly.
IZojp justice,
or Peter.
(Aid a
p
i>
fellow servant.
\ki\D a stone, a
rock,
Cephas,
%M1D
IZp
7
f.
a rebuke.
;^^
7
perhaps.
(IT) an
^
p
assembly.
fD
as,
(coo a cup.
the Part.).
Itqo
^
to conceal,
*P
p
..
Pa. to cover,
one's-self.
7
poi2
-X
Ethpa. to hide
a priest.
priesthood.
*
r
^P
(Zqjoid the
IP
(QD,
(imn, (>fn^
concealed,
pmQO
7
shame.
1
..
11*^0 famine.
7
|jQ2Q3 m. a
IjSOQD a
star, ^/.
|jQ2Q2
^QO, (02 m.
where.
it
|p
to feel pain,
^ A^p
pains
UjJOO
cell.
one.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
kO
353
'
(1;S
sad,
sorrowful,
JSM^e.
to
^A^Q^
Zol^
iKkL
,>i^,
abuse, insult.
OUp, loup
infirm,
(^^ii^utftfsjv).
to blot out.
]i ^ffr^>p a christian.
>Q\o
only, alone.
yt\D to involve, to
by.
roll up, to
pass
]V>\ bread.
tJi,
roll,
t^,
\
not.
it is
X^
&c.
night,
pi.
pp a
]]a2 a
-
scroll.
^oN
A.&^
collision,
a shock.
>
<^*^ Etkpa.j
to
nil
|J_^
an insane person.
^li?
;
humbly
entreat.
^iiLover, up
besides.
vyi^ before,
jdAd
P-Ad
^Ao a writing,
flax, linen.
a book.
m\
to eat.
]jO0nN
.
opponent.
tongue, langua laire
12)Ad a
shoulder.
aN, (la\
>Ao
]Sd when.
a part
U not,
\i^
i*^n
no
]] J lest,
without.
I;!]^ word,
of speech.
discourse,
heart.
V to arouse, to cheer.
dress,
p po
*P.
a handle, a covering.
spring, fountain.
blessing,
tlO*^V>
7 7
]^0o\
a garment.
(Ad;*^V> a
tion.
|J-,^Sd,
a benedic-
y^^
;*S\
]A\.tV)
scroll,
volume,
a*S\
to clothe, to cover.
,^ freely.
%
.1 V), (so. J^ a
wise man, pL
354
SVKfAC LEXICON
Iff
]l
Aji]ii>()V) secretly.
(i
'|ZQj;^rSD redemption.
V) water.
to die, Ajph. to cause to die,
];ar^ a
,-^
cloister,
a chamber.
A^^
to mortify.
r-^
jAaId
distinguished, excellent.
llupSo,
lAlji^
a town, a
city.
P^qLo
humility, modesty.
affable,
modest.
Vi^r^
East.
eastern,
MjJ^
the
|/n^>^Vn
gence.
7
lowhness,
mtelli-
]'r^'r
^iT^So, ^^!So
to be depressed.
full.
VSd to be
to be
(j-iiiD
P 7 7
filled.
VZvQOloi
gift.
jDQSd, Fa.
n>v)
to deride.
poSo
)1qLd
]
myrrh.
death.
pPio
strike, to
an angel, a messenger.
|a\V) a captain.
prick, to
V) to
a
yXiO
to advise, to
consult, to
bite,
reign.
IZokkSo
blow,
plague,
2>l.
y^^,
*
7
]h \V> a
king.
]Zqm1o*
)j.*.m1d weak, humble.
IZonNV)
\\\
a kingdom.
V>
to speak, to converse.
;mV) on
the morrow.
pi.
)^^
waves.
to arrive,
Abs. word.
poafctVl) a tempest,
14^
to go, to come,
'^NV) a
3/. Fret.
^^h6*^ from,
of; J
Z^
of,
JLQI'^W)
on account
P
over,
Vy.^
while.
IjJ^SaLd speech.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
VAa'^a^)*
355
^io who?
7
^ \n
is
that,
which,
tical
(i.
person),
Christ)
;
this
(m-s'v);
it
e.
certainly
often
is
ecclesiastical ladies.
superfluous.
|AAj-t;l0 a
of,
pearl,
^D
(
ft
of,
from, on account
loS,
.1
^
?
since
stone.
7
from,
of;
^-i
3;..^ to
to
*0
-X
fall off,
to cast away,
make
7
7
free.
with
,^lV) of us.
|Zoj;Ld a
*
P
falling
off,
an
injury.
U^ what
|;V)
bold,
impudent,
Adv.
l^ci^jVo a garment.
^P
I
7
]AjlSd a part.
f;^;^
^0.
7
m.0
bitter, sorrowful.
7
fZ.Qj;*^>mV) patience.
jAi^a^SD a
00 7
chariot, a throne.
]mmV)
poor.
f.
Pfej;So
that
which
relates
to
fAjijOSOlSb
Christ.
baptism.
I-L-Sd, 12;S.V)
cavern.
<
f
hollow,
community.
*^
^^
]!a
^^ an mterpreter,
l^fAliD a messenger.
an explainer.
1
*,i.aV) to anoint.
^Sd,
^So
possible.
^Sd
laV)
7
to have
power to do (with t^
^P
siah.
by, through).
W>aV)
7
-X
complete, perfect.
^A^So
VAi ISd
(,ib,
in the midst.
10
1V)aV) a
P
deacon, a minister.
^Pj
midst.
(u'rk)
1*^,
Lord,
Sir,
^*^
for
con.
kP 7
literally
my Lord
(title
tl;aV) a person
356
SYRIAC LEXICON.
VZairCuA^Ali
oaASD
f.
obedience.
|Zo;-P abstemiousness.
to extend.
|JmJ a
valley.
brmg, to
deliver.
pi.
l^il
(AmJ m. a garment,
>
^a!AmJ,
*a43
i.
to drop.
of,
1^1
m. a prophet, Matt.
22.
^
7
to take care
1 1 f.
to watch.
|Zn
|Z.0>^1
-X
f.
prophecy.
out, patience,
^7
11
1
lenity,
meekness.
17
drawing
suflfering.
tiOi
joJ,
p
Zo;-i-iJ
(^
*
7
a yoke, a bow.
^-k2J
I
7
jOU to shine,
fjOU a
Aj^h. to light,
to be bright.
river.
tJD0V)1 law.
7
T>
pOIQJ m.
shine.
hght, from
JOU
to
pOimi
7
7
temptation.
nrf>1 to ascend.
{i paj refreshment.
^Jyiu to
fall.
put away.
X
jaQJ,
p
-x
p^QJ
*o
rest.
p
-x
aV^Q^,
ppQLJ
f.
7
1
liupQJ ^QJ, to
P
ni*^
also Neuter.
sleep.
spread.
-x
Pt^QJ
*.
distribution, expending.
IP,
9QJ
fire.
to ^ to A ^ to plant.
I
fight,
attack.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
357
Ilm^
>^ I
Imu ^
a victory, an
3
exploit.
in
>^ to order,
to arrange.
Nesibis
Mesopo- )G1D to
testify,
to witness, A^h.
to die as a martyr.
|>GlfiD Emjph. of
>GlD a witness,
a martyr
==,aa^^Tu^).
follow.
;AJ
l&J
^LtS\) a woman.
QD \= a multitude.
P^Xyt QD offense.
-'^^<^f^ to
pAj
a downfall, a curse.
|!bot^
silver,
money.
take pleasure
|Z(b a bushel.
yioQflO thought.
(nro an
|n ^om
heaven.
reception, ascension to
fm>nCD M^D
7
>OQD, ^.IX) to
ode, a song.
to add,
place, to inter,
IAa^CD an
^IiJId
or
to shut,
iJSoli
books,
to be satisfied.
to
write
compose
;*^rr) to believe,
P^. to
declare,
jii
i;0 to
Eth^e. to be
t;*^fio hope.
|!yJ]D to multiply,
to be
buried.
to increase.
O-y.
j]D0p3QflD synod
(tfuvoiJof).
p-QJO
need,
indigence,
poverty,
IZf.^
I
>
worship, honor.
|JQ.|JDD a cluster.
7
P T
1 1
Pi)QD Syria.
^"jjjQflO
i yi
rn,
yi
|Zo|
i .1 (in
a multitude.
Syriac.
358
SYRIAC LEXICON
1 Asim,
lips.
7
jp/.
down,
Fa. to
t;fin
Pa. to dishonor, to
violate.
a page.
feast,
a feast-day.
tolerate.
r^l
to
V) irn
fASiCY) an assembly.
19
'^11 fin I
double Accusative).
y
a sword
(|(poj).
rOl
m.
servant,
xiii.
vl.
\x*^\
Ij^il Mat.
21.
IZoN^rO
transgression.
;
JOIQI
7
creator.
>n\m
.SOfY),
n\
^QfiD to place,
to commit.
Hebra-
.^^m
refreshment, to tarry.
U-lQCD
left,
wrong.
]lD to hate.
|C0 hated, mean.
W
niT)
7
to
need,
niHT) Fart.
until,
]^rl
until that;
Fass. Ft.
visit
(the
,
^,
7
Mr^time.
aid.
J pi
Fa. to support, to
church.
to act unjustly.
r^lfiO
a scribe, pZ.
r^^CD, 1 1*^^
ship.
\l^
Vi
^no, l^ia^no a
^Ql
7
^Ql, fjOl
unjust, sinful.
poi
wicked, ungodly.
STRIAC LEXICON.
359
]jl^ai a
habitation, an abode.
]j'p3Ql death.
IjoSqi a
-x
pillar.
(jUQI an answer, an
song.
alternative
IP
>0SnS an
inhabitant.
to be troubled.
USOl
trouble, labor.
(Zol^jal uncircumcision.
p
fiOl to dwell.
>ai
p
or ;^ to watch.
X^ to blot. p
\fjLL custom.
fZaiOll
*P
piety.
is
^A^, P-iA
eye.
dead.
(ill a cloud.
I..
i
Vr^
a guardian angel.
^^i,rns twenty.
(ai
P |l
I
Prt. to inter.
T>
^^ because.
S aversion, opposition.
*
7
|LQ^Q^
lAi^
avarice.
'^nS
^p
p
Pfle/,
to inquire.
|Jl,
cause.
altar,
(;oi a
Acts
xvii.
root.
]AXi an
ml, \y^
into,
23.
*),! to flee.
to go, with
to
go
^Al
ri^Al
to avail, to prevail.
hibited
one,
with any
into,
Ethpe.
go
Aph.
]naii
pAl,
ancient, old,
rich.
f.
VAcui\l,
I'^Al
world, race,
generation.
^Ql
^Ol,
7
with, above.
toi
~
a nation,
pi.
^jl^D^dL,
]y]2i
7
^w2)
(iOl to suffer one's self to be dipped,
to suffer one's-self to be baptized.
to meet, to
happen to (with
K^, Vn^
body.
360
iOSi*
SYRIAG LEXICON.
*
7
17
(imf)^^ ^Q
chantment.
(A.eJL) a limit,
7
apparition,
an en-
jOO^oaPaul
]ui.\o<^ work.
(a proper name).
an end.
to free, Aph. to
jQQfiQ2),
jn2)
PpDOa
a command.
permit.
JQ) a
lot,
a portion,
^/.
(COS)*
(Zoikia a work,
P
I
labor.
^, Pa
7 P
-X
*-
^
<K
17
to free, to deliver.
|lO>Q2) redemption,
salvation.
fJdSi to
command.
m^OO
P^>a2)
wQa,
to
separation.
^fOQ^, yifOQSi
come
mand.
precept, com-
i-aZ)
to remain, to
any one.
doubt.
(nsQS
(Cu>^
^P
-x
paradise.
deliverer.
\CLMQjZi an explanation.
PD0;2> a redeemer, a
,^i\tAg) a
phial.
P
P
-x
|qqcDQ-Li^
.rc\nf\\
a philosopher.
JCL\Si Persia.
.o\ Pilate
(a proper
ySL\Si a Persian.
rewarded.
IP
jjqLd;-!^
church.
servant
of
the
-X
(20 ;2
7
face, presence.
. P 7
\D2i cheek,
i-iujla to divide,
*. 7
Ethpa. to doubt.
#7
P
to be divided, to appoint.
L'fSi to
break.
^^a2
Il2) to
return.
to extend, to spread,
right.
Pa. to answer,
t^ia^ just,
known
Ethpe. to turn
one's-self.
na<^
to interpret.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
^Ql
a matter.
|*^iN a
|V>\ a
cross.
figure,
an image.
wmAs)
to open.
jp/.
I^Aa
god.
m.
idols,
images.
|)
Ethpe. to be
separated, to
I^As) an
idol,
an image of a false
burst.
7
;
\y.ao Aflol
to pass.
to be filthy.
7
to happen, to
come
fl^
vile, filthy.
;jQO
to bury.
KO
to be willing, to wish.
will,
;ilQO,
pQjdO
a sepulchre.
the beginning.
^0-^t, |asj,
5>OpO
7
for,
to,
>
5>0^^
,^22>
^ V>
of one's-self, freely.
ere, before.
m.0
^aJD*
(1.^1^
1*7
will. will,
\M^fO
purpose.
holy.
loo
to remain, to stop.
reception,
|CJL to thirst.
^0
^
a
JjCJQO a
ment.
. P
-x
an entertain-
to fast.
fasting, fast days.
P^O
|Z.jo
days of
\MyCLO
holiness.
p
figure,
a pretence.
|1# to incline.
Aph. to
conclude,
erect,
to set
up,
to
de-
to
appoint,
to
l^^O
pre-
ceding, to
inclined.
Up,
X^t
one.
i^
Ethpe. to be crucified.
prayer, an entreaty.
fZo^* a
362
*.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
ll
.to
*-
Pa^Ojlao
er name).
Cappadocia (a prop*
>^i^ftp>or^
Constantine
fimo
IP *fO to
cassia.
(a proper name).
name, to
call,
to choose.
1^900 a town, a
city.
^^O
near.
^JU9ao
name).
a Cjrenean (a proper
(mID) to
l^'fO war
lA^QO
|j
truth.
q4^
ni.
a murderer, a robber.
ico\|^fr>o;o a
X
7
crystal.
*^i;0 near.
|1
i;0 reading.
field,
|]4o
slaughter, murder.
pOi^
a league, (V^
O tl^
l/u;o a
*P
7
a country.
consecrated virgins.
P;iD a horn.
]Z\V)iO
\t\
i
resurrection.
(Aao^O
^P
calvary.
17
a song. a
tree,
|>0
bark, a book.
a priest, an elder.
|<'^- <^
*^5
mucli,
great,
loud,
chief;
J[6;f.
2) ateacher,
-<..
jEw^^^.lbi
7" 7
IJ-D a
little.
voice.
pl.
\^J
Const.pl.
.42n
up, to
^iSn
*.00O;
I
Jo J
X
to grow.
Fa. to bring
p
So
the clergy.
educate.
..*
VAilD a
bride.
;
Qdj
Aph. to grant,
-J
a myriad,
y/.
^Q29*
|jLO to acquire
to bring.
I
|Zqsj
greatness, a multitude.
7
.(^.>, *- J to
ilO
a pen, a reed.
desire,
po;.^J^ a
centurion.
Ui5 to be angry.
]ijO to
call,
to cry.
^^>, y^i
foot.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
353
^Q.t9 to stone.
jiLt9
jlO)09 a
rank.
prince,
a person of
same, with
JD
pioAO) a
to perceive, to
sign.
y)i
remark.
|A..> a wish, a desire.
>> beloved.
^
;
i>
to
love,
Ethpa.
with
with and
^i
to feel compassion.
pi.
IP iH V>
l^0>9 a
7 ,
to ship.
|SQja9
compassion,
benevo-
lence, love.
persecutor.
(ASDajJ love.
(jlS0>9 persecution.
^C1>
T
p
^Ui9 to
lie,
to float.
far distant.
to be afraid, to be terrified.
-X
Aja) to be
Ui^9 smell
VpAj spittle.
[Xm^j the
first
named.
firstling,
-x
H'
P
-x
(Aaa^j, Aa^a^)
begin-
oaO> m.
(>*0>
f
f.
wind, breath,
pamai?
spirit.
t1 >0> spu'itual.
o
-x
(slmOj bowel
mercies.
love,
bowels of
J^O)
*
7
to ride.
feel inclined, to
^>
(Oa09
Ethpa. to
be
IojsjO)
distance
^^
moved.
y)>, ]SDi
f.
from a distance.
lASoi high,
iv. 6.
loud,
pi
^OJ
fcP
Ajph.
^Q_^)|
to raise up,
jSdS
James
lie,
to elevate.
P -x,
pii
to
to be placed, Aph, to
jloiDO) a
P
P
gift.
cast, to send;
with *^
Nn
to
-x,
p^lO)
|ioO)
a quarrel. a cloth
J
a rag.
364
SYRIAC LEXICON.
to praise.
|i*^
hills,
captivity, destruction.
praise- worthy.
vine.
Vi^)
niir.
Luke
xxiii. 30.
sufifer-
i*^
IZoauiiDi
patience, long
fAa i*^ a
^4^*
7
a sceptre.
]aSD9 evening.
imft>> to sprmkle.
Jl>
If
,^iS*^
^IOa,
(Sn
seven,
seventy.
Ethpa. to be reconciled.
nn
to leave,
to give up,
to
[bS^M a week.
(u^Q.!^ an
|laA)
sense, mind.
I
uproar.
restless,
uneasy.
iOAj M^g.
^'
to be angry.
pHL)
rOj
^(^
thunder.
to kindle.
|lui3>
a transgressor.
sign.
^as9
2, 5
to
make a
' ^
>f Pa. to
is sent.
,
send,
jE%a. >?A*(
to be inflamed, to rejoice.
J 01* to
awake.
to be
^oa\
Ijl* an
QM
to be worthy, Ethjpe.
considered as worthy.
^ji
to entreat,
pi.
\aQm*
^\l
to ask after
pOliDCUi renown.
|A!L,
1Z8-
ViwQQs
entreaty.
praise,
renown, glory.
\LCi'^^%
nearness.
2ia
SYRIAC LEXI(X)N.
365
>
(4^Q*
dishonor, shame.
excliange,
]V)\
*p
j)/.
m.
lV^\
peace.
]<^\>>Qj change,
poV) Samona
X
-X
^Q, vg^
-x
to despise.
right.
wiJOV) Simon
P
7
(i
V)
heaven.
(a
t^iV)s Samosata
name).
>
proper
pQ
PP
-x
a wall.
beginning.
confirmation.
gain, advantage.
stupid.
inferior.
Jlj?/^.
X
]j9QA
iNV)
7
to finish, to complete.
MSa
to hear.
*
p)QS
P
-x
(a proper
P^Zq*
P
name).
-n
|)Q4* awkward,
..I
AiQs
^aSQ*
to serve.
the sun.
wkkQs j?/.
vmJH* I
f.
^^i>i>T present,
Cl'kJ Zoi^ to
to be able, to find.
die.
>S
P
(is, fi pL,
m
-ft
insane, foolish.
]]*,
>,.
>iN
lAl
year.
to cease, to rest.
>
'^
"^
\
i\
i"
"^
^.-^
rest,
^Lo
^p
]i\,
|
7
^ lalV) sudden.
an apostle.
* 7
-<*
sharp.
I
7
4^ Pa. *4^
be powerful.
to
fulfill,
to be able, to
to relate.
V*
I
lAl an
hour;
\tlJkCi
01S
7
forthwith.
play.
fern,
-pi'
with
vA lll jest, I
m.0%0
faj09
to die.
to give
up the ghost,
T^i^'^er,
goodr-
366
B2.
^\clm
to hear, to take ; Apk. with to
|;-4|Z not clear, dirty.
2) dregs,
Lo
go away.
that which
able.
is
most objection-
I;* an mhabitant.
Jj
to dwell; with
^\l to
MoZ
besiege,
7 7
to
demand.
on trade, Ethpa. to
Fa. to begin.
^*^'rM,
V^'fJ^
^Z
generation,
bio-
to carry
(Z)QiDjZ wonder.
L. ;* a
light,
wax
light,
a candle.
PsboOlZ an
abyss.
|;^QlZ wonderful.
|Ax- ry.;-*
parition.
a spectre, an ap-
)01L to be
surprised.
oZ
Alpha-
P;a
bet.
J^oL
^oZ
\*rA\M true.
really.
Adv. A_-Vr'r*
truly,
to return.
again.
YrM truth.
01 oZ to be astonished.
a;
TO
SIX.
pLi>OL
X
7
mterpretation.
A^lcuA*
^L.,JB
^f^v. silently.
fZoZ
dumb.
repentance.
limit,
to be silent, to be
PiDQjaZ a
ZUtZ,
bound.
2.
-
^^
A**A^
^-
'
I^JZ
a merchant.
(a
|Zon>Z
repentance.
urge, Par/.
%^2Z
^CDQAj-aolZ
proper name).
|jZ to
to
^ i *^oZ,
Theophilus
(a
Luke XXV.
hang
23.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
36^
Lj^Z
suow.
the Trinity.
scholar, Ethjpa
J2U.0Z
^a.>Z
great, strong.
to explain, to interpret.
IZoAa^Z
fii^L to
make a
to be learned, to be a scholar.
Ir-A^D^Z a scholar.
A!LZ,/.
^i^lm.
three.
(AaLQsZ
]iSdZ/.
eight.
^Z/.
1lZ
nine.
^SiZ
>SZ
AaAsZ
a narration.
t
.<
,wv
in "-^ rH CM
rH
-P
O
03 s:
O
-P
5
(4
bO
\2156
LIBRARY
Pontifical Institute of
Mcd:.,al Studies
'
113 ST.
'OS^-
U4